Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15 Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 1.
What are p-block elements?
Answer:

  • Elements in which the differentiating electron (the last filling electron) enters the outermost p orbital are p-block elements.
  • Since maximum six electrons can be accommodated in p-subshell i.e., three p-orbitals, the p-block contains six groups numbered from 13 to 18 in the modem periodic table.
  • The p-block elements show greater variation in the properties than s-block elements.

Question 2.
Write the names of the elements present in groups 13, 14 and 15.
Answer:

Group Name of family Name of the elements
13 Boron family Boron (5B), aluminium (13Al), gallium (31Ga), indium (49In), thallium (81Tl)
14 Carbon family Carbon (6C), silicon (14Si), germanium (32Ge), tin (50Sn), lead (82Pb)
15 Nitrogen family Nitrogen (7N), phosphorus (15P), arsenic (33AS), antimony (51Sb), bismuth (83Bi)

Question 3.
i. Write the general outer electronic configuration of the elements of group 13, group 14 and group 15.
ii. By how many electrons do their outer electronic configurations differ from their nearest inert gas?
Answer:
i.

Group General outer electronic configuration
13 ns2 np1
14 ns2 np2
15 ns2 np3

ii. The outer electronic configurations of the elements group 13, group 14 and group 15 differ from their nearest inert gas by 5, 4 and 3 electrons, respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 4.
In which form do the elements of groups 13,14 and 15 occur in nature?
Answer:

  • The elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 do not occur in free monoatomic state and are found as compounds with other elements.
  • They also occur in the form of polyatomic molecules (such as N2, P4, C60) or polyatomic covalent arrays (such as graphite, diamond).

Question 5.
Write condensed electronic configurations of the following elements.
13Al, 49In, 14Si, 50Sn, 15P, 33As
Answer:
Condensed electronic configurations of
i. 13Al: [Ne]3s2 3p1
ii. 49In: [Kr]4d105s25p1
iii. 14Si: [Ne]3s23p2
iv. 50Sn: [Kr]4d105s25p2
v. 15P: [Ne]3s23p3
vi. 33As: [Ar]3d104s24p3

Note: Condensed electronic configurations of elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 are given in the table below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 1

Question 6.
Name the following.
i. A metalloid present in group 13.
ii. A group 13 element which is the third most abundant element in the earth’s crust.
Answer:
i. Boron
ii. Aluminium

Question 7.
Why boron is classified as a metalloid?
Answer:
Boron is glossy and hard solid like metals but a poor conductor of electricity like nonmetals. Since it exhibits properties of both metals and nonmetals, boron is classified as a metalloid.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 8.
Describe the variation in the electronegativity of group 13 elements.
Answer:

  • In group 13, on moving down the group, the electronegativity decreases from B to Al.
  • However, there is a marginal increase in the electronegativity from Al to Tl.
  • This trend is a result of the irregularities observed in atomic size of elements.

Question 9.
Atomic numbers of the group 13 elements are in the order B < Al < Ga < In < Tl. Arrange these elements in increasing order of ionic radii of M3+.
Answer:

  • The given elements are in an increasing order of their atomic number.
  • The general outer electronic configuration of group 13 elements is ns2np1.
  • M3+ ion is formed by the removal of three electrons from the outermost shell ‘n’.
  • In the M3+ ions, the ‘n-1’ shell becomes the outermost shell. Size of the ‘n-1’ shell increases down the group.

Therefore, the ionic radii of M3+ ion increases down the group in the following order:
B3+ < Al3+ < Ga3+ < In3+ < Tl3+

Question 10.
Why the atomic radius of Gallium is less than that of aluminium?
Answer:

  • Atomic radius of the elements increases down the group due to addition of new shells.
  • Electronic configuration of Al is [Ne]3s23p1 while that of Ga is [Ar]3d104s24p1.
  • As Al does not have d-electrons, it offers an exception to this trend.
  • As we go from Al down to Ga the nuclear charge increases by 18 units. Out of the 18 electrons added, 10 electrons are in the inner 3d subshell of Ga. These d-electrons offer poor shielding effect.
  • Therefore, the effect of attraction due to increased nuclear charge is experienced prominently by the outer electrons of Ga and thus, its atomic radius becomes smaller than that of Al.

Hence, the atomic radius of gallium is less than that of aluminium.

Question 11.
The values of the first ionization enthalpy of Al, Si and P are 577, 786 and 1012 kJ mol-1 respectively. Explain the observed trend.
Answer:

  • The trend shows increasing first ionization enthalpy from Al to Si to P.
  • Al, Si and P belong to the third period in the periodic table and hence, they have same valence shell.
  • As we move across a period from left to right, the nuclear charge increases. Due to this, electrons in the valence shell are held more tightly by the nucleus as we go from Al to Si to P.
  • Therefore, more energy is required to remove an electron from its outermost shell.

Hence, the value of first ionization enthalpy increases from Al to Si to P.

Note: Atomic and physical properties of group 13 elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 12.
Name metal(s), nonmetal(s) and metalloid(s) of group 14.
Answer:
i. Metal: Tin, lead
ii. Nonmetal: Carbon
iii. Metalloid: Silicon, germanium

Question 13.
Explain the variation in the following properties of the group 14 elements,
i. Atomic radii
ii. Ionization enthalpy
iii. Electronegativity
Answer:
i. Atomic radii (Covalent radii):

  • In the periodic table as we move down the group 14 from C to Pb, the atomic radii increases due to the addition of new shell at each succeeding element.
  • However, the increase is comparatively less after silicon due to poor shielding by inner d- and f-electrons in the atoms.

ii. Ionization enthalpy:

  • Due to increased effective nuclear charge, group 14 elements have higher value of ionization enthalpy than corresponding group 13 elements.
  • In the periodic table, as we move down the group 14 from C to Sn, the ionization enthalpy decreases.
  • From Si to Sn, the ionization enthalpy decreases slightly.
  • However, from Sn to Pb, the ionization enthalpy increases slightly. It is due to the poor shielding effect of intervening d and f orbitals and increase in the size of the atoms.

iii. Electronegativity:

  • Due to small atomic size, group 14 elements are slightly more electronegative than the corresponding group 13 elements.
  • As we move down the group 14 from C to Si in the periodic table, the electronegativity decreases.
  • The electronegativity values for elements from Si to Pb are almost the same.
  • Among group 14 elements, carbon is the most electronegative with electronegativity of 2.5.

Question 14.
Explain why there is a phenomenal decrease in ionization enthalpy from carbon to silicon.
Answer:

  • Carbon is the first element of group 14 and thus, it has the smallest atomic size.
  • The ionization enthalpy of carbon (1086 kJ mol-1) is very high due to its small atomic size (77 pm) and high electronegativity (2.5).
  • However, the ionization enthalpy of silicon (786 kJ mol-1) decreases phenomenally due to the increase in its atomic size (118 pm) and low electronegativity (1.8).

Note: Atomic and physical properties of group 14 elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 3

Question 15.
Which type of elements are present in group 15? Mention their physical state.
Answer:

  • Group 15 includes all the three traditional types of elements i.e., metals, nonmetals and metalloids.
  • Nitrogen is a gas whereas the remaining group 15 elements are solids.
  • The gaseous nitrogen and brittle phosphorus are nonmetals.
  • Arsenic and antimony are metalloids while bismuth is moderately reactive metal.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 16.
Explain the trends in physical properties of group 15 elements.
i. Atomic and ionic radii
ii. Ionization enthalpy
iii. Electronegativity
Answer:
i. Atomic and ionic radii:

  • Atomic size increases down the group with increasing atomic number.
  • The effective nuclear charge in case of group 15 elements is larger than that of group 14 elements. Due to the increased effective nuclear charge, electrons are strongly attracted by the nucleus. Thus, the atomic and ionic radii of group 15 elements are smaller than the atomic and ionic radii of the corresponding group 14 elements.
  • On moving down the group, number of shells increases which leads to increased shielding effect and as a result atomic radii and ionic radii increases.

ii. Ionization enthalpy:

  • Due to extra stability of half-filled p-orbitals and relatively smaller size of group 15 elements, ionization enthalpy of group 15 elements is much greater than that of the group 14 elements in the corresponding periods.
  • On moving down the group, increase in atomic size and screening effect overcome the effective nuclear charge and thus, ionization enthalpy decreases.

iii. Electronegativity:

  • Due to smaller size and greater effective nuclear charge of atoms, group 15 elements have higher electronegativity values than group 14 elements.
  • On moving down the group, electronegativity values decreases due to increase in the size of the atoms and shielding effect.
  • Nitrogen is the most electronegative element among group 15 elements. However, there is not much of a difference between the electronegativity values of other elements of group 15.

Note: Atomic and physical properties of group 15 elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 4

Question 17.
Write a note on the oxidation state of p-block elements with respect to groups 13, 14 and 15 elements.
Answer:

  • Oxidation state is the primary chemical property of all elements.
  • The highest oxidation state exhibited by the p-block elements is equal to the total number of valence electrons i.e., the sum of s- and p-electrons present in the valence shell. This is sometimes called the group oxidation state.
  • In boron, carbon and nitrogen families, the group oxidation state is the most stable oxidation state for the lighter elements.
  • Besides, the elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 exhibit other oxidation states which are lower than the group oxidation state by two units.
  • The lower oxidation states become increasingly stable as we move down to heavier elements in the groups.

Note: Group oxidation states and common oxidation states with examples for groups 13, 14 and 15.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 5

Question 18.
What are general oxidation states of group 13 elements? Explain.
Answer:

  • The general oxidation states of group 13 are +1 and +3.
  • The group 13 elements have the outermost electronic configuration ns2 np1.
  • If only np1 electron takes part in bonding, the oxidation state is +1 and if all the three electrons i.e., ns2 np1 take part in bonding, the oxidation state is +3. Hence, the expected oxidation states are +1 and +3.

Question 19.
Give reason: The increased stability of the oxidation state is lowered by 2 units than the group oxidation state in heavier p-block elements.
Answer:

  • The increased stability of the oxidation state lowered by 2 units than the group oxidation state in heavier p-block elements is due to inert pair effect.
  • In these elements, the two s-electrons are involved less readily in chemical reactions.
  • This is because, in heavier p-block elements, the s-electrons of valence shell experience poor shielding than valence p-electrons due to ten inner d-electrons.

Hence, the increased stability of the oxidation state is lowered by 2 units than the group oxidation state in heavier p-block elements.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 20.
Why Tl1+ ion is more stable than Tl3+?
Answer:

  • Tl is a heavy element which belongs to group 13 of the p-block.
  • The common oxidation state for this group is +3.
  • In p-block, the lower oxidation state is more stable for heavier elements due to inert pair effect.

Hence, Tl1+ ion is more stable than Tl3+ ion.

Question 21.
How can you explain the higher stability of BCl3 as compared to TlCl3?
Answer:

  • Boron is a light element in group 13 and has outermost electronic configuration 2s2 2p1 whereas thallium is a heavy element in group 13 and has outermost electronic configuration 6s2 6p1.
  • Because of its small ionic radius, boron forms stable compounds in +3 oxidation state.
  • Thallium has a large atomic size and due to the inert pair effect forms more stable compounds with lower oxidation state +1 than compounds with +3 oxidation state.

Therefore, BCl3 has higher stability than TlCl3.

Question 22.
State the oxidation state for the following:
i. The group oxidation state of group 14 elements.
ii. The stable oxidation state for lead.
iii. Oxidation state of carbon in CH4.
Answer:
i. +4
ii. +2
iii. -4

Question 23.
GeCl4 is more stable than GeCl2 while PbCl2 is more stable than PbCl4. Explain.
Answer:

  • Elements Ge and Pb belong to 4th and 6th period in the group 14.
  • The group oxidation state of group 14 elements is +4.
  • However, the stability of other oxidation state which is lower by 2 units i.e., +2, increases down the group due to inert pair effect.
  • Therefore, the stability of the oxidation state +4 is more in Ge than in Pb while the stability of the oxidation state +2 is more in Pb than in Ge.

Hence, GeCl4 is more stable than GeCl2 while PbCl2 is more stable than PbCl4.

Question 24.
Name the elements of group 14 which are generally occur in +2 oxidation state.
Answer:
The elements of group 14 that are generally occur in +2 oxidation state are tin (Sn) and lead (Pb).

Question 25.
Discuss the nature of bonding in compounds of group 13, 14 and 15 elements.
Answer:

  • The lighter elements in groups 13, 14 and 15 have small atomic radii and high ionization enthalpy values. They form covalent bonds with other atoms by overlapping of valence shell orbitals.
  • As we move down the group, the value of ionization enthalpy decreases. The atomic radius increases since the valence shell orbitals are more diffused.
  • The heavier elements in these groups tend to form ionic bonds. The first member of these groups belongs to second period and do not have d orbitals and hence, B, C and N cannot expand their octet.
  • The subsequent elements in the group possess vacant d orbital in their valence shell, which can expand their octet forming a variety of compounds.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 26.
Explain the reactivity of groups 13, 14 and 15 elements towards air.
Answer:
i. Group 13 elements:
a. On heating with air or oxygen, group 13 elements form oxide of the type E2O3.
\(4 \mathrm{E}_{(\mathrm{s})}+3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{E}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{3(\mathrm{~s})}\) (where, E = B, Al, Ga, In, Tl)

b. At high temperature, group 13 elements also react with nitrogen present in the air to form corresponding nitrides.
\(2 \mathrm{E}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{EN}_{(\mathrm{s})}\) (where, E = B, Al, Ga, In, Tl)

ii. Group 14 elements: The elements of group 14 on heating in air or oxygen form oxide of the type EO and EO2 in accordance with the stable oxidation state and availability of oxygen.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 6

iii. Group 15 elements: The elements of group 15 on heating in air or oxygen forms two types of oxide i.e., E2O3 and E2O5.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 7
Due to increase in metallic character down the groups 13, 14 and 15, the nature of their oxides gradually varies from acidic through amphoteric to basic.
[Note: The temperature required for the reaction of nitrogen with oxygen is very high. This is produced by striking an electric arc.]

Question 27.
Classify the following oxides into acidic, basic or amphoteric.
B2O3, Ga2O3, Tl2O3, In2O3, Al2O3
Answer:

Acidic oxide B2O3
Basic oxides In2O3, Tl2O3
Amphoteric oxides Al2O3, Ga2O3

Question 28.
Match the following.

Column A Column B
i. N2O5 a. Amphoteric
ii. Bi2O3 b. Acidic
iii. Sb2O3 c. Basic

Answer:
i – b,
ii – c,
iii – a

Note: Nature of stable oxides of groups 13, 14 and 15 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 8

Question 29.
State TRUE or FALSE. Correct the false statement.
i. Sb is more stable in +3 oxidation state.
ii. Oxides of the type E2O5 are formed by group 15 elements.
iii. As4O6 is an acidic oxide.
Answer:
i. True
ii. True
iii. False
As4O6 is an amphoteric oxide.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 30.
What happens when the elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 react with water?
Answer:
i. Most of the elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 are unaffected by water.
ii. Aluminium reacts with water on heating and forms hydroxide while tin reacts with steam to form oxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 9
iii. Lead is unaffected by water due to the formation of a protective film of oxide.

Question 31.
Why is phosphorus stored under water?
Answer:
Phosphorus is highly reactive and hence, it is stored under water to prevent its reaction with air as it catches fire on being exposed to air.

Question 32.
Explain the reactivity of group 13 elements towards halogens.
Answer:
i. All the elements of group 13 react directly with halogens to form trihalides (EX3).
2E(S) + 3X2(g) → 2EX3(s) (where, E = B, Al, Ga, In and X = F, Cl, Br, I)
ii. Thallium is an exception as it forms monohalides (TlX).

Question 33.
Describe the reactivity of group 14 elements with halogens.
Answer:

  • All the elements of group 14 (except carbon) react directly with halogens to form tetrahalides (EX4).
  • The heavy elements Ge and Pb form dihalides as well.
  • Stability of dihalides increases down the group due to inert pair effect.
  • The ionic character of halides also increases steadily down the group.

Question 34.
Discuss the reactivity of group 15 elements with halogens.
Answer:

  • Elements of the group 15 reacts with halogens to form two series of halides i.e., trihalides (EX3) and pentahalides (EX5).
  • The pentahalides possess more covalent character due to availability of vacant d orbitals of the valence shell for bonding.
  • Nitrogen being second period element, does not have d orbitals in its valence shell, and therefore, does not form pentahalides.
  • Trihalides of the group 15 elements are predominantly covalent except BiF3. The only stable trihalide of nitrogen is NF3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 35.
Nitrogen does not form pentahalides. Give reason.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 7N is 1s2 2s2 2p3. It has 3 unpaired electrons which can form 3 covalent bonds, thus forming NX3 molecule.
  • Valence shell of nitrogen (n = 2) contains only s and p orbitals.
  • Thus, due to the absence of d orbitals in the valence shell, nitrogen cannot expand its octet, therefore, it cannot form compounds like NCl5 and NF5.

Hence, nitrogen does not form pentahalides.

Question 36.
Nitrogen does not form NCl5 or NF5 but phosphorus can. Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 7N is 1s2 2s2 2p3 while that of 15P is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p3.
  • As phosphorus contains d orbitals, it can expand its octet to form MX3 as well MX5 compounds.
  • However, due to absence of d orbitals, nitrogen cannot form MX3 or MX5.

Hence, Nitrogen does not form NCl5 or NF5 but phosphoms can form compounds like PCl5 or PF5.

Question 37.
Define catenation.
Answer:
The property of self-linking of atoms of an element by covalent bonds to form chains and rings is called catenation.

Question 38.
Explain catenation of group 14 elements.
Answer:
i. The property of self-linking of atoms of an element by covalent bonds to form chains and rings is called catenation.
ii. The strength of the element-element bond determines the tendency of an element to form a chain.
iii. Among the elements of group 14, the bond strength is maximum for C-C bond (348 kJ mol-1). Hence, carbon has maximum tendency for catenation.

Bond Bond strength (Bond enthalpy kJ mol-1)
C-C 348
Si-Si 297
Ge-Ge 260
Sn-Sn 240

iv. From the values of bond enthalpy, it can be concluded that the tendency to form chains is maximum for carbon and much lesser for silicon. Germanium has still lesser tendency and tin has hardly any tendency for catenation. Lead does not show catenation.
Therefore, the order of catenation of group 14 elements is C >> Si > Ge = Sn.

Question 39.
State TRUE or FALSE. Correct the false statement.
i. Among the group 14 elements, Ge does not show the property of catenation.
Answer:
i. False
Among the group 14 elements, Pb (lead) does not shows the property of catenation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 40.
Define allotropy.
Answer:
When a solid element exists in different crystalline forms with different physical properties such as colour, density, melting point, etc. the phenomenon is called allotropy.

Question 41.
i. What are allotropes?
ii. Name various allotropes of carbon.
Answer:
i. When a solid element exists in different crystalline forms with different physical properties such as colour, density, melting point, etc. the phenomenon is called allotropy and the individual crystalline forms are called allotropes.
ii. Diamond, graphite, fiillerenes, graphene and carbon nanotubes are various allotropes of carbon.

Question 42.
Explain the structure of diamond.
Answer:
Structure of diamond:

  • In diamond, each carbon atom undergoes sp3 hybridization and is linked to four other carbon atoms in tetrahedral manner.
  • The C – C bond length is 154 pm.
  • The tetrahedra are linked together forming a three-dimensional network structure involving strong C-C single bonds which makes diamond the hardest natural substance.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 10

Question 43.
Write physical properties of diamond. Also, state its uses.
Answer:
i. Physical properties

  • Diamond is the hardest natural substance.
  • It has abnormally high melting point (3930 °C).
  • It is a bad conductor of electricity.

ii. Uses: Diamond is used

  • for cutting glass and in drilling tools.
  • for making dies for drawing thin wire from metal.
  • for making jewellery.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 44.
Describe the structure of graphite.
Answer:

  • Graphite is composed of layers of two-dimensional sheets of carbon atoms.
  • Each sheet is made up of hexagonal net of sp2 carbons bonded to three neighbours forming three bonds.
  • The fourth electron in the unhybrid p-orbital of each carbon is shared by all carbon atoms resulting in a π bond. These it electrons are delocalized over the whole layer.
  • The C – C bond length in graphite is 141.5 pm.
  • The individual layers are held by weak van der Waals forces and separated by 335 pm.
  • Graphite is soft and slippery and is thermodynamically most stable allotrope of carbon.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 11

Question 45.
Diamond is very hard whereas graphite is soft. Explain.
Answer:

  • Diamond has three-dimensional network of sp3 hybridized carbon atoms joined by extended covalent bonds which are difficult to break. Therefore, diamond is hard.
  • Graphite has two-dimensional sheet like structure, like layers of hexagonal rings formed from sp2 hybridized carbon atoms. These layers are held by weak van der Waals forces, which can be broken easily. Therefore, graphite is soft and slippery.

Hence, diamond is very hard whereas graphite is soft.

Question 46.
i. What are fullerenes?
ii. How are they prepared?
Answer:
i. Fullerenes are allotropes of carbon in which carbon molecules are linked by a definite numbers of carbon atoms, for example as in C60.
ii. Fullerenes are produced when an electric arc is struck between the graphite electrodes in an inert atmosphere of argon or helium. The soot formed contains significant amount of C60 fullerene and smaller amounts of other fullerenes C32, C50, C70 and C84.

Question 47.
Discuss the structure and properties of fullerene (C6o).
Answer:

  • C60 has a shape like soccer ball and called Buckminsterfullerene or bucky ball.
  • It contains 20 hexagonal and 12 pentagonal fused rings of carbon.
  • The C60 fullerene structure exhibit separations between the neighbouring carbons as 143.5 pm and 138.3 pm.
  • Fullerenes are covalent and soluble in organic solvents.
  • Fullerene C60 reacts with group 1 metals forming solids such as K3C60.
  • The compound K3C60 behaves as a superconductor below 18 K, which means that its carries electric current with zero resistance.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 12

Question 48.
Explain the structure of carbon nanotubes.
Answer:

  • Carbon nanotubes are cylindrical in shape consisting of rolled-up graphite sheet.
  • Nanotubes can be single-walled (SWNTs) with a diameter of less than 1 nm or multi-walled (MWNTs) with diameter reaching more than 100 nm.
  • Their lengths range from several micrometres to millimetres.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 49.
Describe the properties of carbon nanotubes.
Answer:

  • Carbon nanotubes are robust. They can be bent, and when released, they will spring back to the original shape.
  • Carbon nanotubes have high electrical or heat conductivities and highest strength-to-weight ratio for any known material to date.
  • The researchers of NASA are combining carbon nanotubes with other materials into composites that can be used to build lightweight spacecraft.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 13

Question 50.
What is graphene?
Answer:

  • Isolated layer of graphite is called graphene.
  • Graphene sheet is a two dimensional solid.
  • It has unique electronic properties.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 14

Question 51.
Explain the structure of various allotropes of phosphorus.
Answer:
Phosphorus is found in different allotropic forms. White and red phosphorus are important allotropes of phosphorus.
i. White (yellow) phosphorus:

  1. White (yellow) phosphorus consists of discrete tetrahedral P4 molecules.
  2. The P – P – P bond angle is 60°.
  3. White phosphorus is less stable and hence more reactive, because of angular strain in the P4 molecule.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 15

ii. Red phosphorus:

  • Red phosphorus consists of chains of P4 linked together by covalent bonds.
  • Thus, it is polymeric in nature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 16

Question 52.
Enlist properties of
i. white phosphorus.
ii. red phosphorus.
Answer:
i. Properties of white phosphorus:

  • It is translucent white waxy solid.
  • It glows in the dark (chemiluminescence).
  • It is insoluble in water but dissolves in boiling NaOH solution.
  • It is poisonous.

ii. Properties of red phosphorus:

  • It is stable and less reactive.
  • It is odourless and possess iron grey lustre.
  • It does not glow in the dark.
  • It is insoluble in water.
  • It is nonpoisonous.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 53.
How is red phosphorus prepared?
Answer:
Red phosphorus is prepared by heating white phosphorus at 573 K in an inert atmosphere.

Question 54.
State whether the following statement is TRUE or FALSE. Correct if false.
i. Covalent molecules have irregular shape described with the help of bond lengths and bond angles.
ii. It is difficult to understand the reactivity of covalent inorganic compounds from their structures.
iii. Inorganic molecules are often represented by molecular formulae indicating their elemental composition.
Answer:
i. False
Covalent molecules have definite shape described with the help of bond lengths and bond angles.
ii. False
The reactivity of covalent inorganic compounds is better understood from their structures.
iii. True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 55.
Describe structure of the following molecules.
i. Boron trichloride
ii. Aluminium chloride
iii. Orthoboric acid
Answer:
i. Structure of boron trichloride (BCl3) molecule:

  • Boron trichloride (BCl3) is a covalent compound.
  • In BCl3 molecule, boron atom is sp2 hybridized having one vacant unhybridized p orbital.
  • B in BCl3 has incomplete octet.
  • BCl3 is a nonpolar trigonal planar molecule.
  • Each Cl – B – Cl bond angle is 120°.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 17

ii. Structure of aluminium chloride (AlCl3) molecule:

  • Aluminium atom in aluminium chloride is sp2 hybridized, with one vacant unhybrid p-orbital.
  • Aluminium chloride exists as the dimer (Al2Cl6) formed by overlap of vacant 3d orbital of Al with a lone pair of electrons of Cl.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 18

iii. Structure of orthoboric or boric acid (H3BO3) molecule:

  • Orthoboric acid has central boron atom bound to three -OH groups.
  • The solid orthoboric acid has layered crystal structure in which trigonal planar B(OH)3 units are joined together by hydrogen bonds.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 19

Question 56.
Which are the different crystalline forms of silica?
Answer:
Quartz, cristobalite and tridymite are the different crystalline forms of silica.
[Note: These crystalline forms are inter-convertible at a suitable temperature.]

Question 57.
Explain the structure of silicon dioxide.
Answer:

  • Silicon dioxide (SiO2), is also known as silica.
  • It is a covalent three-dimensional network solid.
  • In SiO2, each silicon atom is covalently bound in tetrahedral manner to four oxygen atoms.
  • The crystal contains eight membered rings having alternate silicon and oxygen atoms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 20

Question 58.
Discuss the nature and structure of the following compounds.
i. Nitric acid
ii. Phosphoric acid
Answer:
i. Nitric acid:

  • Nitric acid (HNO3) is a strong, oxidizing mineral acid.
  • The central nitrogen atom is sp2 hybridized.
  • HNO3 exhibits resonance phenomenon.
  • Figure (a) represents resonating structures of HNO3 while figure (b) represents resonance hybrid of HNO3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 21

ii. Phosphoric acid (Orthophosphoric acid):

  • Phosphorus forms number of oxyacids. Orthophosphoric acid (H3PO4) is a strong nontoxic mineral acid.
  • It contains three ionizable acidic hydrogens.
  • The central phosphorus atom is tetrahedral.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 22

Question 59.
Give the molecular formula of crystalline borax.
Answer:
The crystalline borax has formula Na2B4O7.10H2O or Na2[B4O5(OH)4].8H2O.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 60.
How is borax obtained from its mineral colemanite?
Answer:
Borax is obtained from its mineral colemanite by boiling it with a solution of sodium carbonate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 23

Question 61.
Why is the aqueous solution of borax alkaline?
Answer:
On hydrolysis, borax forms a strong base (NaOH) and a weak acid (H3BO3). The presence of the strong base makes borax solution alkaline.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 24

Question 62.
What happens when borax is heated strongly?
Answer:
Borax is a white crystalline solid. On heating, borax loses water molecules and swells up. On further heating, it melts and forms a transparent liquid, which solidifies into a glass like material known as borax bead.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 25

Question 63.
Explain borax bead test.
Answer:
i. Borax bead test is used to detect coloured transition metal ions.
ii. On heating, borax loses water molecules and swells up. On further heating, it melts and forms a transparent liquid, which solidifies into a glass like material known as borax bead.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 26
iii. The borax bead consists of sodium metaborate and boric anhydride, which reacts with metals salts to form coloured bead.
e.g. When borax is heated in a Bunsen burner flame with CoO on a loop of platinum wire, a blue coloured Co(BO2)2 bead is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 27

Question 64.
Write the uses of borax.
Answer:
Borax is used

  • to manufacture optical and hard borosilicate glasses.
  • as a flux for soldering and welding.
  • as a mild antiseptic in the preparation of medical soaps.
  • in qualitative analysis for borax bead test.
  • as a brightener in washing powder.

Question 65.
How are silicones prepared? Write their properties.
Answer:
i. Preparation of silicones:
a. Alkyl or aryl substituted silicon chlorides having general formula RnSiCl(4-n) (R = alkyl or aryl group) are used as the starting materials for manufacture of silicones.
b. When methyl chloride reacts with silicon in the presence of copper catalyst at a temperature 573 K, various types of methyl substituted chlorosilane of formula MeSiCl3, Me2SiCl2, Me3SiCl with small amounts of Me4Si are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 28
c. Hydrolysis of dimethyldichlorosilane, (CH3)2SiCl2 followed by condensation polymerisation yields straight chain silicone polymers.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 29

d. The chain length of polymer can be controlled by adding (CH3)3SiCl at the end.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 30

ii. Properties:

  • Silicones are water repellent.
  • They have high thermal stability.
  • They are good electrical insulators.
  • They are resistant to oxidation and chemicals.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 66.
Explain the preparation of ammonia from nitrogeneous organic matter.
Answer:
Ammonia is formed by the decomposition of nitrogeneous organic matter such as urea. It is therefore, present naturally in small quantities in air and soil.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 31

Question 67.
Describe laboratory method for preparation of ammonia.
Answer:
Ammonia is prepared on laboratory scale by decomposition of the ammonium salts with calcium hydroxide or caustic soda.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 32

Question 68.
How is ammonia manufactured by Haber process?
Answer:

  • On the large scale, ammonia is prepared by direct combination of dinitrogen and dihydrogen by Haber process.
  • In this process, dinitrogen reacts with dihydrogen under high pressure of 200 × 105 Pa (200 atm) and temperature around 700 K to produce ammonia.
    N2(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g); ΔfH° = -46.1 kJ mol-1
  • Iron oxide with trace amounts of K2O and Al2O3 is used as catalyst in Haber process.
  • High pressure favours the formation of ammonia as equilibrium is attained rapidly under these conditions.

Question 69.
State the physical properties of ammonia.
Answer:

  • Ammonia is a colourless gas with pungent odour.
  • It has freezing point of 198.4 K and boiling point of 239.7 K.
  • It is highly soluble in water.

Question 70.
What is liquor ammonia?
Answer:
The concentrated aqueous solution of ammonia (NH3) is called liquor ammonia.

Question 71.
Give reason: Ammonia has higher melting and boiling points.
Answer:

  • In solid and liquid state, NH3 molecules get associated together through hydrogen bonding.
  • As a result, extra amount of energy is required to break such intermolecular hydrogen bonds. Hence, ammonia has higher melting and boiling points.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 72.
Why is ammonia basic in aqueous solution?
Answer:
i. As ammonia is highly soluble in water, it readily forms OH ions in its aqueous solution.
\(\mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{NH}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(a q)}^{-}\)
ii. Thus, due to the formation of OH ions, aqueous solution of ammonia is basic in nature.

Question 73.
How does the aqueous solution of ammonia react with the following salt solutions?
i. ZnSO4
ii. FeCl3
Answer:
Aqueous solution of ammonia precipitates out as hydroxides (or hydrated oxides) of metals solutions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 33

Question 74.
Write applications of ammonia.
Answer:
Ammonia is used in

  • manufacture of fertilizers such as urea, diammonium phosphate, ammonium nitrate, ammonium sulphate etc.
  • manufacture of some inorganic compounds like nitric acid.
  • refrigerant (liq. ammonia).
  • laboratory reagent in qualitative and quantitative analysis (aq. solution of ammonia).

Question 75.
Give reactions involved in the formation of Nessler’s reagent.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 34

Question 76.
How does ammonia react with Nessler’s reagent?
Answer:
Ammonia react with Nessler’s reagent (an alkaline solution of K2HgI4) to form a brown precipitate (Millon’s base).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 35

Question 77.
Complete and write the balanced chemical equations for:
i. Ca2B6O11 + Na2CO3
ii. CoO + B2O3
iii. AgCl + NH3
iv. ZnSO4 + 2NH4OH →
v. a. 2KI + HgCl2
b. 2KI + HgI2
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 36

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 78.
Naina was preparing a compound in the laboratory. She added compound ‘A’ to (CaOH)2 solution. As a result of this, a compound ‘B’ was obtained which had a pungent smell. On adding Nessler’s reagent to the compound ‘B’, a brown precipitate of compound ‘C’ was obtained.
Write the chemical reactions involved and identify ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.
Answer:
i. When ammonium chloride is mixed with (CaOH)2 solution, ammonia is formed which has a pungent odour.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 37
ii. Ammonia react with Nessler’ s reagent (an alkaline solution of K2Hgl4) to form a brown precipitate (Millon’ s base).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 38

Multiple Choice Questions

1. The electronic configuration of boron family is ……………
(A) ns2 np2
(B) ns2 np5
(C) ns2 np6
(D) ns2 np1
Answer:
(D) ns2 np1

2. ………… has noble gas core plus 14 f-electrons and 10 d-electrons.
(A) Gallium
(B) Indium
(C) Thallium
(D) Boron
Answer:
(C) Thallium

3. The group 15 element having inner electronic configuration as of argon is …………..
(A) Phosphorus (Z = 15)
(B) Antimony (Z = 51)
(C) Arsenic (Z = 33)
(D) Nitrogen (Z = 7)
Answer:
(C) Arsenic (Z = 33)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

4. Which of the following is NOT a metalloid?
(A) B
(B) Sn
(C) Ge
(D) Sb
Answer:
(B) Sn

5. Among the group 13 elements, melting point is highest for …………..
(A) B
(B) Al
(C) Ga
(D) In
Answer:
(A) B

6. On moving down the group 14, the ionization enthalpy
(A) increases slightly from Si to Sn and decreases slightly from Sn to Pb
(B) increases throughout uniformly from Si to Pb
(C) decreases throughout uniformly from Si to Pb
(D) decreases slightly from Si to Sn and increases slightly from Sn to Pb
Answer:
(D) decreases slightly from Si to Sn and increases slightly from Sn to Pb

7. ………… is the most electronegative element of group 14.
(A) Carbon
(B) Silicon
(C) Germanium
(D) Tin
Answer:
(A) Carbon

8. The stability of +3 oxidation state in aqueous solution is in order ……………
(A) Al > Ga > In > Tl
(B) Tl > In > Ga > Al
(C) Al > Tl > Ga > In
(D) Tl > Al > Ga > In
Answer:
(A) Al > Ga > In > Tl

9. Group oxidation state of group 15 elements is ……………
(A) +4
(B) +1
(C) +3
(D) +5
Answer:
(D) +5

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

10. …………. cannot expand its octet due to absence of d orbital in its valence shell.
(A) Ga
(B) C
(C) As
(D) Ge
Answer:
(B) C

11. Which one of the following statements about boron and aluminium is INCORRECT?
(A) Both exhibit oxidation state of +3.
(B) Both form oxides of the formula M2O3.
(C) Both form trihalides, MX3.
(D) Both form amphoteric oxides.
Answer:
(D) Both form amphoteric oxides.

12. Which of the following is basic oxide?
(A) Bi2O3
(B) CO2
(C) B2O3
(D) SiO2
Answer:
(A) Bi2O3

13. The reaction of Al with H2O produces ……………
(A) Al2O3
(B) AlH3
(C) Al(OH)3
(D) Al2H6
Answer:
(C) Al(OH)3

14. Which of the following is a stable halide of nitrogen?
(A) NF3
(B) NCl5
(C) NF5
(D) NBr5
Answer:
(A) NF3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

15. Catenation is the ability of …………..
(A) atoms to form strong bonds with similar atoms
(B) elements to form giant molecules
(C) an element to form multiple bonds
(D) an element to form long chains of identical atoms
Answer:
(D) an element to form long chains of identical atoms

16. Among the group 13 elements, the property of allotropy is shown by ………………
(A) indium
(B) aluminium
(C) thallium
(D) boron
Answer:
(D) boron

17. Thermodynamically stable allotrope of carbon is …………..
(A) diamond
(B) graphite
(C) buckyball
(D) all of these
Answer:
(B) graphite

18. White phosphorus contains discrete …………… molecules.
(A) P5
(B) P4
(C) P6
(D) P52
Answer:
(B) P4

19. In white phosphorus, the P-P-P bond angle is ……………
(A) 60°
(B) 90°
(C) 109.5
(D) 120°
Answer:
(A) 60°

20. 3c-2e bonds are present in ………………
(A) NH3
(B) B2H6
(C) H3BO3
(D) SiCl4
Answer:
(B) B2H6

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

21. Which of the following is borax?
(A) Na2B4O7.4H2O
(B) Na2B4O7.10H2O
(C) H3BO3
(D) NaBO2
Answer:
(B) Na2B4O7.10H2O

22. In Borax bead test, the coloured ions give characteristic coloured beads due to formation of …………….
(A) metal borates
(B) metal metaborates
(C) metal phosphates
(D) metal tetraborates
Answer:
(B) metal metaborates

23. The catalyst used in Haber process contains …………..
(A) nickel
(B) palladium
(C) iron
(D) platinum
Answer:
(C) iron

24. Which of the following is used as refrigerant?
(A) Nessler’s reagent
(B) Liq. ammonia
(C) Borax
(D) Diborane
Answer:
(B) Liq. ammonia

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2 Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 1.
Why is hydrogen studied separately even though it appears at the top of group 1?
Answer:
Even though hydrogen appears at the top of the group 1 containing alkali metals, it is studied separately because many of its properties differ from that of the alkali metals.

Question 2.
Give reason: Hydrogen (H2) molecule is also referred to as dihydrogen.
Answer:

  • The nucleus of a hydrogen atom consists of one positively charged proton i.e., nuclear charge of +1 and one extranuclear electron.
  • As this electron is in direct influence of nuclear attraction, hydrogen has a little tendency to lose this electron.
  • However, it can easily pair with the other electron forming a covalent bond.
  • Therefore, it exists in diatomic form as H2 molecule and hence, it is also referred to as dihydrogen.

Question 3.
Why does hydrogen occur in a diatomic form rather than in monoatomic form under normal
conditions?
Answer:

  • Hydrogen atom has only one electron in its valence shell having electronic configuration 1s1.
  • It can acquire stable configuration of helium by sharing this electron with another hydrogen atom.
  • Therefore, it shares its single electron with electron of the other H-atom to achieve stable inert gas configuration of He.
  • Thus, hydrogen readily forms diatomic molecule and exists as H2 rather than in monoatomic form.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 4.
Write a note on occurrence of hydrogen.
Answer:

  • In the free state hydrogen exists as dihydrogen gas.
  • Hydrogen is most abundant element in the universe and constitutes 70% of the total mass of the universe.
  • Hydrogen is also the principal element in the solar system.
  • On the earth, hydrogen is the tenth most abundant element on mass basis and the third most abundant element on atom basis.

Question 5.
State whether the following statements are TRUE or FALSE. Correct the false statement.
1. Electronic configuration of hydrogen is 1s1.
ii. H+ ion formed by loss of the electron from hydrogen atom exists freely.
iii. H+ is nothing but a proton.
iv. Metastable metallic hydrogen was discovered at Harvard university, USA, in January 2017.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False
Hydrogen atom does not exist freely and is always associated with other molecules i.e., H3O+.
iii. True
iv. True

Question 6.
Explain the laboratory methods for preparation of dihydrogen.
Answer:
Laboratory methods for preparation of dihydrogen:
i. By action of dilute HCl on zinc granules: Zinc granules on reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid (HCl) liberates hydrogen gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 1

ii. By action of aqueous NaOH on zinc: Zinc on reaction with aqueous sodium hydroxide (NaOH) forms soluble sodium zincate and liberates hydrogen gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 2

Question 7.
Describe the industrial method of preparation of dihydrogen by electrolysis of pure water.
Answer:
i. Pure water is a poor conductor of electricity. Therefore, a dilute aqueous solution of acid or alkali is used to prepare dihydrogen by electrolysis.
ii. For example, electrolysis of dilute aqueous solution of sulphuric acid yields two volumes of hydrogen at cathode and one volume of oxygen at anode.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 3

Question 8.
How is pure dihydrogen (> 99.5% purity) gas obtained from barium hydroxide?
Answer:
Electrolysis of warm aqueous solution of barium hydroxide using nickel electrodes yields pure dihydrogen (> 99.5% purity).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 9.
Explain the terms:
i. Syngas
ii. Water-gas shift reaction.
Answer:
i. Syngas:

  • Syngas is the mixture of CO and H2. It is also called ‘water-gas’.
  • It is used for the synthesis of CH3OH and many hydrocarbons, hence, the name syngas or ‘synthesis gas’.
  • Production of syngas is also the first stage of gasification of coal.

ii. Water-gas shift reaction:
The carbon monoxide in the water-gas is transformed into carbon dioxide by reacting with steam in presence of iron chromate as catalyst.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 4
This reaction is called water-gas shift reaction.

Question 10.
Complete the following chemical reactions:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 5
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 6

Question 11.
Enlist physical properties of dihydrogen.
Answer:
Physical properties of dihydrogen:

  • Dihydrogen is a colourless, tasteless and odourless gas.
  • It bums with a pale blue flame.
  • It is a nonpolar and water-insoluble gas.
  • It is lighter than air.

Question 12.
What is the action of dihydrogen on the following?
i. Metals
ii. Dioxygen
Answer:
i. Action of dihydrogen on metals:
a. Dihydrogen combines with all the reactive metals including alkali metals, calcium, strontium and barium at high temperature to form metal hydrides.
b. For example: Dihydrogen combines with metallic sodium at high temperature to yield sodium hydride.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 7

ii. Action of dihydrogen on dioxygen: Dihydrogen reacts with dioxygen in the presence of catalyst or by heating to form water. This reaction is highly exothermic.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 8

Question 13.
Explain the effect of high bond dissociation energy of H-H bond on chemical reactivity of dihydrogen?
Answer:

  • The bond dissociation energy of H-H bond is very high i.e, 436 kJ mol-1. and thus, it does not react easily under normal conditions.
  • However, at high temperature or in the presence of catalysts, hydrogen combines with many metals and non-metals to form corresponding hydrides and halides respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 14.
What happens when dihydrogen reacts with halogens?
Answer:
i. Dihydrogen reacts with halogens (X2) to give the corresponding hydrogen halides (HX).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 9
ii. Dihydrogen reacts with fluorine to form hydrogen fluoride even at very low temperature (-250°C) in dark.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 10
iii. However, the reaction with iodine requires a catalyst as the vigour of reaction of dihydrogen decreases with increasing atomic number of halogen.

Question 15.
Explain the reducing nature of hydrogen with chemical reactions.
Answer:
Dihydrogen reduces oxides and ions of some metals that are less reactive than iron, to the corresponding number of halogen metals at moderate temperature.
e.g.
i. CuO(s) + H2(g) → Cu(s) + H2O(l)
ii. Fe3O4(s) + 4H2(g) → 3Fe(s) + 4H2O(s)
iii. Pd2+(aq) + H2(g) → Pd(s) + 2H+(aq)

Question 16.
What is hydrogenation?
Answer:
Hydrogenation is the reaction in which hydrogen gas reacts with unsaturated organic compounds in the presence of a catalyst to form hydrogenated (saturated) compounds.

Question 17.
How does dihydrogen react with various organic compounds to give useful, commercially important products?
Answer:
i. Hydrogenation of unsaturated organic compounds:
e.g. Hydrogenation of unsaturated organic compounds such as vegetable oil using nickel catalyst gives saturated organic compounds such as solid edible fats like vanaspati ghee.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 11
ii. Hydroformylation of olefins and subsequent reduction of aldehyde to form alcohol:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 12

Question 18.
Explain hydroformylation reaction of olefins using a suitable example.
Answer:
Hydroformylation of olefins gives aldehydes which on further reduction gives alcohols.
e.g. i. Hydroformylation of propene gives butyraldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 13

ii. Butyraldehyde further undergoes reduction to give n-butyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 14

Question 19.
What are the uses of dihydrogen?
Answer:
Dihydrogen is used in

  • the production of ammonia.
  • the formation of vanaspati ghee by catalytic hydrogenation of oils.
  • rocket fuel (mixture of liquid hydrogen and liquid oxygen).
  • the preparation of important organic compounds like methanol in bulk quantity.
    \(2 \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{CO}_{(\mathrm{g})} \stackrel{\text { Cobaltcatalyst }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{OH}_{(l)}\)
  • the preparation of hydrogen chloride (HCl) and metal hydrides.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 20.
Justify the placement of hydrogen in the group of alkali metals with the help of reaction with halogens.
Answer:
i. Hydrogen on reaction with halogens (X2) give compounds with general formula HX.
e.g. H2 + Cl2 → 2HCl
ii. Similarly, alkali metals (M) on reaction with halogens (X2) give compounds with general formula MX.
e.g. 2Na + Cl2 → 2NaCl
iii. Thus, H2 and alkali metals are monovalent elements and more electropositive than halogens. This similarity justifies the position of hydrogen in the group 1.

Question 21.
What do you mean by s-block elements? Where are they placed in the modern periodic table?
Answer:

  • Elements of group 1 and group 2 in which the last electron enters into ‘ns’ subshell are s-block elements.
  • The s-block elements are placed on the extreme left in the modem periodic table.

Question 22.
Name elements of group 1 and group 2.
Answer:

  • Group 1 of the periodic table consists of the elements: hydrogen, lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, caesium and francium.
  • Group 2 of the periodic table consists of elements: beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, barium and radium.

Question 23.
What are alkali metals?
Answer:
The elements of group 1 except hydrogen are collectively called alkali metals.

Question 24.
What are alkaline earth metals?
Answer:
The elements of group 2 are collectively called alkaline earth metals because they occur as minerals in rocks.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 25.
Write a note on occurrence of group 1 and group 2 elements:
Answer:
i. Group 1 (alkali metals):

  • Two elements of group 1 i.e., sodium and potassium are the sixth and seventh most abundant elements present in the earth’s crust.
  • However, francium does not occur appreciably in nature because it is radioactive and has short half-life period.

ii. Group 2 (alkaline earth metals):

  • The elements magnesium and calcium are found abundantly in earth’s crust.
  • Radium is radioactive and is not easy to find.

Question 26.
Give reasons: s-block elements are never found in free state in nature.
Answer:

  • s-Block elements contain group 1 and group 2 elements.
  • The general outer electronic configuration of the group 1 elements is ns1 and that of the group 2 elements is ns2.
  • The loosely held s-electrons in the valence shell of these elements can be easily removed to form metal ions.
  • As a result, they are highly reactive in nature and always found in combined state.

Hence, s-block elements are never found in free state in nature.

Note: Electronic configurations of group 1 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 15

Note: Electronic configurations of group 2 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 16

Question 27.
Describe the physical properties of alkali and alkaline earth metals.
Answer:

  • All the alkali and alkaline earth metals are silvery white in appearance.
  • Due to their large atomic size they have low density.
  • Both alkali and alkaline earth metals are soft, however, alkaline earth metals are harder than the alkali metals.
  • Alkali metals are the most electropositive elements while alkaline earth metals are comparatively less electropositive than alkali metals.

Question 28.
Explain why do the group 1 and group 2 elements form diamagnetic and colourless compounds.
Answer:

  • Unipositive ions of all the elements of group 1 have inert gas configuration and hence, they have no unpaired electron.
  • Similarly, group 2 elements can lose their two valence shell electrons and form divalent ions that have inert gas configuration with no unpaired electrons.

Hence, due to the absence of unpaired electrons, compounds formed by group 1 and group 2 elements are diamagnetic and colourless.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 29.
Why do the properties of lithium and beryllium differ from the rest of the group 1 and group 2 elements?
Answer:
The properties of lithium and beryllium differ from the rest of the group 1 and group 2 elements due to their extremely small size and comparatively high electronegativity.

Question 30.
Complete the following table.

Group 1 elements Group 2 elements
………………. Alkaline earth metals
Outer electronic configuration: ………………. Outer electronic configuration: ns2
Monovalent positive ions ……………….

Answer:

Group 1 elements Group 2 elements
Alkali metals Alkaline earth metals
Outer electronic configuration: ns1 Outer electronic configuration: ns2
Monovalent positive ions Divalent positive ions

Question 31.
State the trends in the following properties of group 1 and group 2 elements down a group.
i. Atomic radii
ii. Ionic radii
iii. Ionization enthalpy
iv. Electronegativity
v. Standard reduction potential
Answer:

Sr. no. Property Down a group
i. Atomic radii Increases
ii. Ionic radii Increases
iii. Ionization enthalpy Decreases
iv. Electronegativity Decreases
V. Standard reduction potential Decreases

Question 32.
Give reasons: Potassium superoxide is used in breathing equipment used for mountaineers and in submarines and space.
Answer:
i. Potassium superoxide has ability to absorb carbon dioxide and give out oxygen at the same time.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 17
ii. Due to this property of KO2, it is used in breathing equipment used for mountaineers and in submarines and space.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 33.
What is the oxidation state of:
i. Na in Na2O2?
ii. K in KO2?
Answer:
i. Oxidation state of Na in sodium peroxide (Na2O2):
Let x be the oxidation state of Na in Na2O2.
The net charge on peroxide ion \(\left(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{2-}\right)\) is -2.
Since any compound is electrically neutral, it has an overall charge as zero.
∴ 2x + (-2) = 0
∴ x = + 1
∴ Oxidation state of Na in Na2O2 is +1.

ii. Oxidation state of K in potassium dioxide/potassium superoxide (KO2):
Let x be the oxidation state of K in KO2
The net charge on superoxide ion \(\left(\mathrm{O}_{2}^{-}\right)\) is -1.
Since any compound is electrically neutral, it has an overall charge as zero.
∴ x + (-1) = 0
x = + 1
∴ Oxidation state of K in KO2 is + 1.
[Note: Oxidation state of alkali metal is always +1.]

Question 34.
Magnesium strip slowly tarnishes on keeping in air but metallic calcium is readily attacked by air. Explain.
Answer:

  • The reactivity of group 2 metals increases with increasing atomic radius and lowering of ionization enthalpy
    down the groups.
  • Thus, calcium has lower ionization enthalpy. Therefore, calcium is more reactive than magnesium.
  • Hence, Mg reacts slowly with air forming a thin film of oxide resulting into tarnishing, whereas Ca reacts readily at room temperature with oxygen and nitrogen in the air.

Question 35.
What happens when alkali metals react with hydrogen and halogens?
Answer:
i. Reaction with hydrogen: Alkali metals react with hydrogen at high temperature to form the Corresponding metal hydrides.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 18

ii. Reaction with halogens: All the alkali metals react vigorously with halogens to produce their ionic halide salts.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 19
[Note: As we move down the group, the reactivity of alkali metals towards hydrogen and halogens decreases in the following order: Li > Na > K > Rb > Cs.]

Question 36.
NaCl is an ionic compound but LiCl has some covalent character, explain.
Answer:

  • Li+ ion has very small size and therefore, the charge density on Li+ is high.
  • Due to this, it has high tendency to distort the electron cloud around the negatively charged chloride ion (Cl) which is larger in size.
  • This results in partial covalent character of the LiCl bond.
  • Na+ ion cannot distort the electron cloud of Cl due to the bigger size of Na+ compared to Li+.

Hence, NaCl is an ionic compound but LiCl has some covalent character.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 37.
Why is lithium iodide most covalent in nature among alkali halides?
Answer:

  • Among the alkali metal ions, Li+ ion is the smallest cation while among halides, anion I has the largest size.
  • Thus, electron cloud around I ion is easily distorted by Li+ ion leading to polarisation of anion and covalency.
  • Also, the difference in electronegativities of Li and I is small.

Hence, lithium iodide is most covalent in nature among alkali halides.

Question 38.
Explain the reactivity of alkaline earth metals towards:
i. Water
ii. Hydrogen
iii. Halogens
Answer:
i. Reaction with water:
a. The elements of group 2 (alkaline earth metals) react with water to form metal hydroxide and evolve hydrogen gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 20
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 21

b. Be does not react with water at all, Mg reacts with boiling water while Ca, Sr, Ba react vigorously even with cold water.

ii. Reaction with hydrogen: All alkaline earth metals except beryllium (Be), when heated with hydrogen form MH2 type hydrides.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 22

iii. Reaction with halogens: All the alkaline earth metals combine with halogens at high temperature to form their corresponding halides.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 23
[Note: As we move down the group, the chemical reactivity of alkaline earth metals increases in the order Mg < Ca < Sr < Ba.]

Question 39.
Complete the following chemical equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 24
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 25

Question 40.
Describe the reducing nature of group 1 and group 2 elements.
Answer:
The reducing power of an element is measured in terms of standard electrode potential (E0) corresponding to the following transformation i.e, tendency to lose electron.
\(\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{s})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-}\)
i. Reducing nature of group 1 elements:

  • All the alkali metals have high negative values of E0 which indicates that they have strong reducing nature and hence, they can be used as strong reducing agents.
  • Lithium is the most powerful and sodium is the least powerful reducing agent in the group.

ii. Reducing nature of group 2 elements:

  • All the alkaline earth metals have high negative values of stanard reduction potential (E0) and are strong reducing agents.
  • However, reducing power of alkaline earth metals is less than that of alkali metals.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 41.
Explain the nature of the solution formed by group 1 and group 2 metals in liquid ammonia.
Answer:
i. The alkali metals are soluble in liquid ammonia and thus, they dissolve in it giving deep blue solutions which are conducting in nature.
M + (x + y)NH3 → [M(NH3)x]+ + [e(NH3)y]
ii. The blue colour of the solution is due to the ammoniated electron.
iii. These solutions are paramagnetic and on standing slowly liberate hydrogen resulting in the formation of amide.
\(\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{am})}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-}+\mathrm{NH}_{3(l)} \longrightarrow \mathrm{MNH}_{2(\mathrm{am})}+\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
(where ‘am’ denotes solution in ammonia.)
iv. As a result, the blue colour of the solution changes to bronze and the solution becomes diamagnetic.
v. Similarly, the alkaline earth metals are also soluble in liquid ammonia which give deep blue-black coloured solutions.
M + (x + 2y) NH3 → [M(NH3)x]2+ + 2[e(NH3)y]

Question 42.
Explain: Diagonal relationship in group 1 and group 2.
Answer:

  • Elements belonging to the same group are expected to exhibit similarity and gradation in their properties.
  • However, first alkali metal, lithium, and the first alkaline earth metal, beryllium, do not fulfil this expectation.
  • Thus, lithium shows many differences when compared with the remaining alkali metals and shows similarity with magnesium, the second alkaline earth metal.
  • Similarly, beryllium shows many differences with remaining alkaline earth metals and shows similarity with aluminium, the second element of the next main group i.e., group 13.
  • The relative placement of these elements with similar properties in the periodic table is across a diagonal and thus, it is called diagonal relationship.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 26

Question 43.
Explain diagonal relationship between lithium and magnesium with respect to:
i. Property of chlorides
ii. Thermal decomposition of their carbonates
Answer:
Both lithium and magnesium show similarities in various physical and chemical properties as follows:
i. Property of chlorides: Chlorides of lithium (LiCl) and magnesium (MgCl2) are deliquescent as group 2 elements form deliquescent chlorides. These chlorides form corresponding hydrates (LiCl.2H2O and MgCl2.8H2O) on crystallization from their aqueous solutions.

ii. Thermal decomposition of carbonates: Heating of lithium carbonate and magnesium carbonate results in their easy decomposition to form corresponding oxides and carbon dioxide (CO2).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 27

Question 44.
Mention the properties of lithium that differ from rest of the alkali group metals.
Answer:

  • Reaction with nitrogen: Only lithium from alkali group metals reacts with nitrogen present in the air on heating, while rest of the members do not react with nitrogen.
  • Thermal decomposition of carbonates: Alkali metal carbonates show no reaction on heating, while lithium carbonate decomposes on heating to form the corresponding oxide and liberate carbon dioxide gas.
  • Property of chlorides: Lithium (LiCl) is deliquescent and forms corresponding hydrate (LiCl.2H2O). Other alkali chlorides are not deliquescent and do not form hydrates.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 45.
Write a note on the diagonal relationship between Be and Al.
OR
What are the similarities between beryllium and aluminium?
Answer:
i. Beryllium is placed in the group 2 and period 2 of the modem periodic table. It resembles aluminium which is placed in group 13 and period 3.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 28
ii. Due to nearly same charge to radius ratio of their ions, beryllium (\(\frac {2}{31}\) = 0.065) and aluminium (\(\frac {3}{53.55}\) = 0.056) exhibit diagonal relationship.
iii. Due to diagonal relationship, Be and Al show following similarities in their properties:
a. Nature of bonding: Both Be and Al have tendency to form covalent chlorides.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 29
b. Lewis acids: BeCl2 and AlCl3 act as Lewis acids.
c. Solubility in organic solvents: BeCl2 and AlCl3 are soluble in organic solvents.
d. Nature of oxide: Both Be and Al form amphoteric oxides.

Question 46.
Explain the amphoteric nature of aluminium oxide with the help of reactions.
Answer:
Al2O3 (magnesium oxide) reacts with both acid (HCl) as well as base (NaOH) to form the corresponding products and therefore, it is amphoteric in nature.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 30

Question 47.
Beryllium shows many differences with other alkaline earth metals. Discuss these differences with respect to chlorides and oxides.
Answer:
1. Properties of chlorides: Beryllium chloride is covalent whereas chlorides formed by other alkaline earth metals are ionic in nature. Beryllium chloride is a strong Lewis acid whereas chlorides formed by other alkaline earth metals are not Lewis acids. Beryllium chloride is soluble in organic solvents whereas chlorides formed by other alkaline earth metals are insoluble in organic solvents.

2. Properties of oxide: Beryllium oxide is amphoteric whereas oxides formed by other alkaline earth metals are basic in nature.

Question 48.
Complete the following chemical equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 31
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 32

Question 49.
Write the uses of
i. alkali metals
ii. alkaline earth metals
Answer:
i. Uses of alkali metals:

  • Lithium metal is used in long-life batteries used in digital watches, calculators and computers.
  • Liquid sodium is used for heat transfer in nuclear power stations.
  • Potassium chloride is used as a fertilizer.
  • Potassium is used in manufacturing potassium superoxide (KO2) for oxygen generation. It is good absorbent of carbon dioxide.
  • Caesium is used in photoelectric cells.

ii. Uses of alkaline earth metals:

  • Beryllium is used as a moderator in nuclear reactors.
  • Alloy of magnesium and aluminium is widely used as structural material and in aircrafts.
  • Calcium ions are important ingredient in biological system, essential for healthy growth of bones and teeth.
  • Barium sulphate is used in medicine as barium meal for intestinal X-ray.
  • Radium is used in radiotherapy for cancer treatment.

Question 50.
State the importance of sodium and potassium in biological system.
Answer:

  • Sodium ion is present as the largest supply in all extracellular fluids. These fluids provide medium for transporting nutrients to the cells.
  • The concentration of sodium ion in extracellular fluid regulates the flow of water across the membrane.
  • Sodium ions participate in the transmission of nerve signals.
  • Potassium ions are the most abundant ions within the cells. They are required for maximum efficiency in the synthesis of proteins and also in oxidation of glucose.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 51.
How are the following ions of group 2 elements biologically important?
i. Mg2+
ii. Ca2+
Answer:
i. Magnesium ion (Mg2+)

  • Mg2+ ions are important part of chlorophyll in green plants.
  • They play an important role in the breakage of glucose and fat molecules, synthesis of proteins with enzymes and regulation of cholesterol level.

ii. Calcium ion (Ca2+)

  • Ca2+ ions are important for bones and teeth in the form of apatite [Ca3(PO4)2].
  • They play an important role in blood clotting.
  • Ca2+ ions are required for contraction and stretching of muscles.
  • They are also required to maintain the regular beating of heart.

Question 52.
Explain Solvay process for manufacture of sodium carbonate.
Answer:
Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) is commercially prepared by Solvay process. Preparation of sodium carbonate by Solvay process involves two stages.
i. In the first stage of Solvay process, carbon dioxide gas is bubbled through a concentrated solution of NaCl which is saturated with NH3. This results in the formation of ammonium bicarbonate. Crystals of sodium bicarbonate separate as a result of the following reactions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 33
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 34
ii. Ammonium bicarbonate and sodium chloride undergoes double decomposition reaction to form sodium bicarbonate. As sodium bicarbonate has low solubility, it precipitates out in the form of crystals.
iii. In the second stage, the separated crystals of sodium bicarbonate are heated to obtain sodium carbonate (Na2CO3).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 35
iv. NH4Cl obtained in this process is treated with slaked lime, Ca(OH)2, to recover NH3 while CaCl2 is obtained as a byproduct.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 36

Question 53.
How is ammonia recovered in Solvay process? Name the important by-product obtained in the step?
Answer:
i. Ammonium chloride (NH4Cl) is obtained during the Solvay process which is used for the preparation of Na2CO3. When NH4Cl is treated with slaked lime, Ca(OH)2, ammonia is recovered.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 37
ii. Calcium chloride is obtained as an important by-product in this reaction.

Question 54.
Why potassium carbonate cannot be obtained by Solvay process?
Answer:
Potassium hydrogen carbonate (KHCO3) is highly water soluble and cannot be precipitated out by reacting with potassium choride (KCl) and hence, potassium carbonate (K2CO3) cannot be obtained by Solvay process.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 55.
What is the action of heat on crystalline sodium carbonate (washing soda)?
Answer:
i. On heating washing soda (decahydrate of sodium carbonate) up to 373 K, it loses water molecules to form corresponding monohydrate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 38
ii. On heating above 373 K, monohydrate further loses water and changes into white anhydrous powder called soda ash.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 39

Question 56.
Give reason: Aqueous solution of sodium carbonate is alkaline in nature.
Answer:
i. Sodium carbonate is hydrolysed by water as shown in the reaction given below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 40
ii. One of the products formed as a result of hydrolysis is NaOH which is a strong base.
Hence, aqueous solution of sodium carbonate is alkaline in nature due to formation of strong base (NaOH).

Question 57.
What are the uses of sodium carbonate?
Answer:
Uses of sodium carbonate:

  • Due to its alkaline properties, sodium carbonate has an emulsifying effect on grease and dirt and hence, it is used as a cleaning material.
  • It is used to make hard water soft as it precipitates out the soluble calcium and magnesium salts in hard water as carbonates.
    For example: Ca(HCO3)2(aq) + Na2CO3(aq) → CaCO3(s) + 2NaHCO3(aq)
  • It is used for commercial production of soap and caustic soda.
  • Sodium carbonate is used as an important laboratory reagent.

Question 58.
Describe the preparation of sodium hydroxide by Castner-Kellner process.
OR
Explain the electrolysis method for preparation of sodium hydroxide.
Answer:
i. Sodium hydroxide (caustic soda) is commercially obtained by the electrolysis of aqueous sodium chloride solution (brine) in Castner-Kellner cell (mercury cathode cell).
ii. In Castner-Kellner cell, mercury is used as cathode, carbon rod as anode and brine solution is used as electrolyte which is subjected to electrolysis.

iii. During electrolysis, the following reactions take place:
a. At cathode: Sodium ions get reduced to metallic sodium, which combines with mercury to form sodium amalgam (Na-Hg).
\(\mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-} \stackrel{\mathrm{Hg}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Na} \text {-amalgam }\)
b. At anode: Chloride ions are oxidized and thus, chlorine gas is evolved.
\(\mathrm{Cl}^{-} \longrightarrow \frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{2}+\mathrm{e}^{-}\)

iv. Sodium amalgam is then treated with water to obtain sodium hydroxide and hydrogen gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 41

Question 59.
Enlist the physical properties of sodium hydroxide.
Answer:
Physical properties of sodium hydroxide:

  • Sodium hydroxide (NaOH) is a white deliquescent solid.
  • It has a melting point of 591 K.
  • It is highly water soluble and gives a strongly alkaline solution.
  • The surface of sodium hydroxide solution absorbs atmospheric CO2 to form Na2CO3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 60.
Explain how sodium hydroxide is commercially important.
Answer:
Commercial uses of sodium hydroxide:

  • Sodium hydroxide is used in purification of bauxite (the aluminium ore).
  • It is used in commercial production of soap, paper, artificial silk and many chemicals.
  • It is used for mercerising cotton fabrics.
  • It is used in petroleum refining.
  • It is also used as an important laboratory reagent.

Question 61.
Calcium carbonate occurs naturally in which forms?
Answer:
Calcium carbonate (CaCO3) occur naturally in the form of chalk, limestone and marble.

Question 62.
Describe the various methods used for preparation of calcium carbonate.
Answer:
i. a. Calcium carbonate is prepared by passing carbon dioxide through solution of calcium hydroxide (slaked lime). This results in the formation of water insoluble solid calcium carbonate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 42
b. However, excess carbon dioxide transforms the precipitate of CaCO3 into water-soluble calcium bicarbonate and therefore, it has to be avoided.

ii. Calcium carbonate can also be prepared by adding solution of calcium chloride to a solution of sodium carbonate. This results in the formation of calcium carbonate as precipitate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 43

Question 63.
Why controlled addition of CO2 is essential during preparation of calcium carbonate from slaked lime?
Answer:
When excess of CO2 is present, it leads to the formation of water-soluble calcium bicarbonate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 44
Hence, while preparing calcium carbonate from slaked lime, controlled addition of CO2 is essential.

Question 64.
Mention some physical properties of calcium carbonate.
Answer:

  • Calcium carbonate is soft, light, white powder.
  • It is practically insoluble in water.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 65.
What happens when:
i. calcium carbonate is thermally decomposed?
ii. calcium carbonate reacts with dilute mineral acids?
Answer:
i. When calcium carbonate is heated to 1200 K, it decomposes into calcium oxide along with evolution of carbon dioxide gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 45

ii. Calcium carbonate reacts with dilute mineral acids such as HCl and H2SO4 to give the corresponding calcium salt and liberate carbon dioxide gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 46

Question 66.
Give the important uses of calcium carbonate.
Answer:

  • Calcium carbonate in the form of marble is used as building material.
  • It is used in the manufacture of quicklime (CaO) which is the major ingredient of cement.
  • A mixture of CaCO3 and MgCO3 is used as flux in the extraction of metals from their ores.
  • It is required for the manufacture of high-quality paper.
  • It is an important ingredient in toothpaste, chewing gum, dietary supplements of calcium and filler in cosmetics.

Question 67.
Match the pairs.

Column A Column B
i. Castner-Kellner cell a. Na2CO
ii. Slaked lime b. CaCO3
iii. Solvay process c. NaOH
iv. Limestone d. Ca(OH)2

Ans:
i – c,
ii – d,
iii – a,
iv – b

Question 68.
How is hydrogen peroxide prepared by the action of cold dilute H2SO4 on
i. Hydrated barium peroxide?
ii. sodium peroxide (Merck process)?
Answer:
Preparation of hydrogen peroxide by the action of cold dilute H2SO4 on
i. hydrated barium peroxide: When hydrated barium peroxide is treated with ice-cold dilute sulphuric acid, the precipitate of barium sulphate is obtained. This precipitate is then filtered off to get hydrogen peroxide solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 47

ii. Sodium peroxide (Merck process): When small quantity of sodium peroxide is added to ice-cold solution of dilute sulphuric acid with stirring, it gives hydrogen peroxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 48

Question 69.
Explain how hydrogen peroxide can be obtained by electrolysis method.
Answer:
i. H2O2 can be manufactured by electrolysis of 50% H2SO4. In this method, 50% solution of H2SO4 is subjected to an electrolytic oxidation to form peroxydisuiphuric acid at anode.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 49
ii. On hydrolysis, peroxy sulphuric yields hydrogen peroxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 50
iii. This method can be used for the laboratory preparation of D2O2.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 70.
Describe the industrial method for preparation of hydrogen peroxide.
OR
How is hydrogen peroxide obtained from 2-ethylanthraquinol?
Answer:
i. Industrially hydrogen peroxide is prepared by air-oxidation of 2-ethylanthraquinol.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 51
ii. 2-Ethylanthraquinone is reduced back to 2-ethylanthraquinol by catalytic hydrogenation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 52

Question 71.
What are the physical properties of hydrogen peroxide?
Answer:

  • Pure H2O2 is a very pale blue coloured liquid.
  • Its boiling point is 272.4 K.
  • H2O2 is miscible in water and forms a hydrate (H2O2. H2O).

Question 72.
How is strength of H2O2 solution expressed?
Answer:

  • Strength of aqueous solution of H2O2 is expressed in ‘volume’ units i.e., volume strength.
  • The commercially marketed 30% (by mass) solution of H2O2 has volume strength of 100 volume.
  • It means that 1 mL of 30% solution of H2O2 will give 100 mL oxygen at STP.

Thus, Volume strength refers to the volume of oxygen (O2) in litres at STP obtained by decomposition of 1 litre of the sample.

Question 73.
Write reactions depicting oxidising and reducing action of hydrogen peroxide in acidic medium.
Answer:
H2O2 acts as a mild oxidising as well as reducing agent.
i. Oxidising action of H2O2 in acidic medium.
\(2 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{aq})} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+2 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)}\)

ii. Reducing action of H2O2 in acidic medium.
\(2 \mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}+6 \mathrm{H}^{+}+5 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Mn}^{2+}+8 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}+5 \mathrm{O}_{2}\)

Question 74.
Enlist uses of hydrogen peroxide.
Answer:

  • Hydrogen peroxide is used as mouthwash, germicide and mild antiseptic.
  • It is used as a preservative for milk and wine.
  • It is used as a bleaching agent for soft materials, due to its mild oxidising property.
  • Due to its reducing property, is used as an antichlor to remove excess chlorine from fabrics which have been bleached by chlorine.
  • Nowadays it is used in environmental chemistry for pollution control and restoration of aerobic condition of sewage water.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 75.
Describe preparation and properties of lithium aluminium hydride (LAH).
Answer:
i. Preparation: Lithium hydride when treated with aluminium chloride, gives lithium aluminium hydride, (LiAlH4).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 53

ii. Properties:

  • Lithium aluminium hydride is a colourless solid.
  • It reacts violently with water and even with atmospheric moisture.

Question 76.
How is lithium aluminium hydride (LAH) useful in organic synthesis?
Answer:
i. LAH is a source of hydride (H) and therefore, it is used as a reducing agent in organic synthesis.
For example:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 54

ii. It is useful in the preparation of PH3 (phosphine).
4PCl3 + 3LiAlH4 → 4PH2 + AlCl3 + LiCl

Question 77.
Complete the following reactions by mentioning the reagent/reaction conditions under which these reactions are carried out.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 55
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 56

Question 78.
Calculate % (by mass) of a H2O2 solution which is 45.4 volume.
Answer:
Given: 45.4 volume H2O2 solution
To find: % (by mass) of H2O2
Formula: Percentage (%) by mass = \(\frac{\text { Mass of solute }}{\text { Mass of solution }} \times 100\)
calculation: 45.4 volume H2O2 solution means 1 L of this solution will liberate 45.4 L of O2 at STP.
Hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) decomposes as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 57
Ans: % (by mass) of H2O2 in 45.4 volume H2O2 solution is 13.6%.

Question 79.
Calculate the strength (g/L) of 20 volume solution of hydrogen peroxide.
Solution:
Given: 20 volume H2O2 solution
To find: Strength of H2O2 (g/L)
Formula: 20 volume H2O2 solution means that 1 L of this solution will liberate 20 L of oxygen at S.T.P. Let us calculate the amount of H2O2 (in grams) which gives 20 L of oxygen at S.T.P. This amount will be present in 1 L of 20 volume solution of H2O2.
Hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) decomposes as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 58
22.7 L of O2 at S.T.P. is produced from H2O2 = 68 g
20 L of O2 at S.T.P. is produced from H2O2 = \(\frac {68}{22.7}\) × 20 = 59.912g = 59.912 g/litre
Ans: Strength of H2O2 in 20 volume H2O2 solution is 59.912 g/L.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

Question 80.
Calculate the volume strength of a 5% solution of hydrogen peroxide.
Solution:
Given: 5% solution of H2O2
To find: Volume strength of H2O2 solution
Calculation: 100 mL of solution contains 5 g of H2O2
1000 mL of solution will contain \(\frac {5}{100}\) × 1000 = 50 g of H2O2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2, 59
68 g of H2O2 will give O2 at S.T.P. = 22.7 L
50 g of H2O2 is present in 1000 mL of H2O2 or 1 L of H2O2
50 g of H2O2 will give O2 at S.T.P. = \(\frac {22.7}{68}\) × 50 = 16.691 L
∴ 1 L of H2O2 gives O2 at S.T.P. = 16.691 L
∴ Strength of H2O2 = 16.691 volume
Ans: The given 5% H2O2 solution is equivalent to 16.691 volume solution of hydrogen peroxide.

Question 81.
Naina is a school going kid. Every morning her mother makes her drink a glass of milk. When she asked her mother that why she has to drink a glass of milk daily, her mother told her that it is beneficial in maintaining healthy bones and teeth. Regular consumption of milk is recommended because it is a rich source of calcium.
i. In which form is calcium important for bones and teeth?
ii. Calcium belongs to which family in the modern periodic table?
iii. Write its electronic configuration.
iv. Calcium contain how many valence electrons?
v. Give any two-biological importance of calcium.
Answer:
i. Calcium is important for bones and teeth in the form of apatite [Ca(PO4)2].
ii. It belongs to the family of alkaline earth metals in the modem periodic table.
iii. Electronic configuration of 20Ca is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2.
iv. Calcium contains two valence electrons as it has two electrons in its outermost shell (4s).

v. Calcium ion (Ca2+)

  • Ca2+ ions are important for bones and teeth in the fonn of apatite [Ca3(PO4)2].
  • They play an important role in blood clotting.
  • Ca2+ ions are required for contraction and stretching of muscles.
  • They are also required to maintain the regular beating of heart.

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Of all the elements present in the periodic table, ………… has the simplest atomic structure.
(A) lithium
(B) beryllium
(C) hydrogen
(D) helium
Answer:
(C) hydrogen

2. Electronic configuration of hydrogen is similar to that of ……………
(A) transition elements
(B) inert gases
(C) alkaline earth metals
(D) alkali metals
Answer:
(D) alkali metals

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

3. Isotopes are atoms of the same element having different ………….. number.
(A) neutron
(B) proton
(C) electron
(D) Both (A) and (B)
Answer:
(A) neutron

4. Tritium, \(\left({ }_{1}^{3} \mathrm{H}\right)\) ……………
(A) is an isotope of hydrogen
(B) contains one electron, one proton and two neutrons
(C) is a beta particle emitter
(D) all of these
Answer:
(D) all of these

5. In the electrolysis of acidified water using, ………….. is liberated at the anode.
(A) dihydrogen
(B) sulphate ions
(C) oxygen
(D) chloride ions
Answer:
(C) oxygen

6. Water gas is a mixture of ………….
(A) CO + H2
(B) CO2 + H2
(C) O2 + H2
(D) CO + O2
Answer:
(A) CO + H2

7. During production of dihydrogen by water-gas shift reaction, which of the following is present as an impurity?
(A) Carbon monoxide
(B) Carbon dioxide
(C) Calcium carbonate
(D) Calcium oxide
Answer:
(B) Carbon dioxide

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

8. Solution is used to remove carbon dioxide present in the mixture along with dihydrogen.
(A) Sodium hydroxide
(B) Hydrochloric acid
(C) Magnesium chloride
(D) Sodium arsenite
Answer:
(D) Sodium arsenite

9. The reaction between dihydrogen and …………… is highly exothermic.
(A) halogens
(B) dioxygen
(C) dinitrogen
(D) metals
Answer:
(B) dioxygen

10. The elements of group 1 and group 2 belong to which block of the modem periodic table?
(A) d-block
(B) s-block
(C) p-block
(D) f-block
Answer:
(B) s-block

11. Which of the following is NOT an alkaline earth metal?
(A) Beryllium
(B) Barium
(C) Calcium
(D) Caesium
Answer:
(D) Caesium

12. The common oxidation state for alkali metals is …………….
(A) +2
(B) +1
(C) +3
(D) +4
Answer:
(B) +1

13. All alkaline earth metals have ………….. valence electrons in the outermost orbit.
(A) one
(B) two
(C) three
(D) four
Answer:
(B) two

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

14. Electronic configuration of potassium with respect to nearest noble gases is …………..
(A) [He]2s1
(B) [Ne]3s1
(C) [Ar]4s1
(D) [Kr]5s1
Answer:
(C) [Ar]4s1

15. Which of the following is radioactive alkali metal?
(A) Rubidium
(B) Caesium
(C) Francium
(D) Beryllium
Answer:
(C) Francium

16. Which of the following element is rarest amongst s-block elements?
(A) Strontium
(B) Barium
(C) Radium
(D) Calcium
Answer:
(C) Radium

17. Which of the following is FALSE?
(A) Alkali metals readily loose electron to form monovalent M+ ions.
(B) In a group, from Li to Cs, atomic and ionic radii increase with atomic number.
(C) The monovalent ions of alkali metals are larger in size than the parent atoms.
(D) Ionization enthalpies decrease down the group from Li to Cs.
Answer:
(C) The monovalent ions of alkali metals are larger in size than the parent atoms.

18. The first ionization enthalpies of alkaline earth metals are …………. than those of the corresponding alkali metals.
(A) higher
(B) lower
(C) same
(D) none of these
Answer:
(A) higher

19. Which of the following alkaline earth metal does NOT react with water?
(A) Sr
(B) Mg
(C) Ca
(D) Be
Answer:
(D) Be

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

20. Oxides and hydroxides of alkaline earth metals except beryllium are ………….. in nature.
(A) acidic
(B) basic
(C) amphoteric
(D) neutral
Answer:
(B) basic

21. ………… is an excellent absorbent of carbon dioxide.
(A) KO2
(B) KCl
(C) KOH
(D) KHCO3
Answer:
(A) KO2

22. Lithium shows diagonal relationship with ……………
(A) beryllium
(B) magnesium
(C) calcium
(D) boron
Answer:
(B) magnesium

23. The diagonal relationship between Li and Mg is due to the similarity in ……………
(A) ionic sizes
(B) electronegativity value
(C) polarizing power
(D) all of the above
Answer:
(D) all of the above

24. The alkali metal that reacts with nitrogen directly to form nitride is ……………
(A) Li
(B) Na
(C) K
(D) Rb
Answer:
(A) Li

25. In the Solvay process, the chief products are ……………
(A) CaCO3 and Ca(HCO3)2
(B) Na2CO3 and NaHCO3
(C) Na2SO4 and NaHSO4
(D) CaCl2 and Ca(NO3)2
Answer:
(B) Na2CO3 and NaHCO3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Elements of Group 1 and 2

26. In Castner-Kellner process for preparation of sodium hydroxide, ………….. is subjected to electrolysis.
(A) NaCl
(B) NaOH
(C) Na2O
(D) Na2CO3
Answer:
(A) NaCl

27. Which of the following method of preparation of H2O2 is known as Merck’s method?
(A) BaO2.8H2O(s) + H2SO4(aq) → BaSO4(s) + H2O2(aq) + 8H2O(l)
(B) Na2O2 + H2SO4 → Na2SO4 + H2O2
(C) BaO2 + H2O + CO2 → BaCO3↓ + H2O2
(D) 3BaO2 + 2H3PO4 → Ba3(PO4)2↓ + 3H2O2
Answer:
(B) Na2O2 + H2SO4 → Na2SO4 + H2O2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 1.
What are the three distinct physical forms of a substance?
Answer:
The three distinct physical forms of a substance are solid, liquid and gas.

Question 2.
What are the different forms (physical states) in which water exists?
Answer:
Water exists in the three different forms solid ice, liquid water and gaseous vapours.

Question 3.
Give the differences between the three states of matter.
OR
State the properties of three states of matter.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 2

Question 4.
With suitable diagram, explain how three states of matter are interconvertible by exchange of heat.
Answer:

  • On heating, solid changes to liquid, which on further heating changes to gas.
  • On cooling, gas condenses to liquid, which on further cooling change to solid.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 3

Question 5.
What are intermolecular forces? Explain the role of these forces in different states of matter.
Answer:

  • Intermolecular forces are the attractive forces as well as repulsive forces present between the neighbouring molecules.
  • The attractive force decreases with the increase in distance between the molecules.
  • The intermolecular forces are strong in solids, less strong in liquids and very weak in gases. Thus, the three physical states of matter can be determined as per the strength of intermolecular forces.
  • The physical properties of matter such as melting point, boiling point, vapor pressure, viscosity, evaporation, surface tension and solubility can be studied with respect to the strength of attractive intermolecular forces between the molecules.
  • During the melting process, intermolecular forces are partially overcome, whereas they are overcome completely during the vapourization process.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 6.
Name the different types of intermolecular forces.
Answer:
The types of intermolecular forces are as follows:

  1. Dipole-dipole interactions
  2. Ion-dipole interactions
  3. Dipole-induced dipole interactions
  4. Hydrogen bonding
  5. London dispersion forces

Question 7.
Write a short note on dipole moment.
Answer:
Dipole moment:
i. Dipole moment (µ) is the product of the magnitude of the charge (Q) and the distance between the centres of positive and negative charge (r).
ii. It is designated by a Greek letter (µ) (mu) and its unit is Debye (D).
iii. Dipole moment is a vector quantity and is depicted by a small arrow with tail in the positive centre and head pointing towards the negative centre.
iv. For example, HCl is a polar molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 4
The crossed arrow Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 5 above the structure represents an electron density shift. Thus, polar molecules have permanent dipole moments.

Question 8.
Explain dipole-dipole interactions.
Answer:
Dipole-dipole interactions:
i. When a polar molecule encounters another polar molecule, the positive end of one molecule is attracted to the negative end of another polar molecule. Interaction between such molecules is termed as dipole-dipole interaction.
ii. These forces are generally weak, with energies of the order of 3-4 kJ mol-1 and are significant only when molecules are in close contact, i.e., in a solid or a liquid state.
iii. For example, C4H9Cl, (butyl chloride), CH3 – O – CH3 (dimethyl ether), ICl (iodine chloride, B.P. 27 °C), are dipolar liquids.
iv. The molecular orientations due to dipole-dipole interaction in ICl liquid is shown in the following figure:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 6
v. More polar the substance, greater the strength of its dipole-dipole interactions.

Question 9.
Explain the effect of dipole moment on boiling point with an example.
Answer:
Higher the dipole moment, stronger are the intermolecular forces. Thus, higher is the boiling point.
e.g. Dipole moment of dimethyl ether (CH3 – O – CH3) is 1.3 D while that of ethane (CH3 – CH2 – CH3) is 0.1 D. Since, dipole moment of dimethyl ether is higher than that of ethane, the boiling point of dimethyl ether is higher than that of ethane.
Note: Dipole moments and boiling points of some compounds:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 7

Question 10.
Explain ion-dipole interactions.
Answer:
Ion-dipole interactions:
i. An ion-dipole force is the result of electrostatic interactions between an ion (cation or anion) and the partial charges on a polar molecule.
ii. The strength of this interaction depends on the charge and size of an ion. It also depends on the magnitude of dipole moment and size of the molecule.
iii. Ion-dipole forces are particularly important in aqueous solutions of ionic substances. When an ionic compound is dissolved in water, the ions get separated and surrounded by water molecules. This process is called hydration of ions.
iv. For example, Na+ ion (cation) – H2O interaction is shown in the following figure:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 8
v. The charge density on Na+ is more concentrated than the charge density on Cl because Na+ is smaller in size than Cl. This makes the interaction between (Na+) and negative end of the polar H2O molecule stronger than the corresponding interaction between (Cl) and positive end of the polar H2O molecule.
vi. More the charge on cation, stronger is the ion-dipole interaction. For example, Mg2+ ion has higher charge and smaller ionic radius (78 pm) than Na+ ion (98 pm), hence Mg2+ ion is surrounded (hydrated) more strongly with water molecules and exerts strong ion-dipole interaction.
Thus, the strength of interaction increases with increase in charge on cation and with decrease in ionic size or radius.
Therefore, ion-dipole forces increase in the order: Na+ < Mg2+ < Al3+.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 11.
Write a short note on dipole-induced dipole interactions.
Answer:
Dipole-induced dipole interactions:
i. When polar molecules (like H2O, NH3) and nonpolar molecules (like benzene) approach each other, the polar molecules induce dipole in the nonpolar molecules. Hence, ‘Temporary dipoles’ are formed by shifting of electron clouds in nonpolar molecules.
ii. For example, ammonia (NH3) is polar and has permanent dipole moment while Benzene (C6H6) is nonpolar and has zero dipole moment. The force of attraction developed between the polar and nonpolar molecules is of the type dipole-induced dipole interaction. This is shown in the following figure:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 9

Question 12.
Explain briefly London dispersion forces.
Answer:
London dispersion forces:

  • In nonpolar molecules and inert gases, only dispersion forces exist.
  • Dispersion forces are also called as London forces or van der Waals forces.
  • It is the weakest intermolecular force that develops due to interaction between two nonpolar molecules.
  • In general, all atoms and molecules experience London dispersion forces, which result from the motion of electrons.
  • At any given instant of time, the electron distribution in an atom may be asymmetrical, giving the atom a short-lived dipole moment. This momentary dipole on one atom can affect the electron distribution in the neighbouring atoms and induce momentary dipoles in them. As a result, weak attractive force develops.
  • For example, substances composed of molecules such as O2, CO2, N2, halogens, methane gas, helium and other noble gases show van der Waals force of attraction.
  • The strength of London forces increases with increase in molecular size, molecular mass and number of electrons present in an atom or molecule.

Question 13.
Give reason: Benzene has zero dipole moment and has no dipole-dipole forces yet it exists in liquid state.
Answer:

  • Benzene (C6H6) is nonpolar molecule and has zero dipole moment.
  • In benzene, only London forces exist due to momentary dipoles.
  • The strength of London forces increases with increase in molecular size, molecular mass and number of electrons present in an atom or molecule.
  • Hence, due to the presence of London forces, benzene exists in liquid state.

Question 14.
Explain the term polarizability.
Answer:
Polarizability:

  • When two nonpolar molecules approach each other, attractive and repulsive forces between their electrons and the nuclei will lead to distortions in the size of electron cloud, a property referred to as polarizability.
  • Polarizability is a measure of how easily an electron cloud of an atom is distorted by an applied electric field.
  • It is the property of atom.
  • The ability to form momentary dipoles, that means, the ability of the molecule to become polar by redistributing its electrons is known as polarizability of the atom or molecule.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 15.
Describe how London dispersion forces affect the boiling points of isomeric compounds like n-pentane and neopentane.
Answer:

  • More the spread out of shapes, higher the dispersion forces present between the molecules.
  • London dispersion forces are stronger in a long chain of atoms where molecules are not compact.
  • For example, n-Pentane boils at 309.4 K, whereas neopentane boils at 282.7 K.
  • Both the substances have the same molecular formula, C5H12, but n-pentane is longer and somewhat spread out, whereas neopentane is more spherical and compact.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 10

Question 16.
Write a short note on hydrogen bonding.
Answer:
Hydrogen bonding:

  • The electrostatic force of attraction between positively polarised hydrogen atom of one molecule and a highly electronegative atom (which may be negatively charged) of other molecule is called as hydrogen bond.
  • Strong electronegative atoms that form hydrogen bonds are nitrogen, oxygen and fluorine.
  • A hydrogen bond is a special type of dipole-dipole attraction.
  • Hydrogen bonds are generally stronger than usual dipole-dipole and dispersion forces, and weaker than true covalent or ionic bonds.
  • Hydrogen bond is denoted by (….) dotted line.
    e.g. Water (H2O) and ammonia (NH3) show hydrogen bonding.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 11

Question 17.
Explain intramolecular and intermolecular hydrogen bond with suitable examples.
Answer:
i. Hydrogen bond which occurs within one single molecule represents intramolecular hydrogen bond.
e.g. H-bonding in ethylene glycol:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 12

ii. A hydrogen bond present between two like or unlike molecules represents intermolecular hydrogen bond.
e.g. H-bonding in H-F:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 13

Question 18.
How does hydrogen bonding influence boiling points of compounds?
Answer:

  • Due to the presence of hydrogen bonding in the compounds, more energy is required to break the bonds.
  • Therefore, boiling point is more in case of liquid molecules containing hydrogen bond.
  • Hydrogen bonds can be quite strong with energies up to 40 kJ/mol.
  • The boiling point generally increases with increase in molecular mass, but the hydrides of nitrogen (NH3), oxygen (H2O) and fluorine (HF) have abnormally high boiling points due to the presence of hydrogen bonding between the molecules.

[Note: Due to presence of H-bond, viscosity’ of liquid increases. Hydrogen bonds play vital role in determining structure and properties of proteins and nucleic acids present in all living organisms.]

Question 19.
Observe the following figure and answer the questions:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 14
i. What do the dotted lines represent?
ii. A water molecule can form how many H-bonds?
iii. Is this an example of intramolecular H-bonding?
Answer:
i. The dotted lines represent hydrogen bonds.
ii. A water molecule can form four H-bonds.
iii. No, it is an example of intermolecular H-bonding.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 20.
Explain the relation between intermolecular forces and thermal energy.
Answer:

  • Thermal energy is the measure of kinetic energy of the particles of matter that arises due to movement of particles.
  • It is directly proportional to the temperature; that means, thermal energy increases with increase in temperature and vice versa.
  • Three states of matter are the consequence of a balance between the intermolecular forces of attraction and the thermal energy of the molecules.
  • If the intermolecular forces are very weak, molecules do not come together to make liquid or solid unless thermal energy is decreased by lowering the temperature.
  • When a substance is to be converted from its gaseous state to solid state, its thermal energy (or temperature) has to be reduced. At this stage, the intermolecular forces become more important than thermal energy of the particles.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 15

Note: Comparison of intermolecular forces:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 16

Question 21.
State true or false. Correct the false statement.
i. London dispersion force is the weakest intermolecular force that develops due to interaction between two nonpolar molecules.
ii. More the charge on cation, stronger is the ion-dipole interaction.
iii. A hydrogen bond is a special type of dipole-induced dipole attraction.
iv. Thermal energy is directly proportional to the temperature.
Answer:
i. True
ii. True
iii. False,
A hydrogen bond is a special type of dipole-dipole attraction.
iv. True

Question 22.
Name the major intermolecular forces between:
i. Cl2 and CBr4
ii. SiH4 molecules
iii.He atoms in liquid He
iv. HCl molecules in liquid HCl
v. He and a polar molecule
vi. Water molecules
Answer:
i. London dispersion forces
ii. London dispersion forces
iii. London dispersion forces
iv. Dipole-dipole interactions
v. Dipole-induced dipole
vi. Hydrogen bonding

Question 23.
Why is the chemistry of atmospheric gases an important subject of study?
Answer:
The chemistry of atmospheric gases is an important subject of study as it involves air pollution. O2 in air is essential for survival of aerobic life.

Question 24.
What are the measurable properties of gases?
OR
Explain the following measurable properties of gases in detail: Mass, volume, pressure, temperature and diffusion.
Answer:
Measurable properties of gases are as follows:
i. Mass:

  • The mass (m) of a gas sample is measure of the quantity of matter it contains.
  • It can be measured experimentally.
  • The SI unit of mass is kilogram (kg).
    1 kg = 103 g.
  • The mass of a gas is related to the number of moles (n) by the expression:
    n = \(\frac{\text { mass in grams }}{\text { molar mass in grams }}=\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\)

ii. Volume:

  • Volume (V) of a sample of gas is the amount of space it occupies.
  • It is expressed in terms of different units like Litres (L), millilitres (mL), cubic centimetre (cm3), cubic metre (m3) or decimetre cube (dm3).
  • The SI Unit of volume is cubic metre (m3).
  • Most commonly used unit to measure the volume of the gas is decimetre cube or litre.

iii. Pressure:

  • Pressure (P) is defined as force per unit area.
    Pressure = \(\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { Area }}=\frac{\mathrm{f}}{\mathrm{a}}\)
  • Pressure of gas is measured with ‘manometer’ and atmospheric pressure is measured by ‘barometer’.
  • The SI unit of pressure is pascal (Pa) or Newton per metre square (N m-2).

iv. Temperature:

  • It is the property of an object that determines direction in which energy will flow when that object is in contact with another object.
  • In scientific measurements, temperature (T) is measured either on the Celsius scale (°C) or the Kelvin scale (K).
  • The SI unit of temperature of a gas is Kelvin (K).
  • The Celsius and Kelvin scales are related by the expression: T(K) = t °C + 273.15

v. Density: Density (d) of a substance is the mass per unit volume.
d = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\)
∴ The SI unit of density is kg m-3.
In the case of gases, relative density is measured with respect to hydrogen gas and is called vapour density.
∴ Vapour density = \(\frac{\text { Molar mass }}{2}\)

vi. Diffusion:
a. Diffusion is the process of mixing two or more gases to form a homogeneous mixture.
b. The volume of gas diffused per unit time is the rate of diffusion of that gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 17
c. SI Unit for rate of diffusion is dm3 s-1 or cm3 s-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 25.
Convert:
i. 3.5 atm to mm Hg
ii. 1520 torr to atm
iii. 5 m3 to dm3
iv. 580 °c to Kelvin
Answer:
I. 3.5 atm to mm Hg:
1 atm = 760 mm Hg
∴ 3.5 atm = 3.5 × 760
= 2660 mm Hg

ii. 1520 torr to aim:
1 atm = 760 torr
∴ 1 torr = \(\frac {1}{760}\) atrn
∴ 1520 torr = \(\frac {1520}{760}\) = atm

iii. 5 m3 to dm3:
1 m3 = 103 dm3
∴ 5m3 = 5 × dm3 = 5000 dm3

iv. 580 °C to Kelvin:
T(K) = t °C + 273.15
∴ T(K)= (580 °C) + 273.15 = 853.15 K

Question 26.
Name four measurable properties that are essential to study behaviour of gases.
Answer:

  • Pressure
  • Volume
  • Temperature
  • Number of moles

Question 27.
Explain Boyle’s law with the help of a diagram.
Answer:
Boyle’s law (Pressure-Volume relationship):
i. Statement: For a fixed mass (number of moles ‘n’) of a gas at constant temperature, the pressure (P) of the gas is inversely proportional to the volume (V) of the gas.
ii. Explanation:
The mathematical expression of Boyle’s law is:
P ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~V}}\) (at constant T and n) k1
∴ P = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}_{1}}{\mathrm{~V}}\) (where, k1 is the proportionality constant)
On rearranging the above equation,
∴ PV = k1 = constant
This implies that at constant temperature, product of pressure and volume of the fixed amount of a gas is constant.
Thus, when a fixed amount of a gas at constant temperature (T) occupying volume V1 initially at pressure (P1) undergoes expansion or compression, volume of the gas changes to V2 and pressure to P2.
According to Boyle’s law,
P1V1 = P2V2 = constant

iii. Schematic illustration of Boyle’s law:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 18

Question 28.
Give the different graphical representations of Boyle’s law.
Answer:
i. Graph of pressure (P) versus volume (V) of a gas at constant temperature:
If the pressure (P) is plotted against volume (V) at constant temperature, a curve is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 19
As the pressure increases, the volume decreases exponentially. The product of pressure and volume is always constant (PV = k). For a given mass of a gas, the value of k varies only with temperature.
[Note: Each curve is an isotherm as it is plotted at constant temperature, (iso = constant, therm = temperature).]

ii. Graph of PV versus pressure (P) of a gas constant temperature:
If the product of pressure and volume (PV) is plotted against pressure (P), a straight line is obtained parallel to x-axis (pressure axis).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 20

iii. Graph of pressure (P) of a gas versus reciprocal of volume (1/V) at constant temperature:
If the pressure (P) of the gas is plotted against (1/V), a straight line is obtained passing through the origin.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 21
[Note: At high pressure, deviation from Boyle’s law is observed in the behaviour of gases.]

Question 29.
Derive the relationship between density and pressure.
Answer:
Relationship between density and pressure:
With increase in pressure, gas molecules get closer and the density (d) of the gas increases. Hence, at constant temperature, pressure is directly proportional to the density of a fixed mass of gas.
From Boyle’s law,
PV = k1 …….(1)
∴ V = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}_{1}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
But, d = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\)
On substituting, V from equation (2),
d = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{K}_{1}}\) × P
∴ d = k P …….(3)
where k = New constant
∴ d ∝ P
Above equation shows that at constant temperature, the pressure is directly proportional to the density of a fixed mass of the gas.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 30.
Write a short note on absolute temperature scale.
Answer:
Absolute temperature scale:

  • Absolute temperature scale is related to Celsius temperature scale by the equation:
    T K = t °C + 273.15
  • This also called thermodynamic scale of temperature.
  • The units of this absolute temperature scale is called (K) in the honour of Lord Kelvin who determined the accurate value of absolute zero as -273.15 °C in the year 1854.

Question 31.
Explain Charles’ law with the help of a diagram.
Answer:
Charles’ law (Temperature-Volume relationship):
i. Statement: At constant pressure, the volume of a fixed mass of a gas is directly proportional to its temperature in Kelvin.

ii. Explanation:
For an increase of every degree of temperature, volume of the gas increases by \(\frac{1}{273.15}\) of its original value at 0 °C. This is expressed mathematically as follows:
Vt = V0 + \(\frac{t}{273.15} V_{0}\) ………….(1)
Where Vt and V0 are the volumes of the given mass of gas at the temperatures t °C and 0 °C. Rearranging the Eq. (1) gives
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 22
The equation (3) on rearrangement takes the following form:
\(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{t}}}{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{t}}}=\frac{\mathrm{V}_{0}}{\mathrm{~T}_{0}}\)
From this, a general equation can be written as follows:
\(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\) …………(4)
\(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = K2 = constant (at constant P and n)
∴ V = k2T OR V ∝ T ……(5)
The equation (4) is the mathematical expression of Charles’ law.

iii. Schematic illustration of Charles’ law:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 23
This shows that at constant pressure, gases expand on heating and contract on cooling.

Question 32.
Give the different graphical representation of Charles’ law.
Answer:
Graph of volume versus temperature at constant pressure:

  • According to Charles’ law, the graph of volume of a gas (at given constant pressure, say P1) versus its temperature in Celsius, is a straight line with a positive slope.
  • On extending the line to zero volume, the line intercepts the temperature axis at -273.15 °C.
  • At any other value of pressure, say P2, a different straight line for the volume temperature plot is obtained, but we get the same zero-volume temperature intercept at -273.15 °C.
  • The straight line of the volume versus temperature graph at constant pressure is called isobar.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 24
[Note: Zero volume for a gas sample is a hypothetical state. In practice, all the gases get liquified at a temperature higher than -273.15 °C. This temperature is the lowest temperature that can be imagined but practically cannot be attained. It is the absolute zero temperature on the Kelvin scale (0 K).]

Question 33.
Write the statement for Gay-Lussac’s law.
Answer:
Statement for Gay-Lussac’s law:
At constant volume, pressure (P) of a fixed amount of a gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature (T).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 34.
Give the mathematical expression for Gay-Lussac’s law.
Answer:
Gay-Lussac’s law (Pressure-Temperature relationship):
i. Statement: At constant volume, pressure (P) of a fixed amount of a gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature (T).
ii. Explanation:
Gay-Lussac’s law can be mathematically expressed as:
P ∝ T
∴ P = k3T
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = Constant (at constant V and n)
Thus, according to Gay-Lussac’s law,
\(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\) = constant

Question 35.
Give the graphical representation of Gay-Lussac’s law.
Answer:
Graph of pressure versus temperature of a gas at constant volume:
When a graph is plotted between pressure (P) in atm and temperature (T) in kelvin, a straight line is obtained It is known as isochore.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 25

Question 36.
Define the following terms:
i. Isotherm
ii. Isobar
iii. Isochore
Answer:
i. A graph of pressure (P) versus volume (V) at a constant temperature is known as isotherm.
ii. A graph of volume (V) versus absolute temperature (T) at a constant pressure is known as isobar.
iii. A graph of pressure (P) versus absolute temperature (T) at a constant volume is known as isochore.

Question 37.
State and explain Avogadro law.
Answer:
Avogadro law (Volume-Amount relationship):
i. Statement: Equal volumes of all gases at the same temperature and pressure contain equal number of molecules.
ii. Explanation:
V is directly proportional to n (number of moles) at constant ‘P’ and ‘T’.
V ∝ n
V = k4 × n (where, k4 is proportionality constant)
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{n}}\) = constant (at constant T and P)
Note: Representation of Avogadro law
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 26

Question 38.
What is molar volume?
Answer:
The volume occupied by one mole of an ideal gas at STP is 22.414 L. This volume is known as molar volume.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 39.
Derive the relation between density of a gas and its molar mass.
Answer:
Relation between density of a gas and its molar mass:
According to Avogadro’s law, V ∝ n
Now, n = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\) (where, m is the mass of the gas and M is the molar mass of the gas)
∴ V ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\)
M ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\)
But, \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\) = d (where, d is the density of the gas)
∴ d ∝ M
Thus, density of a gas is directly proportional to its molar mass.

Question 40.
The volume occupied by a given mass of a gas at 298 K is 25 mL at 1 atmosphere pressure.
Calculate the volume of the gas if pressure is increased to 1.25 atmosphere at constant temperature.
Solution:
Given: P1 = Initial pressure = 1 atm, V1 = Initial volume = 25 mL
P2 = Final pressure = 1.25 atm
To find: V2 = Final volume of the gas
Formula: P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
Calculation: According to Boyle’s law, P1V1 = P2V2
Substituting the values of P1, V1 and P2 in the above expression, we get
V2 = \(\frac{P_{1} V_{1}}{P_{2}}=\frac{1 \times 25}{1.25}\) = 20 mL
Ans: The volume occupied by the gas is 20 mL.

Question 41.
The volume of a given mass of a gas is 0.6 dm3 at a pressure of 2 atm. Calculate the volume of the gas if its pressure is increased to 2.4 at the same temperature.
Solution:
Given: P1 = Initial pressure = 2 atm
V1 = Initial volume of given mass of the gas = 0.6 dm3
P2 = Final pressure = 2.4 atm
To find: V2 = Final volume of the gas
Formula: P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
Calculation: According to Boyle’s law,
P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
V2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{P}_{2}}=\frac{2 \times 0.6}{2.4}=0.5 \mathrm{dm}^{3}\)
Ans: The volume of the given gas is 0.5 dm3.

Question 42.
What will be the minimum pressure required to compress 500 dm3 of air at 5 bar to 200 dm3 at 25 °C.
Solution:
Given: P1 = Initial pressure = 5 bar
V1 = Initial volume = 500 dm3; V2 = Final volume = 200 dm3
To find: P2 = Final pressure
Formula: P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
Calculation: According to Boyle’s law,
P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
∴ P2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~V}_{2}}=\frac{5 \times 500}{200}\) = 12.5 bar
Ans: The minimum pressure required to compress 500 dm3 of air at 5 bar to 200 dm3 at 25 °C is 12.5 bar.

Question 43.
A balloon has certain volume at sea level. At what pressure (in kPa) will its volume be increased by 40% if the temperature is kept constant?
Solution:
Given: P1 = Initial pressure = 101.325 kPa (∵ The pressure at sea level = 101.325 kPa)
V1 = Initial volume at sea level = 100 dm3 (assumption)
V2 = Final volume = (100 + 40) = 140 dm3
To find: P2 = Final pressure
Formula: P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
Calculation: According to Boyle’s law,
P1V1 = P2V2 (at constant n and T)
P2 = \(\frac{P_{1} V_{1}}{V_{2}}\)
∴ P2 = \(\frac{101.325 \times 100}{140}\) = 72.375 kPa
Ans: The pressure at which volume of the given balloon will be increased by 40% at a given temperature is 72.375 kPa.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 44.
At 300 K, a certain mass of a gas occupies 1 × 10-4 dm3 volume. Calculate its volume at 450 K and at the same pressure.
Solution:
Given: T1 = Initial temperature = 300 K, V1 = Initial volume = 1 × 10-4 dm3,
T2 = Final temperature = 450 K
To find: V2 = Final volume
Formula: \(\frac{V_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{V_{2}}{T_{2}}\) (at constant n and P)
Calculation: According to Charles’ law, at constant pressure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 27
Ans: The volume of given gas becomes 1.5 × 10-4 dm3 at the temperature of 450 K and same pressure.

Question 45.
A certain mass of a gas occupies a volume of 0.2 dm3 at the temperature, x K. Calculate the volume of the gas if its absolute temperature is doubled at same pressure.
Solution:
Given: V1 = Initial volume = 0.2 dm3, T1 = Initial temperature = x K
T2 = Final temperature = 2 × x = 2x K
To find: V2 = Final volume of the gas
\(\frac{V_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{V_{2}}{T_{2}}\) (at constant n and P)
Calculation: According to Charles’ law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 28
Ans: The volume of given gas becomes 0.4 dm3 when the temperature is doubled.

Question 46.
The volume of a given mass of a gas at 0 °C is 0.2 dm3. Calculate its volume at 100 °C, if the pressure remains the same.
Solution:
Given: V1 = Initial volume = 0.2 dm3, T1 = Initial temperature = 0 °C = 273.15 K,
T2 = Final temperature = 100 °C = 100 + 273.15 K = 373.15 K
To find: V2 = Volume at 100 °C
Formula: \(\frac{V_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{V_{2}}{T_{2}}\) (at constant n and P)
Calculation: According to Charles’ law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 29
Ans: The volume of gas at 100 °C is 0.273 dm3.

Question 47.
A glass container is sealed with a gas at 0.8 atm pressure and at 25 °C. The glass container sustains a pressure of 2 atm. Calculate the temperature to which the gas can be heated before bursting the container.
Solution:
Given: P1 = Initial pressure = 0.8 atm, P2 = Final pressure = 2 atm
T1 = Initial temperature = 25 °C = 25 + 273.15 K = 298.15 K
To find: T2= Final temperature
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 30
Ans: The temperature to which the gas can be heated before bursting the container is 472 °C.

Question 48.
An 8.0 L of sample at 0 °C and 5.6 atm of pressure contains 2.0 moles of a gas. If more 1.0 mole of gas at the same temperature and pressure is added, calculate the final volume.
Solution:
Given: V1 = Initial volume = 8.0 L
n1 = Initial mol = 2.0 mol
n2 = Final mol = (2.0 + 1.0) = 0.3 mol
To find: V2 = Final volume
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 31
Ans: The final volume is 12 L.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 49.
What is an ideal gas equation?
Answer:
Ideal gas equation is obtained by combining three gas laws, namely, Boyle’s law, Charles’ law and Avogadro law. Mathematically, it is given as:
PV = nRT
where,
P = Pressure of gas, V = Volume of gas, n = number of moles of gas,
R = Gas constant, T = Absolute temperature of gas

Question 50.
Derive the ideal gas equation.
Answer:
According to Boyle’s law,
V ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{P}}\) (at constant T and n) ………..(1)
According to Charles’ law,
V ∝ T (at constant P and n) …….(2)
According to Avogadro’s law,
V ∝ n (at constant P and T) …….(3)
Combining relations (1), (2) and (3), we get
V ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{nT}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
Converting this proportionality into an equation by introducing a constant of proportionality (‘R’ known as gas constant), we get
∴ V = \(\frac{\mathrm{nRT}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
On rearranging the above equation, we get
PV = nRT
where,
P = Pressure of gas,
V = Volume of gas,
n = number of moles of gas,
R = Gas constant,
T = Absolute temperature of gas.
This is the ideal gas equation or equation of state.
[Note: In the ideal gas equation, R is called gas constant or universal gas constant, whose value is same for all the gases. In this equation, if three variables are known, fourth can be calculated. The equation describes the state of an ideal gas. Hence, it is also called as equation of state.]

Question 51.
Deduce values of gas constant ‘R’ in different units.
Answer:
i. R in SI Unit (in Joules): Value of R can be calculated by using the SI units of P, V and T. Pressure P is measured in N m-2 or Pa, volume V in meter cube (m3) and temperature T in Kelvin (K).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 32

ii. R in litre atmosphere: If pressure (P) is expressed in atmosphere (atm) and volume in litre (L) or decimeter cube (dm3) and Temperature in kelvin (K), (that is, old STP conditions), then value of R is,
R = \(\frac{1 \mathrm{~atm} \times 22.414 \mathrm{~L}}{1 \mathrm{~mol} \times 273.15 \mathrm{~K}}\)
∴ R = 0.0821 L atm K-1 mol-1
OR
R = 0.0821 dm3 atm K-1 mol-1

iii. R in calories: We know, 1 calorie = 4.184 Joules
∴ R= \(\frac{8.314}{4.184}\) = 1.987 ≅ 2 cal K-1 mol-1

Question 52.
Derive the following expression:
M = \(\frac{\text { mRT }}{\text { PV }}\)
Answer:
According to ideal gas equation,
PV = nRT
n = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{RT}}\)
Now, for a known mass ‘m’ of gas having molar mass ‘M’, number of moles ‘n’ is given as:
n = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\)
Therefore, \(\frac{m}{M}=\frac{P V}{R T}\)
On rearranging the equation, we get
M = \(\frac{\text { mRT }}{\text { PV }}\)

Question 53.
Derive the expression for combined gas law.
Answer:
The ideal gas equation is written as
PV = nRT …….(1)
On rearranging equation (1), we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 33
The ideal gas equation used in this form is called combined gas law.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 54.
Derive the relation between density, molar mass and pressure.
Answer:
Relation between density, molar mass and pressure:
According to ideal gas equation,
PV = nRT …..(1)
On rearranging equation (1), we get
\(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{V}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{RT}}\) ……….(2)
Now, n = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\)
On substituting the value of n, equation (2) becomes
\(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{MV}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{RT}}\)
\(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{M}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{RT}}\) ……….(3)
where d = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\) = density of the gas
On rearranging the equation, we get
M = \(\frac{\mathrm{dRT}}{\mathrm{P}}\) ……(4)
This equation can be used to calculate molar mass of a gas in terms of its density.

Question 55.
State Boyle’s law in terms of density.
Answer:
Boyle’s law in terms of density is stated as ‘At constant temperature, pressure of a given mass of gas is directly proportional to its density’.

Question 56.
Derive the expression that relates partial pressure with mole fraction of a gas.
Answer:
The partial pressures of individual gases can be written in terms of ideal gas equation as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 34
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 35
Thus, partial pressure of a gas is obtained by multiplying the total pressure of mixture by mole fraction of that gas.

Question 57.
What is water vapour?
Answer:
The ‘gas’ above the surface of liquid water is described as water vapour.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 58.
Write a short note on aqueous tension.
Answer:
Aqueous tension:
i. When the liquid water is placed into a container and air above is pumped away and the container is sealed, then the liquid water evaporates and only water vapour remains in the above space. After sealing, the vapour pressure increases initially, then slows down as some water molecules condense back to form liquid water. After a few minutes, the vapour pressure reaches a maximum value, which is called the saturated vapour pressure. The pressure exerted by saturated water vapour is called aqueous tension (Paq).
ii. Aqueous tension increases with increase in temperature.

Question 59.
Explain how pressure of a dry gas can be calculated using aqueous tension.
Answer:
i. When a gas is collected over water in a closed container, it gets mixed with the saturated water vapour in that space. Therefore, the measured pressure corresponds to the pressure of the mixture of that gas and the saturated water vapour in that space.
ii. Pressure of pure and dry gas can be calculated by using the aqueous tension. It is obtained by subtracting the aqueous tension from the total pressure of the moist gas.
∴ PDry gas = PTotal – Paq
i.e., PDry gas = PTotal – Aqueous Tension
Note: Aqueous tension of water (vapour pressure) as a function of temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 36

Question 60.
A sample of N2 gas was placed in a flexible 9.0 L container at 300 K at a pressure of 1.5 atm. The gas was compressed to a volume of 3.0 L and heat was added until the temperature reached 600 K. What is the new pressure inside the container?
Solution:
Given: V1 = Initial volume = 9.0 L, V2 = Final volume = 3.0 L,
P1 = Initial pressure = 1.5 atm
T1 = Initial temperature = 300 K, T2 = Final temperature = 600 K
To find: P2 = Final pressure
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}_{2} \mathrm{~V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
Calculation: According to combined gas law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 37
Ans: The new pressure inside the container is 9 atm.

Question 61.
A gas at 772 mm Hg and at 35 °C occupies a volume of 6.851 L. Calculate its volume at STP.
Solution:
Given: V1 = Initial volume = 6.851 L
P1 = Initial pressure = 772 mm Hg, P2 = Final pressure = 760 mm Hg
T1 = Initial temperature = 35 °C = 35 + 273.15 K = 308.15 K
T2 = Final temperature = 273.15 K
To find: V2 = Final volume
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}_{2} \mathrm{~V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
Calculation: According to combined gas law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 38
Ans: The volume of gas at STP is 6.169 L.

Question 62.
Find the temperature in °C at which volume and pressure of 1 mol of nitrogen gas becomes 10 dm3 and 2.46 atmosphere respectively.
Solution.
P = 2.46 atm, V = 10 dm3, n = 1 mol, R = 0.0821 dm3-atm K-1 mol-1
To find: Temperature (T)
Formula: PV = nRT
According to ideal gas equation,
PV = nRT
∴ T = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{nR}}=\frac{2.46 \times 10}{1 \times 0.0821}\)
T = 299.63 K
Temp, in °C = 299.63 – 273.15 = 26.48 °C
Ans: The temperature of the nitrogen gas under the given conditions is 26.48 °C.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 63.
Calculate the temperature of 5.0 mol of a gas occupying 5 dm3 at 3.32 bar.
(R = 0.083 bar dm3 K-1 mol-1)
Solution:
Given: n = number of moles = 5.0 mol, V = volume = 5 dm3
P = pressure = 3.32 bar, R = 0.083 bar dm3 K-1 mol-1
To find: Temperature (T)
Formula: PV = nRT
Calculation: According to ideal gas equation,
PV = nRT
∴ T = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{nR}}=\frac{3.32 \times 5}{5.0 \times 0.083}\) = 40 K
Ans: The temperature of the gas is 40 K.

Question 64.
Calculate the number of moles of hydrogen gas present in a 0.5 dm3 sample of hydrogen gas at a pressure of 101.325 kPa at 27 °C.
Solution:
Given: V = 0.5 dm3 = 0.5 × 10-3 m3, P = 101.325 kPa = 101.325 × 103 Pa = 101.325 × 103 Nm-2
T = 27 °C = 27 + 273.15 K = 300.15 K, R = 8.314 J K-1 mol-1
To find: n = number of moles of gas
Formula: PV = nRT
Calculation: According to ideal gas equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 39
Ans: The number of moles of hydrogen gas present in the given volume is 0.020 moles.

Question 65.
A mixture of 28 g N2, 8 g He and 40 g Ne has 20 bar pressure. What is the partial pressure of each of these gases?
Solution:
Given: mN2 = 28 g, mHe = 8 g, mNe = 40 g,
PTotal = 20 bar
To find: Partial pressure of each gas
Formula: P1 = x1 × PTotal
Calculation: Determine the number of moles (n) of each gas using the formula: n = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{M}}\)
Determine the mole fraction of each gas using the formula:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 40
Ans: The partial pressure of nitrogen, helium and neon are 4 bar, 8 bar and 8 bar respectively.

Question 66.
What is an ideal gas?
Answer:
Ideal gas:

  • The gases which obey’ ideal gas equation over a complete range of temperature and pressure are called ideal gases.
  • For an ideal gas, the ratio of PV/RT = 1.
  • In an ideal gas, there are no interactive forces between the molecules and the molecular volume is negligibly small compared to the volume occupied by the gas. The gas particles are considered as point particles.

Question 67.
What are real gases?
Answer:
Real gases:

  • Gases, which do not obey ideal gas equation under all the conditions of temperature and pressure are called real gases.
  • For real gases, the ratio of PV/RT will be either greater than 1 or less than 1.
  • Real gases show deviation from ideal gas behaviour at higher pressures and lower temperatures.
  • The intermolecular attractive forces are not negligible in real gases.
  • In real gases, the actual volume of the molecules cannot be neglected as compared to the total volume of the container.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 68.
Explain the reason for deviations of gases from ideal behaviour.
Answer:
A deviation from the ideal behaviour is observed at high pressure and low temperature. It is due to two reasons.

  • The intermolecular attractive forces are not negligible in real gases. These do not allow the molecules to collide the container wall with full impact. This results in decrease in the pressure.
  • At high pressure, the molecules are very close to each other. The short range repulsive forces start operating and the molecules behave as small but hard spherical particles. The volume of the molecule is not negligible.
    Therefore, very less volume is available for molecular motion.
  • At very low temperature, the molecular motion becomes slow and the molecules are attracted to each other due to the attractive force. Hence, the behaviour of the real gas deviates from the ideal gas behaviour.
  • Deviation with respect to pressure can be studied by plotting pressure (P) vs volume (V) curve at a given temperature.
  • From the graph, it is clear that at very high pressure, the measured volume is more than theoretically calculated volume assuming ideal behaviour. However, at low pressure, measured and theoretically calculated volumes approach each other.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 41

Question 69.
What is compressibility factor (Z)?
Answer:
Compressibility factor (Z):
i. It is defined as the ratio of product PV and nRT.
Z = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{nRT}}\)
ii. Deviation from ideal behaviour is measured in terms of compressibility factor.
iii. For ideal gases, Z = 1 under all conditions of temperature and pressure. Therefore, the graph of Z versus P will be a straight line parallel to pressure axis.
iv. For gases that deviate from ideal behaviour, value of Z deviates from unity.
Note: Variation of compressibility factor for some gases
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 42

Question 70.
Show that the compressibility factor can be represented as Z = \(\frac{V_{\text {real }}}{V_{\text {ideal }}}\)
Answer:
For real gas,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 43
Thus, the compressibility factor (Z) is the ratio of actual molar volume of a gas to its molar volume if it behaved ideally, at that temperature and pressure.

Question 71.
Explain: Liquefaction of CO2 with the help of pressure vs volume isotherm.
Answer:
Most gases behave like ideal gases at high temperature. For example, the PV curve of CO2 gas at 50 °C is like the ideal Boyle’s law curve. As the temperature is lowered, the PV curve shows a deviation from the ideal Boyle’s law curve. At a particular value of low temperature, the gas gets liquified at certain increased value of pressure. For example, CO2 gas liquifies at 38.98 °C and 73 atmosphere pressure. This is the highest temperature at which liquid CO2 can exist. Above this temperature, liquid CO2 cannot form even if very high pressure is applied. Other gases also show similar behaviour.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 44

Question 72.
Define: Critical temperature, critical volume and critical pressure.
Answer:
i. The temperature above which a substance cannot be liquified by increasing pressure is called its critical temperature (Tc).
ii. The molar volume at critical temperature is called the critical volume (Vc).
iii. The pressure at the critical temperature is called the critical pressure (Pc).

Note: Critical constants for common gases
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 45
i. N2 and O2, have Tc values much below 0 °C and their Pc values are high. Consequently, liquefaction of O2 and N2 (and air) requires compression and cooling.
ii. The Tc value of CO2 nearly equals the room temperature; however, its Pc value is very high. Therefore, CO2 exists as gas under ordinary condition.

Question 73.
Water has Tc = 647.1 K and Pc = 220.6 bar. What do these values imply about the state of water under ordinary conditions?
Answer:
The Tc and Pc values of water are very high compared to the room temperature and common atmospheric pressure. As a result, water exists in liquid state under ordinary condition of temperature and pressure.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 74.
Gases possess characteristic critical temperature which depends upon the magnitude of intermolecular forces between the gas particles. Critical temperatures of ammonia and carbon dioxide are 405.5 K and 304.10 K respectively. Which of these gases will liquefy first when you start cooling from 500 K to their critical temperature?
Answer:
When cooling of ammonia and carbon dioxide gas is started from 500 K, then ammonia reaches its critical temperature first (i.e., 405.5 K.) and hence, it is also the first to get liquefied.
When the cooling is continued further, carbon dioxide gas is liquefied as it reaches its critical temperature (i.e., 304.10 K).

Question 75.
CO2 has Tc = 38.98 °C and Pc = 73 atm. How many phases of CO2 coexist at
i. 50 °C and 73 atm
ii. 20 °C and 50 atm.
Answer:
i. 50 °C and 73 atm represent a condition for CO2 above its Tc. Therefore, under this condition CO2 exists only as single phase.
ii. 20° C and 50 atm represent a condition for CO2 below its Tc. Therefore, under this condition two phases of CO2, namely, liquid and gas can coexist.

Question 76.
In which of the following cases, water will have the highest and the lowest boiling point?
i. Water is boiled in an open vessel.
ii. Water is boiled in a pressure cooker.
iii. Water is boiled in an evacuated vessel.
Answer:
Higher the pressure to which a liquid is exposed, higher will be its boiling point. The pressure to which water is exposed is maximum in the pressure cooker and minimum in the evacuated vessel. Therefore, boiling point of water is highest in a pressure cooker and lowest in an evacuated vessel.

Question 77.
Define: Liquid state
Answer:
Liquid state is the intermediate state between solid state and gaseous state.

Question 78.
Give reason: Liquid possesses properties such as fluidity, definite volume and ability to take shape of the bottom of the container in which it is placed.
Answer:
Molecules of liquid are held together by moderately strong intermolecular forces and can move about within the boundary of the liquid. As a result, liquid possesses properties such as fluidity, definite volume and ability to take shape of the bottom of the container in which it is placed.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 79.
Name some measurable properties of liquid.
Answer:

  • Density
  • Boiling point
  • Freezing point
  • Vapour pressure
  • Surface tension
  • Viscosity.

Question 80.
What are the factors affecting vapour pressure?
Answer:
Factors affecting vapour pressure:

  • Nature of liquid: Liquids having relatively weak intermolecular forces possess high vapour pressure. Such liquids are called volatile liquids.
    e. g. Petrol evaporates quickly than motor oil. Hence, petrol has higher vapour pressure than motor oil.
  • Temperature: When the liquid is gradually heated, its temperature rises and its vapour pressure increases.

Question 81.
Explain how temperature affects surface tension.
Answer:
Surface tension is a temperature dependent property. When attractive forces are large, surface tension is large. Surface tension decreases as the temperature increases. With increase in temperature, kinetic energy of molecules increases. So, intermolecular forces of attraction decrease, and thereby surface tension decreases.

Question 82.
Mention some applications of surface tension.
Answer:
Applications of surface tension:

  • Cleaning action of soap and detergent is due to the lowering of interfacial tension between water and oily substances. Due to lower surface tension, the soap solution penetrates into the fibre, surrounds the oily substance and washes it away.
  • Efficacy of toothpastes, mouthwashes and nasal drops is partly due to presence of substances having lower surface tension. This increases the efficiency of their penetrating action.

Question 83.
Give reason: Liquid droplets acquire spherical shape.
Answer:
For a given volume of a liquid, spherical shape always imparts minimum surface area thereby reducing the surface tension. Hence, liquid droplets acquire spherical shape.

Question 84.
Define: Coefficient of viscosity
Answer:
Coefficient of viscosity is defined as the degree to which a fluid resists flow under an applied force, measured by the tangential frictional force per unit area per unit velocity gradient when the flow is laminar.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Question 85.
Describe various factors affecting viscosity of a liquid.
Answer:
Factors affecting viscosity of a liquid:
i. Temperature: Viscosity is a temperature dependent property.
Viscosity ∝ \(\frac{1}{\text { Temperature }}\)
ii. Nature of liquid: Viscosity also depends on molecular size and shape. Larger molecules have more viscosity and spherical molecules offer the least resistance to flow and therefore are less viscous. Greater the viscosity, slower is the liquid flow.

Question 86.
Describe three daily life instances where viscosity plays an important role.
Answer:

  • Lubricating oils are viscous liquids. Gradation of lubricating oils is done on the basis of viscosity. A good quality lubricating oil does not change its viscosity with increase or decrease in temperature.
  • Increase blood viscosity than the normal value is taken as an indication of cardiovascular disease.
  • Glass panes of old buildings are found to become thicker with time near the bottom. This indicates that glass is not a solid but a supercooled viscous liquid.

Question 87.
For an experiment, a scientist fills different gases in four flasks as shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 46
i. What is the ratio of the number of molecules of the gases in flask A to flask B?
ii. Calculate the pressure exerted by nitrogen gas in flask B if the temperature is doubled.
iii. If the scientist transfers the gas in flask D to another flask of 2.5 L at 1 atm pressure, what will be the temperature of the gas in the new flask?
Answer:
i. 1:1
ii. P ∝ T (when V and n are constants)
∴ If temperature is doubled, pressure also doubles.
∴ P = 2 atm
iii. \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\) (when P and n are constants)
∴ \(\frac{1}{298}=\frac{2.5}{T_{2}}\)
∴ T2 = 745 K

Question 88.
A balloon containing 0.6 mol of helium gas has a volume of 1.5 L.
i. Assuming that the temperature and pressure remains constant, what happens to the volume of the balloon if an additional 0.6 mol of helium is added?
ii. Assuming that the temperature and pressure remains constant, what happens to the volume of the balloon if 0.3 mol of helium is removed?
Answer:
i. The volume of the balloon increases.
ii. The volume of the balloon decreases.

Question 89.
In an experiment conducted to study the diffusion of gases using same experimental conditions, following data were recorded.
Gas A: 50 cm3 of gas A takes 7 minutes to diffuse from one container to the adjacent container.
Gas B: 50 cm3 of gas B takes 10 minutes to diffuse from one container to the adjacent container.
i. What is the rate of diffusion of gas A?
ii. What is the rate of diffusion of gas B?
iii. Which gas has higher molecular mass?
Answer:
i. Volume of gas A diffused = 50 cm3
Time required for diffusion = 7 minutes = 7 × 60 seconds
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter 47
∴ The rate of diffusion of gas A is 0.12 cm3 s-1.
ii. The rate of diffusion of gas B is 0.083 cm3 s-1.
iii. Gas B has higher molecular mass.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which of the following is CORRECT for both gases and liquids?
(A) Indefinite volume
(B) Definite shape
(C) Indefinite shape
(D) Definite volume
Answer:
(D) Definite volume

2. The composition of …………. in air is about 78% by volume.
(A) CO2
(B) O2
(C) N2
(D) Ar
Answer:
(C) N2

3. Which of the following expression at constant pressure represents Charles’s law?
(A) V ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}}\)
(B) V ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}^{2}}\)
(C) V ∝ T
(D) V ∝ d
Answer:
(C) V ∝ T

4. The pressure of 2 mole of ideal gas at 546 K having volume 44.8 L is …………….
(A) 2 atm
(B) 3 atm
(C) 7 atm
(D) 1 atm 1023
Answer:
(A) 2 atm

5. At 300 K, the density of a certain gaseous molecule at 2 bar is double to that of dinitrogen at 4 bar. The molar mass of gaseous molecule is …………….
(A) 28 g mol-1
(B) 56 g mol-1
(C) 112 g mol-1
(D) 224 g mol-1
Answer:
(C) 112 g mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

6. As the temperature increases, average kinetic energy of molecules increases. What would be the effect of increase of temperature on pressure provided the volume is constant?
(A) Increases
(B) Decreases
(C) Remains same
(D) Becomes half
Answer:
(A) Increases

7. Assuming ideal gas behaviour, the ratio of density of ammonia to that of hydrogen chloride at same temperature and pressure is ………….. (Atomic wt. of Cl = 35.5 u)
(A) 1.46
(B) 0.46
(C) 1.64
(D) 0.64
Answer:
(B) 0.46

8. The number of moles of H2 in 0.224 L of hydrogen gas at STP (273 K, 1 atm) assuming ideal gas behaviour is …………..
(A) 1
(B) 0.1
(C) 0.01
(D) 0.001
Answer:
(C) 0.01

9. The volume occupied by 11.5 g of carbon dioxide at STP is approximately equal to:
(A) 5.9 L
(B) 22.5 L
(C) 86 L
(D) 259 L
Answer:
(A) 5.9 L

10. Which of the following is CORRECT regarding a fixed amount of ideal gas?
(A) Doubling the temperature, doubles the volume, provided the pressure remains the same.
(B) Doubling the temperature, halves the volume, provided the pressure remains the same.
(C) Doubling the pressure, doubles the volume, provided the temperature remains the same.
(D) Doubling the volume, doubles the pressure, provided the temperature remains the same.
Answer:
(A) Doubling the temperature, doubles the volume, provided the pressure remains the same.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 States of Matter

11. When one mole of an ideal gas is heated from 300 K to 360 K at constant pressure of 1 atm, its volume …………….
(A) increases from V to 6.0V
(B) increases from V to 3.6V
(C) increases from V to 1.2V
(D) increases from V to 1.6V
Answer:
(C) increases from V to 1.2V

12. The partial pressure of a gas is obtained by multiplying the total pressure of mixture by …………… of that gas.
(A) molar mass
(B) moles
(C) mass
(D) mole fraction
Answer:
(D) mole fraction

13. The highest temperature at which liquid CO2 can exist is ……………..
(A) 18.98 °C
(B) 38.98 °C
(C) 50.0 °C
(D) 73.9 °C
Answer:
(B) 38.98 °C

14. The SI unit of surface tension is ……………..
(A) Pascal
(B) N s m-2
(C) km-2 s
(D) N m-1
Answer:
(D) N m-1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 1.
Mention features of Mendeleev’s periodic table.
Answer:
Features of Mendeleev’s periodic table:

  • In Mendeleev’s periodic table, all 63 elements were arranged in an increasing order of their atomic masses. The serial or ordinal number of an element in the increasing order of atomic mass was referred to as its atomic number.
  • Mendeleev’s periodic table consisted of vertical groups and horizontal series (now called periods).
  • Elements belonging to the same group showed similar properties.
  • Properties of elements in a series/period showed gradual variation from left to right.

Question 2.
Why was Mendeleev’s periodic table readily accepted by scientific community?
Answer:
Mendeleev’s periodic table was readily accepted by scientific community due to the following advantages:
i. Mendeleev had left some gaps corresponding to certain atomic numbers in the periodic table so as to maintain periodicity of the properties. When the elements corresponding to these atomic numbers were discovered, they fitted well into the gaps with their properties as predicted by Mendeleev’s periodic law.

ii. Mendeleev did not predicted presence of inert gases, however, they were discovered in later years. It was possible to accommodate inert gases in Mendeleev’s periodic table by creating an additional group without disturbing the position of other elements in his periodic table.

Question 3.
Give reason: Mendeleev’s periodic law was modified into modern periodic law.
Answer:

  • Henry Moseley in 1913, studied X-ray spectra of large number of elements.
  • He observed that the frequency of X-ray emitted from an element is related to atomic number (Z) of an element and not its atomic mass.
  • Therefore, the atomic number, Z, was considered as more fundamental property of the atom than the atomic mass.
  • As a result, Mendeleev’s periodic law was modified.

Question 4.
Define atomic number.
Answer:
Atomic number (Z) is the total number protons present in the atom of an element.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 5.
State the modern periodic law.
Answer:
Modern periodic law: “The physical and chemical properties of elements are a periodic function of their atomic numbers”.

Question 6.
Periods and groups present in the modern periodic table are numbered based on whose recommendation ?
Answer:
Numbering of the periods and groups in the modem periodic table is based on the recommendation provided by the International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC).

Question 7.
Write a note on: Structure of the modern periodic table.
Answer:
Structure of the modern periodic table:
i. The modem periodic table also known as the Tong form of periodic table’ has number of boxes formed by the intersection of horizontal rows and vertical columns.
ii. The horizontal rows are called periods and the vertical columns are called groups.
iii. There are seven periods numbered from 1 to 7 and eighteen groups numbered from 1 to 18.
iv. There are total 118 boxes in the modem periodic table which are filled with 118 elements discovered till now including manmade elements.
v. The modem periodic table is divided into four blocks i.e., s-block, p-block, d-block and f-block.

  • Two groups on the extreme left of the modem periodic table form the s-block.
  • Six groups on the extreme right constitute the p-block.
  • Ten groups in the centre form the d-block
  • Two series at the bottom of the modem periodic table constitute the f-block. It contains fourteen elements in each series.

Question 8.
State the relationship between the modern periodic table and electronic configuration in periods.
Answer:

  • The modem periodic table is based on the atomic numbers of the elements. When elements are arranged in an increasing order of atomic number (Z), periodicity is observed in their electronic configurations which reflects in the characteristic structure of the modem periodic table.
  • The location of elements in the modem periodic table is correlated to quantum numbers of the last filled orbital.
  • Along a period, the atomic number increases by one and one electron is added to the outermost shell which forms neutral atom of the next element.
  • The period number is same as the principal quantum number ‘n’ of the valence shell of the elements.
  • A period begins with filling of a particular shell and ends when the valence shell attains complete octet configuration (or duplet, in case of the first period).
  • The next period begins with addition of electron to the next shell of higher energy compared to the previous period. e. g. First shell of the elements gets filled along the first period while second shell starts filling in the second period and addition of electrons continues till second shell (valence shell) attains stable electronic configuration.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 9.
Give reason: First period in the modern periodic table contains only two elements.
Answer:

  • Elements present in the first period i.e., H and He contain only one shell which is also their valence shell and can accommodate maximum two electrons.
  • As first shell can accommodate only two electrons, first period ends at He which has a complete duplet. Hence, first period in the modem periodic table contains only two elements.

Question 10.
Write names and electronic configurations of elements of first period in the modern periodic table. Identify which of them has the stable complete electronic configuration.
Answer:

  • Hydrogen (H) : 1s2, Helium (He) : 2s2
  • Since helium has a complete duplet i.e., two electrons in its valence shell, it has the stable complete electronic configuration.

Question 11.
Explain how does the filling of electrons takes place in the modern periodic table across:
i. Second period
ii. Third period
Answer:
i. Filling of electrons in the second period:

  • In the second period, electrons are filled in the second shell i.e., n = 2.
  • This shell can accommodate a maximum of eight electrons and gets filled as the atomic number increases along the second period.
  • The second period begins with Li (Z = 3): 1s2 2s1 and ends up with Ne (Z = 10): 1s2 2s2 2p6.
  • Neon has complete octet with 8 electrons in its valence shell. Therefore, the second period contains eight elements.

ii. Filling of electrons in the third period:

  • The third period corresponds to the filling of the third shell i.e. n = 3.
  • The third period also contains eight elements.
  • It begins with the filling of electrons in the first element Na (Z = 11) : [Ne] 3s1 and ends with the last element Ar (Z = 18) = [Ne] 3s2 3p6.
  • The condensed electronic configurations for the elements of third period is [Ne] 3s1-2 3p1-6.

Question 12.
There are 18 elements in the fourth period of the modern periodic table. Explain.
Answer:

  • The fourth period corresponds to the filling of fourth shell, n = 4.
  • Therefore, it begins with filling of 4s subshell. The first two elements of the fourth period are K (Z = 19) : [Ar] 4s1 and Ca (Z = 20) : [Ar] 4s2.
  • According to the aufbau principle, the next higher energy subshell is 3d, which can accommodate up to 10 electrons. Thus, filling of the 3d subshell results in the next 10 elements of the fourth period i.e., from Sc (Z = 21) : [Ar] 4s23d1 to Zn (Z = 30): [Ar] 4s23d10.
  • After filling of 3d subshell, the electrons enter the 4p subshell which can accommodate maximum 6 electrons. Hence, filling of 4p subshell results in the next 6 elements i.e., from Ga (Z = 31): [Ar] 4s23d10 4p1 to Kr (Z = 36): [Ar] 4s2 3d10 4p6.
  • Thus, the elements in fourth period are: 2 elements (with 4s subshell), 10 elements (with 3d subshell) and 6 elements (with 4p subshell).
  • Hence, there are 18 elements in the fourth period of the modem periodic table.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 13.
Why does the fifth period of the modern periodic table contain 18 electrons?
Answer:
The fifth period accommodates 18 elements as a result of successive filling of electrons in the 5s, 4d and 5p subshells.

Question 14.
What is the general trend followed while filling of electrons across a period in the modern periodic table.
Answer:

  • A period begins by filling of one electron to the ‘s’ subshell of a new shell and ends when an element corresponding to the same shell attains complete octet (or duplet).
  • Between these two ‘s’ and ‘p’ subshell of the valence shell, the inner subshells ‘d’ and ‘f’ are filled successively following the aufbau principle.

Question 15.
What is the subshell in which the last electron of the first element in the 6th period enters?
Answer:
The 6th period begins by filling the last electron in the shell with n = 6. The lowest energy subshell of any shell is ‘s’. Therefore, the last electron of the first element in the 6th period enters the subshell ‘6s’.

Question 16.
How many elements are present in the 6th period? Explain.
Answer:

  • The 6th period begins by filling the last electron in the subshell ‘6s’ and ends by completing the subshell ‘6p’. Therefore, the sixth period has the subshells filled in increasing order of energy as 6s < 4f < 5d < 6p.
  • The electron capacities of these subshells are 2, 14, 10 and 6, respectively. Therefore, the total number of elements in the 6th period is 2 + 14 + 10 + 6 = 32.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 17.
How does electronic configuration vary down a group in the modern periodic table?
Answer:

  • As we move from top to bottom in a group, a new shell gets added successively in the atom of an element. Therefore, the last electron enters in a new shell down the group.
  • Hence, the general outer electronic configuration of the elements in a group remains the same. This holds true for groups 1, 2 and 3 elements.
  • In the groups 13 to 18 the appropriate inner ‘d’ and ‘f’ subshells are completely filled and the general outer electronic configuration is the same down the groups 13 to 18.
  • However, in the groups 4 to 12, the ‘d’ and ‘f subshells are introduced at a later stage (4th period for ‘d’ and 6th period for ‘f’) down the group. As a result, variation in the general outer configuration is introduced only at the

Note: General outer electronic configuration in groups 1 to 3 and 13 to 18.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 1

Question 18.
On what basis is the modern periodic table divided into four blocks?
Answer:
The modem periodic table is divided into four blocks based on the subshell in which the last electron enters.

Question 19.
Why elements of group 1 and group 2 are known as s-block elements?
Answer:

  • The subshell in which the last electron enters decides the block to which an element belongs.
  • In group 1 and group 2 elements, the last electron is filled in the s subshell.

Therefore, the elements of group 1 and group 2 are known as s-block elements.

Question 20.
Elements belonging to which groups constitute the p-block and why?
Answer:

  • Elements belonging to groups 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 constitute the p-block.
  • The last electron in the p-block elements is filled in p subshell.
  • As p subshell contains three degenerate p orbitals, it can accommodate up to 6 electrons.
  • Therefore, the p-block elements belonging to six groups i.e., groups 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 in which last electron enters in p subshell constitute the p-block.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 21.
Give reason: Helium which is the first element of group 18 is placed in the p-block even though its last electron enters in s subshell.
Answer:

  • Electronic configuration of helium is 1s2 which indicates that it has a stable electronic configuration i.e., a complete duplet.
  • The p-block ends with group 18 which is a family of inert gases having stable electronic configuration (complete octet except helium).
  • Therefore, helium is placed with group 18 elements in p-block due to its stable electronic configuration even though its last electron enters in s subshell.

Question 22.
State the general outer electronic configuration of s-block and p-block elements.
Answer:
The general outer electronic configuration of s-block elements is ns1-2.
The general electronic configuration for the p-block elements is ns2np1-6.

Question 23.
There are total 10 groups in the d-block of the modern periodic table. Explain.
Answer:

  • The d-block in the modem periodic table is formed as a result of filling the last electron in d orbital.
  • As there are five orbitals in a d subshell, 10 electrons can successively be accommodated.

Hence, there are total 10 groups in the d-block of the modem periodic table i.e., group 3 to 12.

Question 24.
The last electron enters a (n-1)d orbital only after the ns subshell is completely filled. Explain.
Answer:
A d subshell is present in the shells with n ≥ 3 and according to the (n+1) rule, the energy of ns orbital is less than that of the (n-1)d orbital. As a result, the last electron enters a (n-1)d orbital only after the ns subshell is completely filled.

Question 25.
Chromium exhibit 4s1 3d5 electronic configuration instead of 4s2 3d4. Explain.
Answer:

  • Completely filled or half-filled subshells are highly stable.
  • In 4s1 3d5 configuration, both s and d subshells are half-filled.
  • Thus, due to the extra stability associated with half-filled subshells, chromium exhibits 4s1 3d5 electronic configuration instead of 4s2 3d4.

Question 26.
What is the general outer electronic configuration of d-block and f-block elements?
Answer:
The general outer electronic configuration of the d-block elements is ns0-2 (n-1)d1-10 while the general outer electronic configuration of the f-block elements is ns2 (n-1)d0-1 (n-2)f1-14.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 27.
Expected outer electronic configuration of europium (Eu) is 6s2 4f6 5d1. However, it exhibits different than expected outer electronic configuration.
i. Write the observed outer electronic configuration of Eu.
ii. What is the reason for this variation in electronic configuration?
Answer:
i. Observed outer electronic configuration of europium (Eu) is 6s2 4f7 5d0.
ii. In the observed electronic configuration of Eu, 4f subshell is half-filled which is a highly stable configuration. Therefore, observed electronic configuration of Eu varies than expected.

Question 28.
Name the two series that constitute f-block.
Answer:
The f-block constitutes two series of 14 elements called the lanthanide and the actinide series which are placed one below the other.

Question 29.
State whether the following statements are true or false. Correct if false.
i. Position of the elements in the modern periodic table is related to the quantum number of their last filled orbital.
ii. Group number is same as the principal quantum number ‘n’ of the valence shell of the elements.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False
Period number is same as the principal quantum number ‘n’ of the valence shell of the elements.

Question 30.
Name the following.
i. Shortest period in the modern periodic table.
ii. Block which is placed separately at the bottom of the modern periodic table.
Answer:
i. First period
ii. f-Block

Question 31.
How can a period, group and block of the element be determined?
Answer:
The group, period and the block of the element can be determined on the basis of its electronic configuration.
i. Period: The principal quantum number of the valence shell corresponds to the period of the element.
e. g. The principal quantum number (n) of the valence shell (3s1) of Na (1s2 2s2 2p6 3s1) is 3. This corresponds to third period.

ii. Block: The subshell in which the last electron enters, corresponds to the block of the elements (with exception being He).
e. g. The subshell 3d (in which the last electron enters) for Sc (1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d1 4s2) corresponds to d block.

iii. Group: The group of the element is determined on the basis of number of electrons present in the outermost or penultimate [next to outermost, i.e. (n-1)] shell:

  • For s-block elements, group number = number of valence electrons.
  • For p-block elements, group number = 18 – number of electrons required to complete octet.
  • For d-block elements, group number = 2 + number of (n-1)d electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 32.
Outer electronic configurations of a few elements are given below. Explain them and identify the period, group and block in the periodic table to which they belong.
2He: 1s2, 54Xe: 5s25p6, 16S: 3s23p4, 79Au: 6s15d10
Answer:
i. 2He: 1s2
Here, n = 1. Therefore, 2He belongs to the 1st period.
The shell n = 1 has only one subshell, namely 1s. The outer electronic configuration 1s2 of ‘He’ corresponds to the maximum capacity of 1s, the complete duplet. Therefore, He is placed at the end of the 1st period in the group 18 of inert gases. So, ‘He’ belongs to p-block.

ii. 54Xe: 5s25p6
Here, n = 5. Therefore, 54Xe belongs to the 5th period.
The outer electronic configuration. 5s25p6 corresponds to complete octet. Therefore, 54Xe is placed in group 18 and belongs to p-block.

iii. 16S: 3s23p4
Here, n = 3. Therefore, 16S belongs to the 3rd period. The 3p subshell in ‘S’ is partially filled and short of completion of octet by two electrons. Therefore, ‘S’ belongs to (18 – 2) = 16th group and p-block.

iv. 79AU: 6s15d10
Here n = 6. Therefore, ‘Au’ belongs to the 6th period.
The sixth period begins with filling of electron into 6s and then into 5d orbital.
The outer configuration of ‘Au’: 6s1 5d10 implies that (1 + 10) = 11 electrons are filled in the outer orbitals to give ‘Au’. Therefore ‘Au’ belongs to the group 11.
As the last electron has entered ‘d’ orbital ‘Au’ belongs to the d-block.

Question 33.
Predict the block, periods and groups to which the following elements belong.
i. Mg (Z = 12)
ii. V (Z = 23)
iii. Sb (Z = 51)
iv. Rn (Z = 86)
v. Na (Z = 11)
vi. Cl (Z = 17)
Answer:
i. Mg (Z = 12): Atomic number of Mg is 12. Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2.
Block: Since the last electron enters s subshell (3 s), Mg belongs to s-block.
Period: n = 3. Therefore, it is present in the third period.
Group: For s-block element, group number = number of valence electrons = 2. Hence, it belongs to group 2.

ii. V (Z = 23): Atomic number of V is 23. Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d3 4s2.
Block: Since the last electron enters d subshell (3d), V belongs to d-block.
Period: n = 4. Therefore, it is present in the fourth period.
Group: For d-block elements, group number = 2 + number of (n – 1)
d electrons = 2 + 3 = 5. Hence, it belongs to group 5.

iii. Sb (Z = 51): Atomic number of Sb is 51.
Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2 4p6 4d10 5s2 5p3.
Block: Since the last electron enters p subshell (5p), Sb belongs to p-block.
Period: n = 5. Therefore, it is present in the fifth period.
Group: For p block elements, group number = 18 – number of electrons required to complete octet
= 18 – 3 = 15. Hence it belongs to group 15.

iv. Rn (Z = 86): Atomic number of Rn is 86.
Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2 3d10 4p6 4d10 4f14 5s2 5p6 5d10 6s2 6p6.
Block: Since the last electron enters p subshell (6p), Rn belongs to p-block.
Period: n = 6. Therefore, it is present in the sixth period.
Group: For p block elements, group number = 18 – number of electrons required to complete octet
= 18 – 0 = 18. Hence, it belongs to group 18.

v. Na (Z = 11): Atomic number of Na is 11. Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s1.
Block: Since the last electron enters s subshell (3s), Na belongs to s-block.
Period: n = 3. Therefore, it is present in the third period.
Group: For s-block element, number of the group = number of valence electrons = 1. Hence, it belongs to group 1.

vi. Cl (Z = 17): Atomic number of Cl is 17. Electronic configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p5.
Block: Since the last electron enters p subshell (3p), Cl belongs to p-block.
Period: n = 3. Therefore, it is present in the third period.
Group: For p block elements, group number = 18 – number of electrons required to complete octet
= 18 – 1 = 17. Hence, it belongs to group 17.

Question 34.
State the characteristics of s-block elements.
Answer:

  • The s-block contains the elements of group 1 (alkali metals) and group 2 (alkaline earth metals).
  • They occur in nature only in combined state as they are reactive elements.
  • Except Li and Be, compounds formed by all other s-block elements are predominantly ionic in nature.
  • This is because they have only one or two valence electrons which they can lose readily forming M+ or M2+ ions.
  • Since they can lose electrons easily, they have low ionization enthalpies, which decreases down the group resulting in increased reactivity.

Question 35.
What are main group elements?
Answer:
The p-block elements together with s-block elements are called main group elements or representative elements.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 36.
Give reason: Group 18 elements do not participate in chemical reactions readily.
Answer:

  • Group 18 is the last group of p-block and include noble or inert gases.
  • They have closed valence shells (complete duplet in the case of ‘He’ and complete octet in the case of the other noble gases).
  • Therefore, they show very low chemical reactivity and thus, do not participate in chemical reactions readily.

Question 37.
Why nonmetals present in group 17 and 16 in the modern periodic table are highly reactive?
Answer:

  • Nonmetals present in group 17 (halogen family) and group 16 (chalcogens) have highly negative electron gain enthalpies.
  • As a result, they readily accept one or two electrons and form anions (X or X2-) that have complete octet.
  • Therefore, nonmetals present in group 17 and 16 are highly reactive.

Question 38.
Explain the composition of the p-block in the modern periodic table.
Answer:

  • The p-block contains elements of groups 13 to 18.
  • It contains all the three types of elements i.e., metals, nonmetals and metalloids.
  • In the p-block, metals and nonmetals are separated from each other by a zig-zag line. The metals are present on the left and the nonmetals are present on the right side while the metalloids are present along the zig-zag line.

Question 39.
State whether the following statements are true or false. Correct if false.
i. Nonmetallic character increases from left to right across a period.
ii. Nonmetallic character increases down a group.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False
Nonmetallic character decreases down a group.

Question 40.
Differentiate between s-block and p-block elements.
Answer:
s-Block elements:

  • s-Block contains group 1 and group 2 elements.
  • It contains only metals.
  • The last electron in the s-block elements enters in s orbital.
  • General outer electronic configuration of s-block elements is ns1-2.
  • e.g. Na, K, Ca, Mg, etc.

p-Block elements:

  • p-Block contains elements from groups 13 to 18.
  • It contains metals, nonmetals as well as metalloids.
  • The last electron in the p-block elements enters in p orbital.
  • General outer electronic configuration of p-block elements is ns2 np1-6.
  • e.g. C, N, O, F, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 41.
Write a note on the characteristics of the d-block elements.
Answer:

  • The d-block contains elements of the groups 3 to 12 which are all metals. They are also known as transition elements or transition metals.
  • They form a bridge between chemically reactive s-block elements and less reactive elements of groups 13 and 14.
  • Most of the d-block elements possess partially filled inner d orbitals. As a result, the d-block elements have properties such as variable oxidation state, paramagnetism, ability to form coloured ions. They can be used as catalysts.
  • Zn, Cd, and Hg with configuration ns2 (n-1)d10, (completely filled s and d subshells) do not show characteristic properties of transition metals as they are stable.

Question 42.
Explain in brief about the f-block elements.
Answer:

  • The elements present in f-block are all metals and are placed in the two rows called lanthanide series (58Ce to 71Lu) and actinide series (90Th to 103Lr).
  • The lanthanides are also known as rare earth elements while the actinide elements beyond 92U are called transuranium elements.
  • All the transuranium elements are manmade and radioactive.
  • The last electron of the elements of these series is filled in the (n-2)f subshell, and therefore, these are called inner transition elements.
  • These elements have very similar properties within each series.

Question 43.
What is lanthanide and actinide series?
Answer:
i. Lanthanide series: The fourteen elements after lanthanum (Z = 57) i.e., from cerium (Z = 58) to lutetium (Z = 71) are named after their preceding member (57La) present in the third group and 6th period and are called lanthanides. They are kept in separate series called lanthanide series at the bottom of the modem periodic table.

ii. Actinide series: The fourteen elements after actinium i.e., from thorium (Z = 90) to lawrencium (Z = 103) are named after 89Ac present in third period and 7th group. They are kept in separate series called actinide series at the bottom of the modem periodic table.

Question 44.
Differentiate between d-block and f-block elements.
Answer:
d-Block elements:

  • d-Block contains elements from group 3 to group 12.
  • It is present in the middle of the modern periodic table.
  • They are also known as transition elements.
  • The last electron in the d-block elements enters in d orbital.
  • General outer electronic configuration of d-block elements is ns0-2 (n-1)d1-10 .
  • e.g. Cu, Zn, Cr, Ti, V, etc.

f-Block elements:

  • f-Block contains elements of lanthanide and actinide series.
  • f-block elements are present below the modern periodic table as two separate rows.
  • They are also known as inner transition elements.
  • The last electron in the f-block elements enters in f orbital.
  • General outer electronic configuration of f-block elements is ns2 (n-1) d0-1 (n-2) f114.
  • e.g. Ce, Pr, Nd Th, U, Np, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 45.
Chlorides of two metals are common laboratory chemicals and both are colourless. One of the metals reacts vigorously with water while the other reacts slowly. Place the two metals in the appropriate block in the periodic table. Justify your answer.
Answer:
i. Metals are present in all the four blocks of the periodic table.
ii. Salts of metals in the f-block and p-block (except AlCl3) are not common laboratory chemicals. Therefore, the choice is between s- and d-block.
iii. From the given properties their placement is done as shown below:

  • s-block: Metal that reacts vigorously with water.
  • d-block: Metal that reacts slowly with water.

iv. The colourless nature of the less reactive metal in the d-block implies that the inner d subshell is completely filled.

Question 46.
What are periodic properties?
Answer:

  • The elements in the modem periodic table (long form of periodic table) are arranged in such a way that on moving across a period or down the group, several properties of elements vary in regular fashion. These properties are called periodic properties.
  • Atomic and ionic radii, ionization enthalpy, electron gain enthalpy, electronegativity, valency and oxidation states are several properties of elements that show periodic variations.

Question 47.
What leads to the phenomena called effective nuclear charge and screening effect in an atom?
Answer:

  • The periodic trends are explained in the terms of two fundamental factors, namely, attraction of extranuclear electrons towards the nucleus and repulsion between electrons belonging to the same atom.
  • These attractive and repulsive forces operate simultaneously in an atom.
  • This results in two interrelated phenomena called effective nuclear charge and screening effect in an atom.

Question 48.
Explain the concept of effective nuclear charge in detail.
Answer:
i. In a multi-electron atom, the positively charged nucleus attracts the negatively charged electrons around it, and there is mutual repulsion between the negatively charged extranuclear electrons.
ii. The repulsion by inner shell electrons results in pushing the outer shell electrons further away from the nucleus. Thus, the outer shell electrons are held less tightly by the nucleus.
iii. As a result, the attraction of the nucleus for an outer electron is partially cancelled and hence, an outer shell electron does not experience the actual positive charge present on the nucleus. This effect of the inner electrons on the outer electrons is called screening effect or shielding effect.
iv. The net nuclear charge actually experienced by an electron is called the effective nuclear charge (Zeff).
The effective nuclear charge is lower than the actual nuclear charge (Z).
v. Effective nuclear charge (Zeff) = Z – electron shielding
= Z – σ
Here σ (sigma) is called shielding constant or screening constant and the value of σ depends upon type of the orbital that the electron occupies.

Question 49.
Define:
i. Effective nuclear charge (Zeff)
ii. Screening effect (or shielding effect)
Answer:
i. Effective nuclear charge (Zeff): In multi-electron atom, the net nuclear charge actually experienced by an electron is called the effective nuclear charge (Zeff).
ii. Screening effect (or shielding effect): In multi-electron atom, the effect of the inner electrons on the outer electrons is called screening effect or shielding effect of the inner/core electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 50.
Explain the variations in effective nuclear charge
i. Across a period
ii. Down a group
Answer:
i. Across a period:

  • As we move across a period, atomic number increases by one and thus, actual nuclear charge (Z) increases by +1 at a time.
  • However, the valence shell remains the same and the newly added electron gets accommodated in the same shell. There is no addition of electrons to the core i.e., inner shells. Thus, shielding due to core electrons remains the same even though the actual nuclear charge increases.
  • As a result, the effective nuclear charge (Zeff) goes on increasing across a period.

ii. Down a group:

  • As we move down a group, a new larger valence shell is added. As a result, there is an additional shell in the core.
  • The shielding effect of the increased number of core electrons outweighs the effect of the increased nuclear charge. Thus, the effective nuclear charge experienced by the outer electrons decreases largely down a group.
  • Hence, the effective nuclear charge (Zeff) decreases down a group.

Question 51.
Define atomic radius.
Answer:
Atomic radius is one half of the internuclear distance between two adjacent atoms of a metal or two single bonded atoms of a nonmetal.

Question 52.
What is meant by covalent radius of the atom? Explain with suitable examples.
Answer:

  • In the case of nonmetals (except noble gases), the atoms of an element are bonded to each other by covalent bonds.
  • Bond length of a single bond is taken as sum of radii of the two single bonded atoms. This is called covalent radius of the atom.
  • For example: Bond length of C-C bond in diamond is 154 pm. Therefore, atomic radius of carbon is estimated to be 77 pm which is half of bond length (\(\frac {1}{2}\) × 154 = 77).

Question 53.
How is atomic radius of a nonmetallic element estimated?
Answer:

  • The atomic size of a nonmetallic element is estimated from the distance between the two atoms bound together by a single covalent bond. From this, the covalent radius of the element is estimated.
  • The internuclear distance in a diatomic molecule of an element is its covalent bond length. Half the covalent bond length gives the covalent radius.
  • Bond length of Cl-Cl bond in Cl2 is measured as 198 pm. Therefore, the atomic radius of Cl is estimated to be 99 pm.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 2

Question 54.
Define metallic radius.
Answer:
One half of the distance between the centres of nucleus of the two adjacent atoms of a metallic crystal is called as a metallic radius.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 55.
How is metallic radius determined in the case of metals? Give suitable example.
Answer:

  • In the case of metals, distance between the adjacent atoms in metallic sample is measured. One half of this distance is taken as the metallic radius.
  • For example: In beryllium, distance between the adjacent Be atoms is measured. One half of this distance is taken as the metallic radius of a Be atom.
  • Distance between two adjacent Be atoms is 224 pm. Therefore, metallic radius of a Be atom is 112 pm.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 3

Note: Atomic radii of some elements are given in the table below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 4

Question 56.
How is a cation and an anion formed?
Answer:
A cation (or positively charged ion) is formed by the removal of one or more electrons from the atom of an element whereas an anion (or negatively charged ion) is formed when the atom of an element gains one or more electrons.

Question 57.
Give reasons: Radius of a cation is smaller and that of an anion is larger as compared to that of their parent atoms.
Answer:

  • A cation is formed by the loss of one or more electrons, therefore, it contains fewer electrons that the parent atom but has the same nuclear charge.
  • As a result, the shielding effect is less and effective nuclear charge is larger within a cation. Thus, radius of a cation is smaller than the parent atom.
  • However, an anion is formed by the gain of one or more electrons and therefore, it contains a greater number of electrons than the parent atom.
  • Due to these additional electrons, anion experiences increased electronic repulsion and decreased effective nuclear charge. As a result, an anion has larger radius than its parent atom.

Hence, radius of a cation is smaller and that of an anion are larger as compared to that of their parent atoms.

Question 58.
Define: Isoelectronic species
Answer:
The atoms or ions which have the same number of electrons are called isoelectronic species.

Question 59.
Explain with example why the radii of isoelectronic species vary.
Answer:
i. The radii of isoelectronic species vary according to actual nuclear charge. Larger nuclear charge exerts greater attraction on the electrons and thus, the radius of that isoelectronic species becomes smaller.
ii. For example, F and Na+ both have 10 electrons but the nuclear charge on F is +9 which is smaller than that of Na+ which has the nuclear charge +11.
Hence, F has larger ionic radii (133 pm) than Na+ (98 pm).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 60.
What is the trend observed in the ionic size of the following isoelectronic species? Explain.
i. Na+, Mg2+, Al3+ and Si4+
ii. O2-, F, Na+ and Mg2+
Answer:
i. Na+, Mg2+, Al3+ and Si4+
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 5
a. Among the given ions, the nuclear charge varies but the number of electrons remains the same and therefore, these are isoelectronic species.
b. The radii of isoelectronic species vary according to actual nuclear charge. Larger nuclear charge exerts greater attraction on the electrons and thus, the radius of that isoelectronic species becomes smaller.
c. The nuclear charge increases in the order Na+ < Mg2+ < Al3+ < Si4+ and thus, the ionic size decreases in the order Na+ > Mg2+ > Al3+ > Si4+.

ii. O2-, F, Na+ and Mg2+
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 6
a. Among the given ions, the nuclear charge varies but the number of electrons remains the same and therefore, these are isoelectronic species.
b. The radii of isoelectronic species vary according to actual nuclear charge. Larger nuclear charge exerts greater attraction on the electrons and thus, the radius of that isoelectronic species becomes smaller.
c. The nuclear charge increases in the order O2- < F < Na+ < Mg2+ and thus, the ionic size decreases in the order O2- > F > Na+ > Mg2+.

Question 61.
Identify the species having larger radius from the following pairs:
i. Na and Na+
ii. Na+ and Mg2+
Answer:
i. The nuclear charge is the same in Na and Na+. But Na+ has a smaller number of electrons and a smaller number of occupied shells (two shells in Na+, while three shells in Na). Therefore, radius of Na is larger.
ii. Na+ and Mg2+ are isoelectronic species. Mg2+ has a larger nuclear charge than that of Na+. Therefore, Na+ has larger radius.

Question 62.
Which of the following species will have the largest and the smallest size? Why?
Mg, Mg2+, Al, Al3+
Answer:

  • Atomic radius decreases across the period. Hence, the atomic radius of Mg is larger than that of Al.
  • Parent atoms have larger radius than their corresponding cations. Hence, the radius of Mg is larger than that of Mg2+ and the radius of Al is larger than that of Al3+.
  • Mg2+ and Al3+ are isoelectronic. Among isoelectronic species, the one with larger nuclear charge will have smaller radius. Al3+ (Z = 13) has a larger nuclear charge than that of Mg2+ (Z = 12). Hence, the ionic radius of Al3+ is smaller than Mg2+.
  • Therefore, the decreasing order of radius is Mg > Al > Mg2+ > Al3+.

Hence, species with the largest size is Mg and with the smallest size is Al3+.

Question 63.
Identify the element with more negative value of electron gain enthalpy from the following pairs. Justify.
i. Cl and Br
ii. F and O
Answer:
i. Cl and Br belong to the same group of halogens with Br having higher atomic number than CL As the atomic number increases down the group, the effective nuclear charge decreases. The increased shielding effect of core electrons can be noticed. The electron has to be added to a farther shell, which releases less energy and thus, electron gain enthalpy becomes less negative down the group. Therefore, Cl has more negative electron gain enthalpy than Br.

ii. F and O belong to the same second period with F having higher atomic number than O. As the atomic number increases across a period, atomic radius decreases, effective nuclear charge increases and electron can be added more easily. Therefore, more energy is released with gain of an electron as we move towards right in a period. Therefore, F has more negative electron gain enthalpy than O.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 64.
Explain the importance of electronegativity.
Answer:

  • When two atoms of different elements form a covalent bond, the electron pair is shared unequally.
  • Electronegativity represents attractive force exerted by the nucleus on shared electrons. Electron sharing between covalently bonded atoms takes place using the valence electron.
  • It depends upon the effective nuclear charge experienced by electron involved in formation of the covalent bond.
  • Electronegativity predicts the nature of the bond, or, how strong is the force of attraction that holds two atoms together.

Question 65.
Explain the trend in electronegativity
i. across a period
ii. down a group
Answer:
i. Across a period:
a. As we move across a period from left to right in the periodic table, the effective nuclear charge increases steadily.
b. Hence, due to the increase in effective nuclear charge, the tendency to attract shared electron pair in a covalent bond increases i.e., electronegativity increases from left to right across a period.
e. g. Li < Be < B < C < N < O <F.

ii. Down a group:
a. As we move down the group from top to bottom in the periodic table, the size of the valence shell goes on increasing.
b. However, the effective nuclear charge decreases as the shielding effect of the core electrons increases due to the increase in the size of the atoms.
c. Thus, the tendency to attract shared electron pair in a covalent bond decreases, decreasing the electronegativity down the group.
e.g. F > Cl > Br > I > At.

Question 66.
Explain the terms:
i. Valency of an element
ii. Oxidation state (or oxidation number)
iii. Chemical reactivity
Answer:
i. Valency of an element:

  • Valency of an element indicates the number of chemical bonds that the atom can form giving a molecule.
  • The most fundamental chemical property of an element is its combining power. This property is numerically expressed in terms of valency or valence.
  • Valence does not have any sign associated with it.
  • Valency of the main group elements is usually equal to the number of valence electrons (outer electrons) and/or equal to difference between 8 and the number of valence electrons.

ii. Oxidation state (or oxidation number):

  • The oxidation state or oxidation number is a frequently used term related to valence.
  • Oxidation number has a sign, + or – which is decided by the electronegativities of atoms that are bonded.

iii. Chemical reactivity:

  • Chemical reactivity is related to the ease with which an element loses or gains the electrons.
  • Chemical properties of elements depend on their electronic configuration.

Question 67.
What is the trend observed in the valency of main group elements?
Answer:
i. Valency of the main group elements is usually equal to the number of valence electrons (outer electrons) or it is equal to the difference between 8 and the number of valence electrons.
i.e., (8 – number of valence electrons).
ii. The valency remains the same down the group and shows a gradual variation across the period as atomic number increases from left to right.

Note: Periodic trends in valency of main group elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 7

Question 68.
Give any two distinguishing points between metals and nonmetals.
Answer:
Metals:

  1. Generally, metals exhibit good electrical conductivity.
  2. They can form compounds by loss of valence electrons.

Nonmetals:

  1. Generally, nonmetals exhibit poor electrical conductivity.
  2. Nonmetals can form compounds by gain of valence electrons in valence shell.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 69.
Explain the variation of the following property of elements down a group and across a period.
i. Metallic character
ii. Nonmetallic character
Answer:
The variation observed in the metallic and nonmetallic character of elements can be explained in the terms of ionization enthalpy and electron gain enthalpy.
i. Metallic character:

  • The ionization enthalpy decreases down the group. Thus, the tendency to lose valence electrons increases down the group and the metallic character increases down a group.
  • However, the ionization enthalpy increases across the period and as a result metallic character decreases across a period.

ii. Nonmetallic character:

  • Electron gain enthalpy becomes less negative as we move down the group and hence, nonmetallic character decreases down the group.
  • However, electron gain enthalpy becomes more and more negative across the period and thus, nonmetallic character increases across the period.

Question 70.
Justify the position of most reactive and least reactive elements in the modern periodic table.
Answer:

  • Chemical reactivity of elements depends on the ease with which it attains electronic configuration of the nearest inert gas by gaining or losing electrons.
  • The elements preceding an inert gas react by gaining electrons in the outermost shell, whereas the elements which follow an inert gas in the periodic table react by loss of valence electrons. Thus, the chemical reactivity is decided by the electron gain enthalpy and ionization enthalpy values, which in turn, are decided by effective nuclear charge and finally by the atomic size.
  • The ionization enthalpy is the smallest for the element on the extreme left in a period, whereas the electron gain enthalpy is the most negative for the second last element on the extreme right, (preceding to the inert gas which is the last element of a period).
  • Thus, the most reactive elements lie on the extreme left and the extreme right (excluding inert gases) of the periodic table.

Question 71.
How can we predict chemical reactivity of elements based on their oxide formation reactions and the nature of oxides formed?
Answer:

  • The chemical reactivity can be illustrated by comparing the reaction of elements with oxygen to form oxides and the nature of the oxides.
  • Alkali metals present on the extreme left of the modem periodic table are highly reactive and thus, they react vigorously with oxygen to form oxides such as Na2O which reacts with water to form strong bases like NaOH.
  • The reactive elements on the right i.e., halogens react with oxygen to form oxides such as Cl2O7 which on reaction with water form strong acids like HClO4.
  • The oxides of the elements in the centre of the main group elements are either amphoteric (Al2O3) neutral (CO, NO) or weakly acidic (CO2).

Question 72.
Write the chemical equations for reaction, if any, of (i) Na2O and (ii) Al2O3 with HCl and NaOH both. Correlate this with the position of Na and Al in the periodic table, and infer whether the oxides are basic, acidic or amphoteric.
Answer:
i. Na2O + 2HCl → 2NaCl + H2O
Na2O + NaOH → No reaction
As Na2O reacts with an acid to form salt and water it is a basic oxide. This is because Na is a reactive metal lying on the extreme left of the periodic table.

ii. Al2O3 + 6HCl → 2AlCl3 + 3H2O
Al2O3 + 2NaOH → 2NaAlO2 + H2O
As Al2O3 reacts with an acid as well as base to form a salt and water. It is an amphoteric oxide. Al is a moderately reactive element lying in the centre of main group elements in the periodic table.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

Question 73.
Comment on the chemical reactivity of d-block and f-block elements.
Answer:

  • d-block (transition) elements and f-block (inner transition) elements exhibit very small change in atomic radii.
  • Therefore, the transition and inner transition elements belonging to the individual series have similar chemical properties.
  • Their ionization enthalpies are intermediate between those of s-block and p-block elements. Thus, d-block and f-block elements generally show moderate reactivity.

Question 74.
Ge, S and Br belong to the groups 14, 16 and 17, respectively. Predict the empirical formulae of the compounds those can be formed by (i) Ge and S, (ii) Ge and Br.
Answer:
From the group number we understand that the general outer electronic configuration and number of valence electrons and valencies of the three elements are:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 8
i. S is more electronegative than Ge. Therefore, the empirical formula of the compound formed by these two elements is predicted by the method of cross multiplication of the valencies:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 9

ii. Br is more electronegative than Ge. The empirical formula of the compound formed by these two elements is predicted by the method of cross multiplication of valencies:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table 10
[Note: More electronegative element is written on right hand side in cross multiplication method.]

Question 75.
The first ionization enthalpies of 5 elements of second period are given below:

Element 1st IE values (kJ mol-1)
I 520
II 1681
III 1086
IV 2080
V 899

Based on the above data, answer the following questions:
i. Identify the element having highest atomic number.
ii. If element I is lithium, how will you explain its low value of first ionization enthalpy?
iii. Explain why ionization enthalpies are always positive.
Answer:
i. Element IV. The first ionization enthalpy increases with increase in atomic number along a period. Hence, the element IV having highest IE will have highest atomic number among the given elements.
ii. Alkali metals have only one electron in their valence shell which can be easily lost resulting in the stable noble gas configuration. Therefore, lithium shows low value of first ionization enthalpy.
iii. Energy is always required to remove electrons from an atom. Hence, ionization enthalpies have positive value.

Question 76.
From the elements Mg, Ar, Cl, Sr, P and S, choose one that fits each of the below given descriptions:
i. An element having two valence electrons.
ii. An element having properties similar to that of O.
iii. A noble gas.
iv. An alkaline earth metal,
v. An element having electronic configuration 1s22s22p63s23p3.
Answer:
i. Magnesium (Mg)
ii. Sulphur (S)
iii. Argon (Ar)
iv. Strontium (Sr)
v. Phosphorus (P)

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Mendeleev’s periodic table had …………… elements.
(A) 75
(B) 83
(C) 63
(D) 118
Answer:
(C) 63

2. The serial or ordinal number of an element in Mendeleev’s periodic table was recognized as ………….
(A) neutron number
(B) valency
(C) principal quantum number
(D) proton number
Answer:
(D) proton number

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

3. Mendeleev predicted the existence of …………..
(A) aluminium
(B) silicon
(C) tellurium
(D) germanium
Answer:
(D) germanium

4. According to Mendeleev’s periodic law, the physical and chemical properties of elements are the periodic function of their …………..
(A) atomic weights
(B) atomic numbers
(C) molecular formulas
(D) molecular weights
Answer:
(A) atomic weights

5. Moseley showed that the fundamental property of an element is ……………
(A) atomic number
(B) atomic mass
(C) both A and B
(D) none of these
Answer:
(A) atomic number

6. According to periodic law of elements, the variation in properties of elements is related to their ……………
(A) densities
(B) atomic masses
(C) atomic sizes
(D) atomic numbers
Answer:
(D) atomic numbers

7. At present, how many elements are known?
(A) 118
(B) 110
(C) 114
(D) 120
Answer:
(A) 118

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

8. The long form of the periodic table consists of how many periods?
(A) 5
(B) 8
(C) 10
(D) 7
Answer:
(D) 7

9. According to quantum mechanical model of the atom, the properties of elements can be correlated to their …………….
(A) atomic number
(B) atomic mass
(C) valency
(D) electronic configuration
Answer:
(D) electronic configuration

10. The fourth, fifth and sixth periods are long periods and contain ……………
(A) 18, 18 and 36
(B) 18, 28 and 32
(C) 18, 15 and 31
(D) 18, 18 and 32
Answer:
(D) 18, 18 and 32

11. f-block elements are also known as ……………
(A) transition elements
(B) inert gas elements
(C) normal elements
(D) inner transition elements
Answer:
(D) inner transition elements

12. Which of the following forms a bridge between reactive s-block elements and less reactive group 13 and 14 elements?
(A) Inert gases
(B) Transition metals
(C) Halogens
(D) Inner transition metals
Answer:
(B) Transition metals

13. ………… elements are known as chalcogens.
(A) Group 17
(B) Group 18
(C) Group 16
(D) Group 1
Answer:
(C) Group 16

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

14. The name ‘rare earth elements’ is used for …………..
(A) lanthanides only
(B) actinides only
(C) both lanthanides and actinides
(D) alkaline earth metals
Answer:
(C) both lanthanides and actinides

15. Atomic number of V is 23 and its electronic configuration is …………….
(A) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3p6 3d3 4s2
(B) 1s2 2s2 2d3 3p6 2p6 4s2
(C) 2s2 1s2 2p6 3s2 3d3 4s2
(D) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d3 4s2
Answer:
(D) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d3 4s2

16. Aluminium belongs to …………. elements.
(A) s-block
(B) p-block
(C) d-block
(D) f-block
Answer:
(B) p-block

17. In P3-, S2- and Cl ions, the increasing order of size is ………….
(A) Cl < S2- < P3-
(B) P3- < S2- < Cl
(C) S2- < Cl < P3-
(D) S2- < P3- < Cl
Answer:
(A) Cl- < S2- < P3-

18. The CORRECT order of radii is ……………
(A) N < Be < B
(B) F< O2- <N3-
(C) Na < Li < K
(D) Fe3+ < Fe2+ < Fe4+
Answer:
(B) F < O2- <N3-

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

19. Which of the following species will have the largest size Mg, Mg2+, Fe, Fe3+?
(A) Mg
(B) Mg2+
(C) Fe
(D) Fe3+
Answer:
(C) Fe

20. Which one of the following is CORRECT order of the size?
(A) I > I >I+
(B) I > I+ > I
(C) I+ > I > I
(D) I > I > I+
Answer:
(D) I > I > I+

21. The CORRECT order of increasing radii of the elements Na, Si, Al and P is ……………
(A) Si < Al < P < Na
(B) Al < Si < P < Na
(C) P < Si < Al < Na
(D) Al < P < Si < Na
Answer:
(C) P < Si < Al < Na

22. The metallic and nonmetallic properties of elements can be judged by their ……………
(A) electron gain enthalpy
(B) ionization enthalpy
(C) electronegativity
(D) valence
Answer:
(C) electronegativity

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Modern Periodic Table

23. Which element has the most negative electron gain enthalpy?
(A) Sulphur
(B) Fluorine
(C) Chlorine
(D) Hydrogen
Answer:
(C) Chlorine

24. Which of the properties remain unchanged on descending a group in the periodic table?
(A) Atomic size
(B) Density
(C) Valency electrons
(D) Metallic character
Answer:
(C) Valency electrons

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 1.
State the different types of waves.
Answer:

  1. Waves which require a material medium for their propagation are called mechanical waves. Example: Sound waves, string waves, seismic waves, etc.
  2. Waves which do not require material medium for their propagation are called electromagnetic waves. Example: Light waves, radio waves, y-rays, etc.
  3. The wave associated with any object when it is in motion is called as matter wave.
  4. Waves in which a disturbance created at one place travels to distant points and keeps travelling unless stopped by an external force are known as travelling or progressive waves.
  5. Waves are also of stationary type.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 2.
Define the following terms. Give their SI units.
i. Period
ii. Frequency
iii. Velocity
Answer:
i. Period (T):
The time taken by the particle of a medium to complete one vibration is called period of the wave.
SI unit: second (s)

ii. Frequency (n):
The number of vibrations performed by a particle per second is called frequency of a wave.
SI unit: hertz (Hz)

iii. Velocity (v):
The distance covered by a wave per unit time is called the velocity of the wave.
SI unit: m/s

Question 3.
State the properties that should be possessed by a medium for a mechanical wave to propagate through it.
Answer:

  1. The medium must be continuous and elastic so that it can regain its original state as soon as the deforming forces are removed.
  2. The medium should possess inertia. It must be capable of storing energy and transferring it in the form of waves.
  3. The frictional resistance of the medium should be negligible to avoid damped oscillations.

Question 4.
What are two types of progressive waves? State two characteristics of progressive waves.
Answer:
Progressive waves are classified into two types:
a. Transverse progressive waves
b. Longitudinal progressive waves.

Characteristics of progressive waves:
1. All the vibrating particles of medium have same amplitude, period and frequency.
2.. State of oscillation i.e., phase changes from particle to particle.

Question 5.
A violin string emits sound of frequency 510 Hz. How far will the sound waves reach when string completes 250 vibrations? The velocity of sound is 340 m/s.
Answer:
Given: n = 510 Hz, v = 340 m/s,
number of vibrations = 250
To find: Distance
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation:
From formula,
λ = \(\frac {v}{n}\) = \(\frac {340}{510}\) = \(\frac {2}{3}\) m
Distance covered in 1 vibration = \(\frac {2}{3}\) m
∴ Distance covered in 250 vibration
= \(\frac {2}{3}\) × 250 = 166.7 m 3
Answer: The distance covered by sound waves is 166.7 m

Question 6.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s and that in glass is 4500 m/s. What is the ratio of the wavelength of sound of a given frequency in the two media?
Answer:
Given: vair = 330 m/s, vglass = 4500 m/s
To find: \(\frac {λ_{air}}{λ_{glass}}\)
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation: From formula,
vair = n λair
vglass = n λglass
∴ \(\frac {λ_{air}}{λ_{glass}}\) = \(\frac {v_{air}}{v_{glass}}\) = \(\frac {330}{4500}\) = 7.33 × 10-2

Question 7.
The velocity of sound in gas is 498 m/s and in air is 332 m/s. What is the ratio of wavelength of sound waves in gas to air?
Answer:
vg = 498 m/s, va = 332 m/s
To find: Ratio of wavelengths (\(\frac {λ_g}{λ_a}\))
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation:
Frequency of sound wave remains same.
From formula,
For gas λg = \(\frac {v_g}{n}\) and for air λag = \(\frac {v_a}{n}\)
∴ \(\frac {v_g}{v_a}\) = \(\frac {v_g}{v_a}\) = \(\frac {498}{332}\) = \(\frac {3}{2}\)
∴ \(\frac {v_g}{v_a}\) = 3 : 2

Question 8.
A human ear responds to sound waves of frequencies in the range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. What are the corresponding wavelengths, if the speed of sound in air is 330 m/s? Answer:
Given: v1 = vg = 330 m/s, n1 = 20 Hz,
n2 = 20 kHz = 20 × 10³ Hz
To find: Wavelength (λ1 and λ2)
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation:
From formula,
λ1 = \(\frac {v_1}{n_1}\) = \(\frac {330}{20}\) = 16.5 m
λ2 = \(\frac {v_2}{n_2}\) = \(\frac {330}{20×10^3}\) = 16.5 × 10-3 = 0.0165 m

Question 9.
A bat emits ultrasonic sound of frequency 1000 kHz in air. If the sound meets a water surface, what is the wavelength of (i) the reflected sound, (ii) the transmitted sound? Speed of sound in air is 340 m s-1 and in water is 1486 m s-1
Answer:
Given: n = 1000 kHz = 106 Hz,
va = 340 m/s,
vw = 1486 m/s
To find: Reflected wavelength (λR),
Transmitted wavelength (λT),
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation:
In different medium, frequency of sound wave remains same.
From formula,
Sound is reflected in air,
i. ∴ λR = \(\frac {v_a}{n}\) = \(\frac {330}{10^6}\) = 3.4 × 10-4 m
Sound is transmitted in water,
ii. ∴ λT = \(\frac {v_w}{n}\) = \(\frac {1486}{10^6}\) = 1.486 × 10-3 m

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 10.
The wavelength of a sound note is 1 m in air and 2.5 m in a liquid. Find the speed of sound in the liquid, if the speed of the sound in air is 330 m/s.
Answer:
Given: λa = 1 m, λl = 2.5 m, va = 330 m/s,
To find: Speed of sound (vl)
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation:
From formula,
Since the frequency n remains the same,
va = nλa and vl = nλl
∴ \(\frac {v_l}{v_a}\) = \(\frac {λ_l}{λ_a}\)
∴ vl = va \(\frac {λ_l}{λ_a}\) = 330 × \(\frac {2.5}{1}\) = 825 m/s

Question 11.
Define a polarised wave.
Answer:
A wave in which the vibrations of all the particles along the path of a wave are constrained to a single plane is called a polarised wave.

Question 12.
Write down the main characteristics of longitudinal waves.
Answer:
Characteristics of longitudinal waves:

  1. All the particles of medium in the path of wave vibrate in a direction parallel to the direction of propagation of wave with same period and amplitude.
  2. When longitudinal wave passes through a medium, the medium is divided into alternate compressions (high pressure zone) and rarefactions (low pressure zone).
  3. A compression and adjacent rarefaction form one cycle of a longitudinal wave. The distance between any two consecutive points having same phase (successive compression or rarefactions) is called wavelength of the wave.
  4. For propagation of longitudinal waves, the medium should possess the property of elasticity of volume (bulk modulus). Thus, longitudinal waves can travel through solids, liquids and gases. Longitudinal wave cannot travel through vacuum or empty space.
  5. The compressions and rarefactions advance in the medium and are responsible for transfer of energy.
  6. When longitudinal wave advances through medium, there is periodic variations in pressure and density along the path of wave and with time.
  7. Since the direction of vibration of particles and direction of propagation of wave are same or parallel, longitudinal waves cannot be polarised.

Question 13.
State the mathematical expression for a transverse progressive wave travelling along the positive and negative x-axis.
Answer:
i. Consider a transverse progressive wave whose particle position is described by x and displacement from equilibrium position is described by y.
Such a sinusoidal wave can be written as follows:
∴ y (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt + ø) ……… (1)
where a, k, ω and ø are constants,
y (x, t) = displacement as a function of position (x) and time (t)
a = amplitude of the wave,
ω = angular frequency of the wave
(kx0 – ωt + ø) = argument of the sinusoidal wave and is the phase of the particle at x at time t.

ii. At a particular instant, t = t0,
y (x, t0) = a sin (kx – ωt0 + ø)
= a sin (kx + constant)
Thus at t = t0, shape of wave as a function of x is a sine wave.

iii. At a fixed location x = x0
y(x0, t) = a sin (kx0 – ωt + ø)
= a sin (constant – ωt)
Hence the displacement y, at x = x0 varies as a sine function.

iv. This means that the particles of the medium, through which the wave travels, execute simple harmonic motion around their equilibrium position.

v. For (kx – ωt + ø) to remain constant, x must increase in the positive direction as time t increases. Thus, the equation (1) represents a wave travelling along the positive x axis.

vi. Similarly, a wave travelling in the direction of the negative x axis is represented by,
y(x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt +ø) …….(2)

Question 14.
Explain the Laplace’s correction to the Newton’s formula for the velocity of sound in air.
Answer:
Laplace’s correction:
Laplace suggested that the compression or rarefaction takes place too rapidly. Heat produced during compression and lost during rarefaction does not get sufficient time for dissipation. Due to this, the whole heat content remains same. Thus, it is an adiabatic process.

According to Laplace, E is the adiabatic modulus of elasticity of air medium which is given by,
E = γP ….(1)
where P = pressure of the air medium γ = ratio of specific heat of air at constant pressure (cp) and specific heat of air at constant volume (cv). i.e., γ = cp/cv.

iii. Using equation, v = \(\sqrt{\frac {E}{ρ}}\), we have velocity of sound in air,
v = \(\sqrt{\frac {γP}{ρ}}\), …. [From equation (1)]
For air, γ = 1.41
At NTP, P = 0.76 × 13600 × 9.8 N/m²
ρ = 1.293 kg/m³.
∴ v = \(\sqrt{\frac {1.41×0.76×13600×9.8}{1.293}}\) = 332.35 m/s
This value is in close agreement with the experimental value.

Question 15.
What is the effect of temperature on the velocity of sound in air?
Answer:
Effect of temperature on velocity of sound:
i. Let v0 and v be the velocity of sound in air at T0 and T Kelvin respectively. Let ρ0 and p be the densities of gas at temperature T0 and T respectively.

ii. Considering the number of moles n = 1 for the gas, we have,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 1

iii. From above formula, we can conclude that velocity of sound in air increases with increase in temperature.

Question 16.
Show that for 1 °C rise in temperature, the velocity of sound in air increases by 0.61 m/s.
Answer:
Let v0 = velocity of sound at 0 °C or 273 K
v = velocity of sound at t °C or (273 + 1) K
we have, v ∝ √T
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 2
Hence, velocity of sound increases by 0.61 m/s when temperature increases by 1 °C.

Question 17.
Suppose you are listening to an out-door live concert sitting at a distance of 150 m from the speakers. Your friend is listening to the live broadcast of the concert in another country and the radio signal has to travel 3000 km to reach him. Who will hear the music first and what will be the time difference between the two? Velocity of light = 3 × 108 m/s and that of sound is 330 m/s.
Answer:
Distance between me and the speakers
(s1) = 150 m, distance radio signal has to travel (S2) = 3000 km, vsound 330 m/s, vlight = 3 × 108 m/s
Time taken by sound to reach me,
= \(\frac {s_1}{v_sound}\) = \(\frac {150}{330}\) = 0.4546 s
Time taken by the broadcasted sound (done by
EM waves = \(\frac {s_2}{v_light}\) = \(\frac {3000km}{30×10^5km/s}\) = \(\frac {3×1^30}{3×10^5}\) = 10-2 s
∴My friend will hear the sound first.
The time difference will be = 0.4546 – 0.01
= 0.4446 s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 18.
Consider a closed box of rigid walls so that the density’ of the air inside it is constant. On heating, the pressure of this enclosed air is increased from P0 to P. It is now observed that sound travels 1.5 times faster than at pressure P0. Calculate P/P0.
Answer:
Given: vP = 1.5 vP0
To find: Ratio of pressure (\(\frac {p}{p_0}\))
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 3

Question 19.
The densities of nitrogen and oxygen at NTP are 1.25 kg/m³ and 1.43 kg/m³ respectively. If the speed of sound in oxygen at NTP is 320 m/s, calculate the speed in nitrogen, under the same conditions of temperature and pressure, (γ for both the gases is 1.4)
Answer:
Given: ρN = 1.25 kg/m³, ρ = 1.43 kg/m³,
v0 = 320 m/s,
To find: Speed in nitrogen (vN)
Formula: v = (\(\sqrt{\frac {γP}{ρ}}\) )
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 4

Question 20.
Find the temperature at which the velocity of sound in air will be 1.5 times its velocity at 0 °C
Answer:
Given: \(\frac {p}{p_0}\) = 1.5, T0 = 0 °C = 273 K
To find: Temperature (T)
Formula: \(\frac {v}{v_0}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac {T}{T_0}}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
\(\frac {T}{T_0}\) = (\(\frac {v}{v_0}\))²
∴ T = T0 (\(\frac {v}{v_0}\))²
∴ T = 273 (1.5)² = 614.25 K = 341.25 °C

Question 21.
The velocity of sound in air at 27 °C is 340 m/s. Calculate the velocity of sound in air at 127 °C.
Answer:
Given: T1 = 27 °C = 27 + 273 = 300 K,
v1 = 340 m/s,
T2 = 127 °C = 127 + 273 = 400 K
To find: Velocity (v2)
Formula: \(\frac {v_1}{v_2}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac {T_1}{T_2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
v2 = v1 \(\sqrt{\frac {T_2}{T_1}}\) = 340, \(\sqrt{\frac {400}{300}}\)
= 340 × 1.1547
∴ v2 = 392.6 m/s

Question 22.
The wavelength of a note is 27 m in air when the temperature is 27 °C. What is the wavelength when the temperature is increased to 37 °C?
Answer:
Given: λ1 = 27 m,
T1 = 27 °C = 273 + 27 = 300 K,
T2 = 37 °C = 273 + 37 = 310 K
To find: Wavelength (λ2)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 5

Question 23.
We cannot hear an echo at every place. Give reason.
Answer:

  1. Echo of sound depends upon the temperature of the surrounding and distance between source and reflecting surface.
  2. To hear a distinct echo at 22 °C, the minimum distance required between the source of sound and reflecting surface should be 17.2 metre.
  3. The velocity of sound depends on the temperature of air. Thus, the minimum distance will change with temperature. Hence, we cannot hear an echo at every place.

Question 24.
Write a short note on reverberation.
Answer:

  1. Reverberation is the phenomenon in which sound waves are reflected multiple times causing a single sound to be heard more than once.
  2. Sound wave gets reflected multiple times if the distance between reflecting surface and source of sound is less than 15 m.
  3. During reverberation, the time interval between the successive reflections of a sound is small.
  4. As a result, the reflected sound waves overlap and produce a continuously increasing loud sound which is at times difficult to understand. Measures to decrease reverberation:
  5. Reverberation can be decreased by making the walls and roofs rough and by using curtains in the hall to avoid reflection of sound.
  6. Chairs and wall surfaces should be covered with sound absorbing materials.
  7. Porous cardboard sheets, perforated acoustic tiles, gypsum boards, thick curtains etc. should be used on the ceilings and walls.

Question 25.
Define acoustics.
Answer:
The branch of physics which deals with the study of production, transmission and reception of sound is called acoustics.

Question 26.
State the conditions that must be satisfied for proper acoustics in an auditorium along-with their remedies.
Answer:
i. Acoustics of an auditorium should be such that the sound is heard sufficiently loudly at all the points in the auditorium. The surface behind the speaker should be parabolic with the speaker at its focus for uniform distribution of sound in the auditorium. Reflection of sound helps to maintain good loudness through the entire auditorium.

ii. Echoes and reverberations should be reduced. More absorptive reflecting surfaces and full auditoriums help in reducing echoes.

iii. Unnecessary focusing of sound, poor audibility zone or region of silence should be avoided. Curved surface of the wall or ceiling should be avoided for this purpose.

iv. Echelon effect which arises due to the mixing of sound produced in the hall by the echoes of sound produced in front of regular structure like stairs should be reduced. Stair type construction in the hall must be avoided for this purpose.

v. To avoid outside stray sound from entering, the auditorium should be sound-proof when closed.

vi. Inside fittings, seats, etc. should not produce any sound for proper acoustics. Air conditioners instead of fans and soft action door closers should be used.

Question 27.
State the applications of acoustics observed in nature.
Answer:
Application of acoustics in nature:
i. Bats apply the principle of acoustics to locate objects. They emit short ultrasonic pulses of frequency 30 kHz to 150 kHz. The resulting echoes give them information about location of the obstacle. This helps the bats to fly in even in total darkness of caves.

ii. Dolphins navigate underwater with the help of an analogous system. They emit subsonic frequencies which can be about 100 Hz. They can sense an object about 1.4 m or larger.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 28.
State the medical applications of acoustics.
Answer:
i. High pressure and high amplitude shock waves are used to split kidney stones into smaller pieces without invasive surgery. A reflector or acoustic lens is used to focus a produced shock wave so that as much of its energy as possible converges on the stone. The resulting stresses in the stone causes the stone to break into small pieces which can then be removed easily.

ii. Ultrasonic imaging uses reflection of ultrasonic waves from regions in the interior of body. It is used for prenatal (before the birth) examination, detection of anomalous conditions like tumour etc. and the study of heart valve action.

iii. Ultrasound at a very high-power level, destroys selective pathological tissues which is helpful in treatment of arthritis and certain type of cancer.

Question 29.
State the underwater applications of acoustics.
Answer:

  1. SONAR (Sound Navigational Ranging) is a technique for locating objects underwater by transmitting a pulse of ultrasonic sound and detecting the reflected pulse.
  2. The time delay between transmission of a pulse and the reception of reflected pulse indicates the depth of the object.
  3. Motion and position of submerged objects like submarine can be measured with the help of this system.

Question 30.
State the applications of acoustics in environmental and geological studies.
Answer:
i. Acoustic principle has important application to environmental problems like noise control. The quiet mass transit vehicle is designed by studying the generation and propagation of sound in the motor’s wheels and supporting structures.

ii. Reflected and refracted elastic waves passing through the Earth’s interior can be measured by applying the principles of acoustics.

iii. This is useful in studying the properties of the Earth. Principles of acoustics are applied to detect local anomalies like oil deposits etc. making it useful for geological studies.

Question 31.
A man shouts loudly close to a high wall. He hears an echo. If the man is at 40 m from the wall, how long after the shout will the echo be heard? (speed of sound in air = 330 m/s)
Answer:
Given s = 40m, v = 330 m/s
To Find: time (t)
Formula: Time = distance \(\frac {distence}{speed}\)
Calculation:
The distance travelled by the sound wave
= 2 × distance from man to wall.
= 2 × 40 = 80 m.
From formula,
∴ Time taken to travel the distance
\(\frac {distence}{speed}\) = \(\frac {80}{30}\) = 0.24 s

Question 32.
Write a short note on pitch of sound note.
Answer:

  1. Pitch refers to the sharpness or shrillness of sound.
  2. Increase in frequency of sound results in increase in the pitch and the sound is said to be sharper.
  3. Tone refers to a single frequency of a wave.
  4. A note may contain single or multiple tones.
  5. High frequency is generally referred as high pitch or high tone.
  6. Generally, speech of the men is of low pitch (shrill) and that of the women is of high pitch (sharp). Tones of an acoustic guitar are sharper than that of a base guitar. Sound of table is sharper than that of a dagga.

Question 33.
Write a short note on quality (timbre) of sound note.
Answer:
i. Timbre of a sound refers to the quality of the sound which depends upon the mixture of tones and overtones in the sound. Same sound played on different musical instruments feels significantly different and the musical instrument from which the sound generated can be easily identified.

Question 34.
Write a short note on loudness of sound.
OR
Explain how loudness affects the characteristics of sound.
Answer:
Loudness:
i. Loudness depends upon the intensity of vibration.

ii. Intensity of a wave is proportional to square of the amplitude (I ∝ A²) and is measured in the (SI) unit ofW/m²

iii. The human response to intensity is not linear, i.e., a sound of double intensity is louder but not doubly loud.

iv. Under ideal conditions, for a perfectly healthy human ear, the least audible intensity is I0 = 10-12 W/m².

v. Loudness of a sound of intensity I (measured in unit bel) is given by,
L2 = log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\)) ………….. (1)

vi. Decibel is the commonly used unit for loudness.

vii. As, 1 decibel or 1 dB = 0.1 bel.
∴ 1 bel = 10 dB. Thus, loudness in dB is 10 times loudness in bel.
∴ LdB = 10Lbel = 10 log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\))
For sound of least audible intensity I0
LdB = 10 log10 (\(\frac {I_0}{I_0}\)) = 10 log10 (1) = 0 ………… (2)
This corresponds to threshold of hearing.

viii. For sound of 10 dB,
10 = 10 log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\))
∴ (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\)) = 10 1 or I = 10 I0
For sound of 20 dB,
20 = 10 log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\))
= (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\)) = 10² or I = 100 I0 and so on.

ix. This implies, loudness of 20 dB sound is felt double that of 10 dB, but its intensity is 10 times that of the 10 dB sound. Similarly, 40 dB sound is left twice as loud as 20 dB sound but its intensity is 100 times as that of 20 dB sound and 10000 times that of 10 dB sound. This is the power of logarithmic or exponential scale. If we move away from a (practically) point source, the intensity of its sound varies inversely with square of the distance, i.e., I ∝ \(\frac {1}{r^2}\).

Question 35.
When heard independently, two sound waves produce sensations of 60 dB and 55 dB respectively. How much will the sensation be if those are sounded together, perfectly in phase?
Answer:
L1 = 60 dB = 10 log10 \(\frac {I_1}{I_0}\)
∴ \(\frac {I_1}{I_0}\) = 106
∴ I1 = 106I0
Similarly, I2 = 105.5 I0
As the waves combine perfectly in phase, the vector addition of their amplitudes will be given by A² = (A1 + A2)² = A\(_1^2\) + A\(_2^2\) + 2A1, A2 As intensity is proportional to square of the amplitude.
∴ I = I1 + I2 + 2\(\sqrt {I_1I_2}\) = 105 I0 (101 +100.5 + 2\(\sqrt {10^{1.5}}\))
= 105I0(10 + 3.1623 +2 × 100.75)
= 24.41 × 105I0 = 2.441 × 106I0
∴ L = 10 log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\)) = 10 log10 (2.441 × 106)
= 10[log10 (2.441) + log10(106)]
= 10(0.3876 + 6)
L = 63.876 dB ~ 64 dB

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 36.
The noise level in a class-room in absence of the teacher is 50 dB when 50 students are present. Assuming that on the average each student outputs same sound energy per second, what will be the noise level if the number of students is increases to 100?
Answer:
Loudness of sound is given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 6
∴ LB – LA = 0.301 × 10 = 3.01
∴ LB = LA + 3.01 = 53.01 dB

Question 37.
Calculate the decibel increase if there is a two-fold increase in the intensity of a wave. (Given: log10 2 = 0.3010)
Answer:
L = 10 log10 \(\frac {I}{I_0}\) decibel
L’ = 10 log10 \(\frac {2I}{I_0}\) decibel
L’ – L = 10 (log10 \(\frac {2I}{I_0}\) – log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\))
= 10 log10 2
= 10 × 0.3010
∴ L’ – L = 3.01 dB

Question 38.
Derive the expression for apparent frequency when listener is stationary and source is moving away from the listener.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 7
i. Consider a source of sound S moving away from a stationary listener L with velocity vs. Let the speed of sound with respect to the medium be v (always positive). The listener uses a detector for counting each wave crest that reaches it.

ii. Let at t = 0, the source at point Si which is at a distance d from the listener, emit a crest. This crest reaches the listener at time t1, given as, t1 = d/v. …………(1)

iii. Let T0 be the time period at which the waves are emitted.
At t = T0, distance travelled by the source away from the stationary listener to reach point S2 = vsT0.
∴ Distance of point S2 from the listener = d + vsT0.
At S2, The source emits second crest. This crest reaches the listener at t2, given as,
t2 = T0 + (\(\frac {d+v_sT_0}{v}\)) …………. (2)

iv. Similarly, the time taken by the (p+1)th crest (where, p is an integer, p = 1, 2, 3,…), emitted by the source at time pT0, to reach the listener is given as,
tp+1 = pT0 + (\(\frac {d+pv_sT_0}{v}\)) …………. (3)
∴ the listener’s detector counts p crests in the time interval,
tp+1 – t1 = pT0 + (\(\frac {d+pv_sT_0}{v}\)) – \(\frac {d}{v}\)
The period of wave as recorded by the listener is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 8

Where, n = frequency recorded by the listener (apparent frequency)
n0 = frequency emitted by the source (actual frequency).
This is the expression for apparent frequency when the listener is stationary and the source is moving away from the listener.

Question 39.
Derive an expression for apparent frequency when listener is stationary and source is moving towards the listener.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 9
i. Consider a source of sound S moving towards a stationary listener L with velocity vs. Let the speed of sound with respect to the medium be v (always positive). The listener use a detector for counting each wave crest that reaches it.

ii. Let at t = 0, the source at point S1 which is at a distance d from the listener, emit a Crest. This crest reaches the listener at time t1, given as,
∴ t1 = d/v. ……….(1)

iii. Let T0 be the time period at which the waves are emitted.
At t = T0, distance travelled by the source away from the stationary listener to reach point S2 = vsT0.
Distance of S2 from the listener = d – vsT0.
At S2, The source emits second crest. This crest reaches the listener at
t2 = T0 + (\(\frac {d-v_sT_0}{v}\)) ………….. (2)

iv. Similarly, the time taken by the (p+1)th crest (where, p = 1,2,3,…), emitted by the source at time pT0, to reach the listener is given as,
tp+1 = pT0 + (\(\frac {d-pv_sT_0}{v}\)) ……………. (3)
∴ the listener’s detector counts p crests in the time interval,
tp+1 – t1 = pT0 + (\(\frac {d-pv_sT_0}{v}\)) – \(\frac {d}{v}\)
∴ the period of wave as recorded by the listener is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 10
Where, n = frequency recorded by the listener (apparent frequency)
n0 = frequency emitted by the source (actual frequency).
This is the expression for apparent frequency when the listener is stationary and the source is moving towards the listener.

Question 40.
Derive the expression for apparent frequency when the source is stationary and the listener is moving towards the source.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 11
i. Consider a listener approaching a stationary source S with velocity vL as shown in figure. Let the speed of sound with respect to the medium be v (always positive).

ii. Let at time t = 0, the source emits the first wave when the listener L1 is at an initial distance d from the source.
At time t = t1 the listener receives the first wave at the position L2.
Distance travelled by the listener towards the stationary source during time t1 = vLt1.
Distance travelled by the sound wave during time t1 = d – vLt1
∴ time taken by the sound wave to travel this distance, t1 = \(\frac {d-v_Lt_1}{v}\)
∴ t1 = \(\frac {d}{v+v_L}\) ………….. (1)

iii. Let at time t = T0 (time period of the waves emitted by the source), the source emits a second wave.
At t = t2, the listener receives the second wave. Distance travelled by the listener towards the stationary source during time t2 = vLt2.
Distance travelled by the sound wave during time t2 = d – vLt2
∴ time taken by the sound wave to travel this distance = \(\frac {d-v_Lt_2}{v}\)
However, this time should be counted after T0, as the second wave was emitted at t = T0.
∴ t2 = T0 + \(\frac {d-v_Lt_2}{v}\)
∴ t2 = \(\frac {vT_0+d}{v+v_L}\) …………. (2)

iv. Similarly, for the third wave, we get,
t3 = 2T0 + \(\frac {d-v_Lt_3}{v}\)
∴ t3 = \(\frac {2vT_0+d}{v+v_L}\) …………. (3)

v. Extending this argument to the (p + 1)th wave, we get,
tp+1 = pT0 + \(\frac {d-v_Lt_{p+1}}{v}\)
∴ tp+1 = \(\frac {pvT_0+d}{v+v_L}\) …………. (4)

vi. The observed or recorded period T is the time duration between instances of receiving successive waves.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 12
This is the expression for apparent frequency when the source is stationary and the listener is moving towards the source.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 41.
Derive the expression for apparent frequency when the source is stationary and the listener is moving away from the source.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 13
i. Consider a listener moving away a stationary source S with velocity VL. Let the speed of sound with respect to the medium be y (always positive).

ii. Let at time t = 0, the source emits the first wave when the listener L1 is at an initial distance d from the source.
At time t = t1 the listener receives the first wave at the position L2.
Distance travelled by the listener away from the stationary source during time t1 = vLt1.
Distance travelled by the sound wave during time t1 = d + vLt1
∴ time taken by the sound wave to travel this distance,
t1 = \(\frac {d+v_Lt_1}{v}\)
∴ t1 = \(\frac {d}{v-v_L}\) ………….. (1)

iii. Let at time t = T0 (time period of the waves emitted by the source), the source emits a second wave.
At t = t2, the listener receives the second wave. Distance travelled by the listener away from the stationary source during time t2 = vLt2.
∴ Distance travelled by the sound wave during time t2 = d + vLt2.
∴ time taken by the sound wave to travel this distance = \(\frac {d+v_Lt_2}{v}\)
However, this time should be counted after T0, as the second wave was emitted at t = T0.
∴ t2 = T0 \(\frac {d+v_Lt_2}{v}\) ………….. (2)
∴ t2 = \(\frac {vT_0+d}{v-v_L}\)

iv. Similarly for the third wave, we get
t3 = 2T0 \(\frac {d+v_Lt_3}{v}\)
∴ t3 = \(\frac {2vT_0+d}{v-v_L}\) …………..(3)

v. Extending this argument to the (p + 1)th wave, we get,
tp+1 = pT0 + \(\frac {d+v_Lt_{p+1}}{v}\)
∴ tp+1 = \(\frac {pvT_0+d}{v-v_L}\) …………..(4)

vi. The observed or recorded period T is the time duration between instances of receiving successive waves.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 14
This is the expression for apparent frequency when the source is stationary and the listener is moving away from the source.

Question 42.
State the common properties between Doppler effect of sound and light.
Answer:
i. The recorded frequency is different than the emitted frequency in case of relative motion between listener (or observer) and source (of sound or light waves).

ii. In case of relative approach, recorded frequency > emitted frequency.

iii. In case of relative recede, recorded frequency < emitted frequency.

iv. For values of listener velocity (vL) or source velocity (vs) much smaller then wave speed (speed of sound or light).
n = n0 (1±\(\frac {v_r}{v}\))
Where, vr = relative velocity
n = actual frequency of the source
n0 = apparent frequency of the source
v = velocity of sound in air.
(upper sign is used during relative approach and lower sign is during relative recede.)

v. If velocities of source and observer (listener) are along different lines, their respective components along the line joining them should be chosen for longitudinal Doppler effect and the same mathematical treatment is applicable.

Question 43.
State the major difference between Doppler effects of sound and light.
Answer:

  1. Speed of light being absolute, only relative velocity between the observer and the source matter irrespective of who is in motion. However, for obtaining exact Doppler shift for sound waves, it is absolutely important to know who is in motion.
  2. In case of light, classical and relativistic Doppler effects are different while sound only has classical doppler effect.
  3. Presence of wind affects the velocity of sound which affects the Doppler shift in sound.

Question 44.
A train, standing at the outer signal of a railway station blows a whistle of frequency 400 Hz in still air. (i) What is the frequency of the whistle for a platform observer when the train (a) approaches the platform with a speed of 10 m s-1 (b) recedes from the platform with a speed of 10 m s-1? (ii) What is the speed of sound in each case? The speed of sound in still air can be taken as 340 m s-1.
Answer:
Given: vs = 10 m/s, v = 340 m/s, n0 = 400 Hz
Apparent frequency (n), velocity of sound (vs) in each case
Formulae:
i. n = n0 (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\))
ii. n = n0 \(\frac {v}{v+v_s}\)
Calculation:
a. As the train approaches the platform, using formula (i),
n = 400 (\(\frac {340}{340-10}\)) = 421.12 Hz

b. As the train recedes from the platform, using formula (ii),
n = 400 (\(\frac {340}{340+10}\)) = 388.57 Hz

ii. The relative motion of source and observer results in the apparent change in the frequency but has no effect on the speed of sound. Hence, the speed of sound remains unchanged in both the cases.

Question 45.
A train blows a whistle of frequency 640 Hz in air. Find the difference in apparent frequencies of the whistle for a stationary observer, when the train moves towards and away from the observer with the speed of 72 km/hour. (Speed of sound in air = 340 m/s)
Answer:
Given: vs = 72 km/ hr = 20 m/s, n0 = 640 Hz,
v = 340 m/s
To find: Difference in apparent frequencies
(nA – n’A)
Formulae:
i. When the train moves towards the stationary observer then,
nA = n0 (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\))
ii. When the train moves away the stationary observer then,
n’A = n0 (\(\frac {v}{v+v_s}\))
Calculation: From formula (i),
nA = 640 (\(\frac {340}{340-20}\))
∴ nA = 680 Hz
From formula (ii),
n’A = 640 (\(\frac {340}{340+20}\))
∴ n’A = 604.4 Hz
Difference between nA and n’A
= nA – n’A = 75.6 Hz

Question 46.
The speed limit for a vehicle on road is 120 km/hr. A policeman detects a drop of 10% in the pitch of horn of a car as it passes him. Is the policeman justified in punishing the car driver for crossing the speed limit? (Given: Velocity of sound=340 m/s).
Answer:
Given: Speed limit, vL = 120 km/hr
n’A = nA – \(\frac {10}{100}\) nA = 0.9 nA
Velocity of sound, v = 340 m/s
To Find: Velocity of source (vs)
i. nA = (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\))n
ii. n’A = (\(\frac {v}{v+v_s}\))n
Calculation:
Dividing formula (i) by (ii),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 15

Question 47.
A stationary source produces a note of frequency 350 Hz. An observer in a car moving towards the source measures the frequency of sound as 370 Hz. Find the speed of the car. What will be the frequency of sound as measured by the observer in the car if the car moves away from the source at the same speed? (Assume speed of sound = 340 m/s)
Answer:
Given: n0 = 350 Hz, v = 340 m/s,
nA = 370 Hz
To find: Speed (vL), Frequency (nA)
Formulae:
i. When the car moves towards the stationary source then,
nA = n0 (\(\frac {v+v_s}{v}\))

ii. When the car moves away from the stationary source then,
nA = n0 (\(\frac {v-v_L}{v}\))
Calculation: From formula (i),
370 = 35o (\(\frac {340+v_L}{340}\))
∴ 359.43 =340 +vL
∴ vL = 19.43 m/s
From formula (ii),
∴ nA = 35o (\(\frac {340-20}{340}\)) = \(\frac {35}{34}\) × 320
∴ nA = 329.41 Hz

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 48.
A train, standing in a station-yard, blows a whistle of frequency 400 Hz in still air. The wind starts blowing in the direction from the yard to the station with a speed of 10 m s-1. What are the frequency, wavelength, and speed of sound for an observer standing on the station’s platform? Is the situation exactly identical to the case when the air is still and the observer runs towards the yard at a speed of 10 m s-1? The speed of sound in still air can be taken as 340 m s-1.
Answer:
Blowing of wind changes the velocity of sound. As the wind is blowing in the direction of sound, effective speed of sound ve = v + vw = 340 + 10 = 350 m/s
As the source and listener both are at rest, frequency is unchanged, i.e., n = 400 Hz.
∴ wavelength, λ = \(\frac {v_e}{n}\) = \(\frac {350}{400}\) = 0.875 m
For still air, vw = 0 and ve = v = 340 m/s
Also, as observer runs towards the stationary train vL = 10 m/s and vs = 0
The frequency now heard by the observer,
n = n0 (\(\frac {v+v_L}{v}\)) = 400 (\(\frac {340+10}{340}\))
= 411.76 Hz
As the source is at rest, wavelength does not change i.e., λ’ = λ = 0.875 m
Comparing the answers, it can be stated that, the situations in two cases are different.

Question 49.
A SONAR system fixed in a submarine operates at a frequency 40 kHz. An enemy submarine moves towards the SONAR with a speed of 360 km h-1. What is the frequency of sound reflected by the submarine? Take the speed of sound in water to be 1450 m s-1.
Answer:
Frequency of SONAR (source)
n = 40 kHz = 40 × 10³ Hz
Speed of sound waves, v = 1450 m s-1
Speed of the listener, vL = 360 km h-1
= 360 × \(\frac {5}{18}\) ms-1
= 100 m s-1
Since, the source is at rest and the observer moves towards the source (SONAR).
We have,
n = n0 (\(\frac {v+v_L}{v}\)) = 40 × 10³ × (\(\frac {1450+100}{14540}\))
∴ n = 4.276 × 10⁴ Hz
This frequency n’ is reflected by the enemy ship and is observed by the SONAR (which now acts as observer). Therefore, in this case vs = 100 m s-1
Apparent frequency,
n = n0 (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\))
= 4.276 × 10⁴ × (\(\frac {1450}{1450-100}\)) = 4.59 × 10⁴ Hz
∴ n = 45.9 kHz

Question 50.
A rocket is moving at a speed of 220 m s-1 towards a stationary target. While moving, it emits a wave of frequency 1200 Hz. Some of the sound reaching the target gets reflected back to the rocket as an echo. Calculate (i) the frequency of the sound as detected by the target and (ii) the frequency of the echo as detected by the rocket (velocity of sound = 330 m/s)
Answer:
Given: vs = 220 m/s, vL = 0 m/s, n = 1200 Hz
To find: Apparent frequency (n)
i. n = n0 (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\))
ii. n = n0 \(\frac {v+v_L}{v}\)
Calculation: For first case, observer is stationary and source i.e., rocket is moving towards the target.
Hence, using formula (i),
frequency of sound as detected by the target,
n = 1200 (\(\frac {330}{330-220}\)) = 3600 Hz
For second case, target acts as a source with frequency 3600 Hz as it is the source of echo. While rocket detector acts as an observer. This means, vs = 0 and VL = 220 m/s
Using formula (ii),
frequency of echo as detected by the rocket,
n = 3600 (\(\frac {330+220}{330}\)) = 600 Hz

Question 51.
A bat is flying about in a cave, navigating via ultrasonic beeps. Assume that the sound emission frequency of the bat is 40 kHz. During one fast swoop directly towards a flat wall surface, the bat is moving at 0.03 times the speed of sound in air. What frequency does the bat hear reflected off the wall?
Answer:
Here, frequency of sound emitted by bat,
n = 40 kHz
Velocity of bat, vs = 0.03 v
where v is velocity of sound.
The bat is moving towards the flat wall. This is the case of source in motion and the observer at rest.
Therefore, the frequency of sound reflected at the wall is,
n = ns (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\)) = n × (\(\frac {v}{v-0.03v}\))
= n × \(\frac {1}{0.97}\) = \(\frac {n}{0.97}\)
The frequency n’ is reflected by the wall and is again received by the bat moving towards the wall. This is the case of an observer moving towards the source with velocity vL = 0.03 v.
The frequency observed by bat,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 16

Question 52.
A bat, flying at velocity VB = 12.5 m/s, is followed by a car running at velocity Vc = 50 m/s. Actual directions of the velocities of the car and the bat are as shown in the figure below, both being in the same horizontal plane (the plane of the figure). To detect the car, the bat radiates ultrasonic waves of frequency 36 kHz. Speed of sound at surrounding temperature is 350 m/s.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 17
There is an ultrasonic frequency detector fitted in the car. Calculate the frequency recorded by this detector. The ultrasonic waves radiated by the bat are reflected by the car. The bat detects these waves and from the detected frequency, it knows about the speed of the car. Calculate the frequency of the reflected waves as detected by the bat. (sin 37° = cos 53° ~ 0.6, sin 53° = cos 37° ~ 0.8)
Answer:
The components of velocities of the bat and the car, along the line joining them, are
vc cos 53° ~ 50 × 0.6 = 30 m s-1 and
vB cos 37° ~ 12.5 × 0.8 = 10 m s-1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 18
Doppler shifted frequency n = n0 (\(\frac {v±v_1}{v±v_s}\))
upper signs to be used during approach, lower signs during recede.
Case I: Frequency radiated by the bat
n0 = 36 × 10³ Hz,
The source (bat) is receding, while the listener (car) is approaching
vS = vB cos 37° = 10 m/s and
VL = vC cos 53° = 30 m/s
∴ Frequency detected by the detector in the car,
n = n0 (\(\frac {v+v_L}{v+v_s}\))
∴ n = 36 × 10³ (\(\frac {350+30}{350+10}\)) = 36 × 10³ × \(\frac {38}{36}\)
∴ n = 38 × 10³ Hz = 38 kHz

Case II: The car is the source.
Emitted frequency by the car, is given as,
n0 = 38 × 10³ Hz,
Car, the source, is approaching the listener (bat).
Now bat-the listener is receding while car the source is approaching,
∴ vs = vc cos 53° = 30 m/s
∴ vL = vB cos 37° = 10 m/s
∴ n = n0 (\(\frac {v-v_L}{v-v_s}\))
∴ n = 38 × 10³ (\(\frac {350-10}{350-30}\)) = 38 × 10³ × \(\frac {34}{33}\)
= 39.15 × 10³ Hz
∴ n = 39.15 kHz

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 53.
Source of sound is placed at one end of a copper bar of length 1 km. Two sounds are heard at the other end at an interval of 2.75 seconds, (speed of sound in air = 330 m/s)
i. Why do we hear two sounds?
ii. Find the velocity of sound in copper.
Answer:
i. Two sounds are heard because sound travels through air as well as through copper.

ii. In air, t1 = \(\frac {distence}{time}\) = \(\frac {1000}{330}\) = 3.03 s
As the time interval is 2.75 seconds and sound travels faster in copper.
∴ In copper, t2 = 3.03 – 2.75 = 0.28 s
∴ velocity of sound in copper = \(\frac {1000}{0.28}\) = 3571 m/s

Question 54.
If all the persons mentioned in the table below are listening to a match commentary on the same channel at their respective locations positioning at same distance from television, then will they hear the same line of the commentary at same instant of time? Justify your answer.

Name of a person Location Humidity
Aijun Bangalore 65 %
Virendra Hyderabad 56%
Vikas Delhi 54%
Nilesh Mumbai 75%

Answer:
As the order of humidity for the above locations is Mumbai > Bangalore > Hyderabad > Delhi.
As velocity of sound increases with increase in humidity, the order of velocity of sound at their respective locations is Mumbai > Bangalore > Hyderabad > Delhi.
Hence, the order of persons who would listen the line of commentary first to last is Nilesh, Arjun, Virendra, Vikas.

Question 55.
Speed of sound is greater during day than at night. True or False? Justify your answer.
Answer:
True. At night, the amount of CO2 in atmosphere increases the density of atmosphere. Since, Speed of sound is inversely proportional to the square root of density. Hence, speed of sound is greater during day than in night.

Question 56.
Case I: During summer (33 °C), Prakash was waiting for a train at the platform, train arrived tt seconds after he heard train’s whistle.
Case II: During winter (19 °C), train arrived t2 seconds after Prakash heard the sound of train’s whistle.
i. Will t2 be equal to t1? Justify your answer.
ii. Calculate the velocity of sound in both the cases.
(velocity of sound in air at 0 °C = 330 m/s)
Answer:
i. Velocity of sound is directly proportional to square root of absolute temperature.
Hence, whistle’s sound will be first heard by Prakash in summer than in winter.
Therefore, the time interval between sound and train reaching Prakash in summer will be more than in winter.
i.e.,t1 > t2

ii. When t = 33 °C
∴ v1 = v0 + 0.61t
= 330 + 0.61 × 33
∴ v1 = 350.13 m/s
When t = 19 °C
v2 = v0 + 0.61t
= 330 + 0.61 × 19
v2 = 341.59 m/s

Question 57.
You are at a large outdoor concert, seated 300 m from speaker system. The concert is also being broadcast live. Consider a listener 5000 km away who receives the broadcast. Who will hear the music first, you or listener and by what time difference? (Speed of light = 3 × 108 m/s and speed of sound in air = 343 m/s)
Answer:
s1 = 300 m,
v1 = 343 m/s,
∴ t1 = \(\frac {s_1}{v_1}\) = \(\frac {300}{343}\) = 0.8746 s
Now,
s2 = 5000 km = 5 × 106 m,
v2 = c = 3 × 108 m/s
∴ t2 = \(\frac {s_2}{c}\) = \(\frac {5×10^6}{3×10^8}\) = 0.0167 s
∴ t2 < t1
∴ Listener will hear the music first.
Time difference = t1 – t2
= 0.8746 – 0.0167
= 0.8579 s
The listener will hear the music first, about 0.8579 s before the person present at the concert.

Question 58.
When a source of sound moves towards a stationary observer, then the pitch increases. Give reason.
Answer:
When a source of sound moves towards a stationary observer, then the increase in pitch is due to actual or apparent change in wavelength. When the source of sound moves towards an observer at rest, waves get compressed and the effective velocity of sound waves relative to source becomes less than the actual velocity. Hence the wavelength of sound waves an decreases which results into increase in pitch.

Question 59.
In the examples given below, state if the wave motion is transverse, longitudinal or a combination of both?

  1. Light waves travelling from Sun to Earth.
  2. ultrasonic waves in air produced by a vibrating quartz crystal.
  3. Waves produced by a motor boat sailing in water.

Answer:

  1. Light waves (from Sun to Earth) are electromagnetic waves which are transverse in nature.
  2. Ultrasonic waves in air are basically sound waves of frequency greater than the audible frequencies. Therefore, these waves are longitudinal.
  3. The water surface is cut laterally and pushed backwards by the propeller of motor boat. Therefore, the waves produced are a mixture of longitudinal and transverse waves.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 60.
Internet my friend
Answer:
https://hyperphysics.phys-astr.gsu.edu/ hbase/hframe.html
[Students are expected to visit the above mentioned website and collect more information about sound.]

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Water waves are …………….
(A) longitudinal
(B) transverse
(C) both longitudinal and transverse
(D) neither longitudinal nor transverse
Answer:
(C) both longitudinal and transverse

Question 2.
Sound travels fastest in ……………..
(A) water
(B) air
(C) steel
(D) kerosene oil
Answer:
(C) steel

Question 3.
At room temperature, velocity of sound in air at 10 atmospheric pressure and at 1 atmospheric pressure will be in the ratio ……………..
(A) 10 : 1
(B) 1 : 10
(C) 1 : 1
(D) cannot say
Answer:
(C) 1 : 1

Question 4.
In a gas, velocity of sound varies directly as ………………
(A) square root of isothermal elasticity.
(B) square of isothermal elasticity.
(C) square root of adiabatic elasticity.
(D) adiabatic elasticity.
Answer:
(C) square root of adiabatic elasticity.

Question 5.
At a given temperature, velocity of sound in oxygen and in hydrogen has the ratio …………………
(A) 4 : 1
(B) 1 : 4
(C) 1 : 1
(D) 2 : 1
Answer:
(B) 1 : 4

Question 6.
With decrease in water vapour content in air, velocity of sound …………………..
(A) increases
(B) decreases
(C) remains constant
(D) cannot say
Answer:
(B) decreases

Question 7.
The temperature at which speed of sound in air becomes double its value at 0 °C is ……………….
(A) 546 °C
(B) 819 °C
(C) 273 °C
(D) 1092 °C
Answer:
(B) 819 °C

Question 8.
The velocity of sound in air at NTP is 330 m/s. What will be its value when temperature is doubled and pressure is halved?
(A) 330 m/s
(B) 165 m/s
(C) 330 √2 m/s
(D) \(\frac {330}{√2}\) m/s
Answer:
(D) \(\frac {330}{√2}\) m/s

Question 9.
A series of ocean waves, each 5.0 m from crest to crest, moving past the observer at a rate of 2 waves per second have wave velocity
(A) 2.5 m/s
(B) 5.0 m/s
(C) 8.0 m/s
(D) 10.0 m/s
Answer:
(D) 10.0 m/s

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 10.
A radio station broadcasts at 760 kHz. What is the wavelength of the station?
(A) 395 m
(B) 790 m
(C) 760 m
(D) 197.5 m
Answer:
(A) 395 m

Question 11.
If the bulk modulus of water is 2100 MPa, what is the speed of sound in water?
(A) 1450 m/s
(B) 2100 m/s
(C) 0.21 m/s
(D) 21 m/s
Answer:
(A) 1450 m/s

Question 12.
If speed of sound in air at 0°C is 331 m/s. What will be its value at 35° C?
(A) 331 m/s
(B) 366 m/s
(C) 351.6 m/s
(D) 332 m/s.
Answer:
(C) 351.6 m/s

Question 13.
For a progressive wave, in the usual notation
(A) v = λT
(B) n = \(\frac {v}{λ}\)
(C) T = λv
(D) λ = \(\frac {1}{n}\)
Answer:
(B) n = \(\frac {v}{λ}\)

Question 14.
At normal temperature, for an echo to be heard the reflecting surface should be at a minimum distance of ………………. m.
(A) 34.4
(B) 17.2
(C) 10
(D) 20
Answer:
(B) 17.2

Question 15.
In a transverse wave, are regions of negative displacement.
(A) rarefactions
(B) compressions
(C) crests
(D) troughs
Answer:
(D) troughs

Question 16.
If pressure of air gets doubled at constant temperature then velocity of sound in air ……………….
(A) gets doubled
(B) remains unchanged
(C) √2 times initial velocity
(D) becomes half
Answer:
(B) remains unchanged

Question 17.
Wave motion has ……………………
(A) single periodicity.
(B) double periodicity.
(C) only periodicity in space.
(D) only periodicity in time.
Answer:
(B) double periodicity.

Question 18.
The speed of the mechanical wave depends upon ………………
(A) elastic properties of the medium only.
(B) density of the medium only.
(C) elastic properties and density of the medium
(D) initial speed.
Answer:
(C) elastic properties and density of the medium

Question 19.
Longitudinal waves CANNOT be …………………
(A) reflected
(B) refracted
(C) scattered
(D) polarised
Answer:
(D) polarised

Question 20.
Wavelength of the transverse wave is 30 cm. If the particle at some instant has displacement 2 cm, find the displacement of the particle 15 cm away at the same instant.
(A) 2 cm
(B) 17 cm
(C) -2 cm
(D) -17 cm
Answer:
(C) -2 cm

Question 21.
The wavelength of sound in air is 1.5 m and that in liquid is 2 m. If the velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s, the velocity of sound in liquid is
(A) 330 m/s
(B) 440 m/’s
(C) 495 m/s
(D) 660 m/s
Answer:
(B) 440 m/’s

Question 22.
The velocity of sound in a gas is 340 m/s at the pressure P, what will be the velocity of the gas when only pressure is doubled and temperature same?
(A) 170 m/s
(B) 243 m/s
(C) 340 m/s
(D) 680 m/s
Answer:
(C) 340 m/s

Question 23.
Choose the correct statement.
(A) For 1 °C rise in temperature, velocity of sound increases by 0.61 m/s.
(B) For 1 °C rise in temperature, velocity of sound decreases by 0.61 m/s.
(C) For 1 °C rise in temperature, velocity of sound decreases by \(\frac {1}{273}\) m/s.
(D) For 1 °C rise in temperature, velocity of sound increases by \(\frac {1}{273}\) m/s.
Answer:
(A) For 1 °C rise in temperature, velocity of sound increases by 0.61 m/s.

Question 24.
A sound note emitted from a certain source has a velocity of 300 m/s in air and 1050 m/s in water. If the wavelength of sound note in air is 2 m, the wavelength in water is …………
(A) 2 m
(B) 6 m
(C) 7 m
(D) 12 m
Answer:
(C) 7 m

Question 25.
A thunder clap was heard 6 seconds after a lightening flash was seen. If the speed of sound in air is 340 m/s at the time of observation, the distance of the listener from the thunder clap is ………………
(A) 56.6 m
(B) 346 m
(C) 1020 m
(D) 2040 m
Answer:
(D) 2040 m

Question 26.
The speed of sound in air at NTP is 330 m/s. The period of sound wave of wavelength 66 cm is …………………
(A) 0.2 s
(B) 0.1
(C) 0.1 × 10-2 s
(D) 0.2 × 10-2 s
Answer:
(D) 0.2 × 10-2 s

Question 27.
If the velocity of sound in hydrogen is 1248 m/s, the velocity of sound in oxygen is [Given: MO = 32 and MH = 2]
(A) 1248 m/s
(B) 624 m/s
(C) 312 m/s
(D) 300 m/s
Answer:
(C) 312 m/s

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 28.
If the source is moving away from the observer, then the apparent frequency …………..
(A) will increase
(B) will remain the same
(C) will be zero
(D) will decrease
Answer:
(D) will decrease

Question 29.
The working of SONAR is based on …………………
(A) resonance
(B) speed of a star
(C) Doppler effect
(D) speed of rotation of sun
Answer:
(C) Doppler effect

Question 30.
The formula for speed of a transverse wave on a stretched spring is ……………… (m = linear mass density, T = tension in Spring)
(A) v = \(\sqrt{\frac {m}{T}}\)
(B) v = \(\sqrt{\frac {T}{m}}\)
(C) v = (\(\frac {m}{T}\))\(\frac {3}{2}\)
(D) v = (\(\frac {T}{m}\))\(\frac {3}{2}\)
Answer:
(B) v = \(\sqrt{\frac {T}{m}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 1.
What is Phosphorylation?
Answer:
It is the formation of ATP, by addition inorganic phosphate to ADP.
ADP + Pi → ATP
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 2.
What are the different ways of Phosphorylation?
Answer:
Phosphorylation occurs in three different ways as – photophosphorylation, substrate-level phosphorylation and oxidative phosphorylation.

Question 3.
What is Substrate-level phosphorylation? Where does it occur?
Answer:
Substrate-level phosphorylation is a direct phosphorylation of ADP by transfer of a phosphate group from any suitable substrate. It occurs in cytoplasm of the cells and matrix of mitochondria.

Question 4.
What is oxidative phosphorylation? Mention the site of this reaction.
Answer:
In oxidative phosphorylation ATP is synthesize by using the energy released during the oxidation of substrates like NADH + H+ and FADH2. This occurs on the inner mitochondrial membrane only.

Question 5.
When is ATP hydrolysed?
Answer:
ATP is hydrolysed whenever energy is required for any metabolic reactions.

Question 6.
What is respiration?
Answer:
Respiration is a catabolic process wherein complex organic substrate is oxidized to simple components to generate biological energy, i.e. ATP.

Question 7.
Give an example for anabolic and catabolic process.
Answer:
Anabolic process- Photosynthesis (Biosynthetic process).
Caiabolic process- Respiration (Breakdown process).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 8.
Name the following.

  1. The substrate that undergoes oxidation during oxidative phosphorylation
  2. The phosphorylation that occurs only in inner mitochondria! membrane
  3. Two ways of cellular respiration

Answer:

  1. NADH+H+ and FADH2
  2. Oxidative phosphorylation
  3. Anaerobic and aerobic respiration

Question 9.
What is anaerobic respiration?
Answer:
1. Anaerobic respiration is the cellular respiration that does not involve the atmospheric oxygen. It is also called as fermentation.
2. It involves glycolysis where the product of glycolysis i.e. pyruvate is converted to either lactic acid or ethanol.

Question 10.
What is glycolysis? Describe various steps involved in glycolysis.
OR
Describe the process involved in formation of pyruvic acid from glucose molecule.
OR
What is glycolysis? Describe the process of glycolysis with the help of schematic representation.
Answer:
Glycolysis is a process where glucose is broken down into two molecules of pyruvic acid, hence called glycolysis (glucose-breaking). It is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration. It occurs in the cytoplasm of the cell. It involves ten steps.
Glycolysis consists of two major phases:
1. Preparatory phase (1-5 steps).
2. Payoff phase (6-10 steps).
1. Preparatory phase:
a. In this phase, glucose is phosphorylated twice by using two ATP molecules and a molecule of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate is formed.
b. It is then cleaved into two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate and dihydroxy acetone phosphate. These two molecules are 3-carbon carbohydrates (trioses) and are isomers of each other.
c. Dihydroxy acetone phosphate is isomerised to second molecule of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate.
d. Therefore, two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate are formed.
e. Preparatory phase of glycolysis ends.

2. Payoff phase:
a. In this phase, both molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate are converted to two molecules of 1,3- bisphoglycerate by oxidation and phosphorylation. Here, the phosphorylation is brought about by inorganic phosphate instead of ATP.
b. Both molecules of 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate are converted into two molecules of pyruvic acid through series of reactions accompanied with release of energy. This released energy is used to produce ATP (4 molecules) by substrate-level phosphorylation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 11.
Write down the overall chemical reaction of a process in which glucose in broken down to two molecules of pyruvic acid.
Answer:
Overall reaction of glycolysis:
Glucose + 2 ATP + 2iP + 4 ADP + 2 NAD+ → 2 Pyruvate + 2 ADP + 4 ATP + 2 NADH + 2 Ha+ + 2 H2O

Question 12.
Write explanatorv notes on: Glycolysis
Answer:
Glycolysis is a process where glucose is broken down into two molecules of pyruvic acid, hence called glycolysis (glucose-breaking). It is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration. It occurs in the cytoplasm of the cell. It involves ten steps.
Glycolysis consists of two major phases:
1. Preparatory phase (1-5 steps).
2. Payoff phase (6-10 steps).
1. Preparatory phase:
a. In this phase, glucose is phosphorylated twice by using two ATP molecules and a molecule of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate is formed.
b. It is then cleaved into two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate and dihydroxy acetone phosphate. These two molecules are 3-carbon carbohydrates (trioses) and are isomers of each other.
c. Dihydroxy acetone phosphate is isomerised to second molecule of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate.
d. Therefore, two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate are formed.
e. Preparatory phase of glycolysis ends.

2. Payoff phase:
a. In this phase, both molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate are converted to two molecules of 1,3- bisphoglycerate by oxidation and phosphorylation. Here, the phosphorylation is brought about by inorganic phosphate instead of ATP.
b. Both molecules of 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate are converted into two molecules of pyruvic acid through series of reactions accompanied with release of energy. This released energy is used to produce ATP (4 molecules) by substrate-level phosphorylation.

Question 13.
How glycolysis is regulated?
Answer:
Glycolysis is strongly regulated by the complex interplay between ATP consumption, NADH2 regeneration and regulation of various glycolytic enzymes like hexokinase, PFK-1, pyruvate kinase, etc. Besides, it is also controlled by hormones like glucagon, epinephrine and insulin.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 14.
Where does glycolysis take place in a cell?
Answer:
Glycolysis takes place in the cytoplasm of a cell.

Question 15.
What are the products of cleavage in glycolysis?
Answer:
Dihydroxyacetone phosphate (DHAP) and 3-phosphoglyceraldehyde (3-PGAL) are the products of cleavage in glycolysis.

Question 16.
Where does dehydration occur in glycolysis?
Answer:
In glycolysis, dehydration occurs when 2-Phosphoglyceric acid loses a water molecule (dehydration) to form phosphoenol pyruvic acid in presence of the enzyme enolase.

Question 17.
Name the process which is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration.
Answer:
Glycolysis is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration.

Question 18.
Name the enzymes that catalyse the irreversible reactions.
Answer:
Hexokinase, Phosphoffuctokinase, Phosphoglycerate kinase and Pyruvate kinase are the enzymes that catalyse the irreversible reactions.

Question 19.
Where glycolysis is the only source of energy production?
Answer:
Glycolysis is only source of energy production in erythrocytes, renal medulla, brain and sperm.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 20.
Which type of muscle fibres are rich in myoglobin?
Answer:
Red muscles are rich in myoglobin.

Question 21.
Which type of muscle fibre mainly performs anaerobic respiration?
Answer:
White muscle fibres mainly performs anaerobic respiration.

Question 22.
What is lactic acid fermentation?
Answer:
It is a process of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvic acid undergoes reduction by addition of one proton and two electrons donated by NADH+H+ to form lactic acid as the product and NAD+ as the byproduct of oxidation. Skeletal muscles usually derive energy by this process. It is represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 3

Question 23.
What is the fate of pyruvate in yeast?
Answer:
Yeast shows both aerobic and anaerobic respiration depending upon the presence or absence of oxygen.
1. In absence of oxygen, the pyruvate undergoes anaerobic respiration where it is decarboxylated to acetaldehyde. The acetaldehyde is then reduced by NADH+H to ethanol and carbon dioxide. This type of anaerobic respiration is termed alcoholic fermentation.
2. In the presence of oxygen however, it can respire aerobically to produce C02 and H20.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 24.
What is alcoholic fermentation?
Answer:
Alcoholic fermentation is a type of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvate is decarboxylated to acetaldehyde. The acetaldehyde is then reduced by NADH+H+ to ethanol and Carbon dioxide. Since ethanol is produced during the process, it is termed alcoholic fermentation. It is represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 4

Question 25.
Name the process of respiration which does not involve intake of oxygen (02) and release of carbon dioxide (C02).
Answer:
Lactic acid fermentation is the process of anaerobic respiration which does not involve intake of oxygen (02) and release of carbon dioxide (C02).

Question 26.
Why yeast stops multiplying in the culture after alcoholic fermentation?
Answer:
After alcoholic fermentation the multiplication of yeast stops because the alcohol formed during the process kills the yeast cells.

Question 27.
What is aerobic respiration?
Answer:

  1. Aerobic respiration occurs in the presence of free molecular oxygen during oxidation of glucose.
  2. In this type of respiration, the glucose is completely oxidized to C02 and H20 with release of large amount of energy.
  3. It involves glycolysis, acetyl CoA formation (connecting link reaction), Krebs cycle, electron transfer chain reaction and terminal oxidation.

Question 28.
Where does aerobic respiration occur in eukaryotic cell?
Answer:
Aerobic respiration occurs in the mitochondria in eukaryotes.

Question 29.
Explain the conversion of pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA.
OR
Describe the connecting link between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.
Answer:

  1. The conversion of pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA is an oxidative decarboxylation reaction.
  2. It is catalyzed by a multienzyme complex-pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDH). This enzyme is present in mitochondria of eukaryotes and cytosol of prokaryotes.
  3. This reaction is called as ‘connecting link’ reaction between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 5

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 30.
Name the following.
1. Which enzymes converts pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA?
2. Name the coenzyme required by pyruvate dehydrogenase.
Answer:
1. Pyruvate dehydrogenase
2. Thiamin (vitamin Bi)

Question 31.
Why is acetyl Co-A called connecting link between glycolysis and Krebs cycle?
Answer:

  1. The conversion of pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA is an oxidative decarboxylation reaction.
  2. It is catalyzed by a multienzyme complex-pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDH). This enzyme is present in mitochondria of eukaryotes and cytosol of prokaryotes.
  3. This reaction is called as ‘connecting link’ reaction between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.

Question 32.
Why vitamin Bi is important for maintaining good health?
Answer:
1. Pyruvate dehydrogenase (PDH) requires thiamin (vitamin Bi) as a co-enzyme. It cannot function in absence of vitamin B1.
2. Thiamin deficiency causes many disorders such as pyruvic acidosis and lactic acidosis, which are life threatening conditions. Hence, it is required to maintain good health.

Question 33.
Describe Citric acid cycle.
OR
With the help of schematic representation explain Krebs cycle.
Answer:

  1. Krebs cycle or citric acid cycle is the second phase of aerobic respiration which takes place in the matrix of the mitochondria.
  2. The acetyl CoA formed during the link reaction undergoes aerobic oxidation.
  3. This cycle serves a common oxidative pathway for carbohydrates, fats and proteins.
  4. In mitochondria pyruvic acid is decarboxylated and the remaining 2-carbon fragment is combined with a molecule of coenzyme A to form acetyl-CoA.
  5. This reaction is an oxidative decarboxylation process and produces H+ ions and electrons along with carbon dioxide.
  6. During the process NAD+ is reduced to NADH+H+.
  7. P-oxidation of fatty acids also produces acetyl-CoA as the end product.
  8. Acetyl-CoA from both sources is condensed with oxaloacetic acid to form citric acid. Citric acid is oxidized step-wise by mitochondrial enzymes, releasing carbon dioxide.
  9. Regeneration of oxaloacetic acid occurs to complete the cycle.
  10. There are four steps of oxidation in this cycle, catalyzed by dehydrogenases (oxidoreductases) using NAD+ or FAD+ as the coenzyme.
  11. The coenzymes are consequently reduced to NADH+H+ and FADH2 respectively. These transfer their electrons to the mitochondrial respiratory chain to get reoxidised.
  12. One molecule of GTP (ATP) is also generated for every molecule of citric acid oxidized.

Question 34.
What is the site of Krebs cycle in mitochondria?
Answer:
Krebs cycle takes place in the mitochondrial matrix.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 35.
Match the following:

Column I Column II Column III
1. Krebs cycle (a) 1,3-Bisphosphoglycerate → 3-Phosphoglycerate (p) Pyruvate dehydrogenase
2. Glycolysis (b) Succinyl CoA → Succinate (q) NADH dehydrogenase
3. ETS (c) Pyruvic acid → Acetyl CoA (r) Two ATP are produced
4. Link reaction (d) Transfer of electrons from Complex to Ubiquinone (s) Succinyl CoA – synthetase

Answer:

Column I Column II Column III
1. Krebs cycle (b) Succinyl CoA → Succinate (s) Succinyl CoA – synthetase
2. Glycolysis (a) 1,3-Bisphosphoglycerate → 3-Phosphoglycerate (r) Two ATP are produced
3. ETS (d) Transfer of electrons from Complex I to Ubiquinone (q) NADH dehydrogenase
4. Link reaction (c) Pyruvic acid → Acetyl CoA (p) Pyruvate dehydrogenase

Question 36.
Explain ETS.
OR
Illustrate the mechanism of electron transport system.
OR
Give an account of ATP generation steps during ETS.
OR
Explain the mechanism of electron transportation system (ETS).
OR
Explain terminal oxidation.
Answer:

  1. NADH2 and FADH2 produced during glycolysis, connecting link reaction and Krebs cycle are oxidized with the help of various electron carriers and enzymes.
  2. These carriers and enzymes are arranged on inner mitochondrial membrane in the form of various complexes as complex I, II, III, VI and V.
  3. NADH+H+ is oxidised by NADH dehydrogenase (complex I) and it’s electrons are transferred to ubiquinone (coenzyme Q-CoQ) present on inner membrane of mitochondria. Reduced ubiquinone is called as ubiqunol.
  4. FADH2 is oxidised by complex II (Succinate dehydrogenase) and these electrons are also transferred to CoQ.
  5. The open end of the glass tube (delivery tube) is dipped into lime water containing in a test tube (Tube B).
  6. Stoppers of both the tubes are fitted tightly to prevent leakage of gases. First test tube is placed in warm water (37° C-38° C) in a beaker.
  7. Lime water gradually turns milky, indicating the evolution of carbon dioxide from the yeast preparation.
  8. Level of the lime water in the delivery tube does not rise, showing that there is no decline in volume of gas in test tube A and consequently no utilization of oxygen by yeast. Preparation is stored for a day or two.
  9. When we open the stopper of tube A we will notice a smell of alcohol indicating the formation of ethanol.
  10. From this activity it may be inferred that yeast respires anaerobically to ferment glucose to ethanol and carbon dioxide.

Question 37.
Explain the significance of electron transport system.
Answer:
Significance of ETS:

  1. Major amount of energy is generated through ETS or terminal oxidation in the form of ATP molecules.
  2. Per glucose molecule 38 ATP molecules are formed, out of which 34 ATP molecules are produced through ETS.
  3. Oxidized coenzymes such as NAD and FAD are regenerated from their reduced forms (NADH+H+ and FADH2) for recycling.
  4. In this process, energy is released in a controlled and stepwise manner to prevent any damage to the cell.
  5. ETS produces water molecules.

Question 38.
What is oxidative phosphorylation?
Answer:
Oxidative phosphorylation: It is a metabolic pathway that uses energy released by the oxidation of substrates to produce ATP.

  1. Oxidative phosphorylation takes place in the mitochondrial membrane.
  2. Many intermediate products during respiration are oxidised and release 2H+.
  3. The released hydrogen is trapped by NAD+ or FAD+.
  4. Electrons pass through electron transport system to produce ATP and metabolic water.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 39.
Give the balance sheet of ATP formed in aerobic respiration.
Answer:

Step of Respiration Consumption Production Total Net
benefit
Substrate level phosphorylation 1 Oxidative Phosphorylation
NADH+ H+ FADH2 Total
Glycolysis 2 4 2 × 3 = 6 ___________ 6 10 8
Pyruvate → AcetylCoA _______________ ___________ 2 × 3 = 6 ___________ 6 6 6
Krebs cycle _______________ 1 × 2 = 2 6 × 3 = 18 2×2 = 4 22 24 24
Total 2             [6]             30 + 4 = [34]             m             38

Question 40.
With the help of an experiment explain how yeast respires anaerobically.
Answer:
Respiration in yeast can be demonstrated with the help of an experiment.
Anaerobic respiration in yeast:

  1. A pinch of dry baker’s yeast suspended in water containing 10ml of 10% glucose in a test tube (test tube A).
  2. The surface of the liquid is covered with oil to prevent entry of air and the test tube is closed tightly with rubber stopper to prevent leakage.
  3. One end of a short-bent glass tube is inserted through it to reach the air inside the tube.
  4. Other end of the glass tube is connected by a polyethylene or rubber tubing to another bent glass tube fitted into a stopper.
  5. The open end of the glass tube (delivery tube) is dipped into lime water containing in a test tube
    (Tube B).
  6. Stoppers of both the tubes are fitted tightly to prevent leakage of gases. First test tube is placed in warm water (37° C-38° C) in a beaker.
  7. Lime water gradually turns milky, indicating the evolution of carbon dioxide from the yeast preparation.
  8. Level of the lime water in the delivery tube does not rise, showing that there is no decline in volume of gas in test tube A and consequently no utilization of oxygen by yeast. Preparation is stored for a day or two.
  9. When we open the stopper of tube A we will notice a smell of alcohol indicating the formation of ethanol.
  10. From this activity it may be inferred that yeast respires anaerobically to ferment glucose to ethanol and carbon dioxide.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 6

Question 41.
With the help of an experiment explain how germinating seeds respire.
Answer:

  1. Seed coats of a few germinating seeds (peas, beans or gram) are removed and are then put in a test tube filled with mercury.
  2. After closing the test tube with the thumb, it is vertically inverted in a trough of mercury and the thumb is carefully removed.
  3. Being lighter than mercury, the seeds rise to the closed upper end of the test Uibe. No gas is seen at first in the test tube.
  4. As germination proceeds, a gas begins to collect at the top of the mercury in the test tube.
  5. On introducing a pellet of potassium hydroxide into the tube, it rises to the top and absorbs the gas. The mercury again fills the tube.
  6. The potassium hydroxide reacts with carbon dioxide gas to produce potassium carbonate and water.
  7. The gas therefore disappears. Evidently germinating seeds produce carbon dioxide by anaerobic respiration in the absence of oxygen in the mercury column.

[Note: Mercury is toxic chemical. Proper precautions must be taken while performing this experiment ]
[Note: Students can scan the adjacent QR code to get conceptual clarity with the aid of a relevant example.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 42.
Give the significance of respiration.
OR
Write a short note on significance of respiration.
Answer:

  1. Respiration provides energy for biosynthesis of biomolecules.
  2. It is also a source of energy for cell division, growth, repairs and replacement of worn out parts, movements,
    locomotion etc.
  3. Various intermediates of Krebs cycle are used as building blocks for synthesis of other complex compounds.
  4. Coupled with photosynthesis, it helps to maintain the balance between C02 and O2 in the atmosphere.
  5. Anaerobic respiration (fermentation) is used in various industries such as dairies, bakeries, distilleries, leather industries, paper industries etc. It is used in the commercial production of alcohol, organic acids, vitamins, antibiotics etc.

Question 43.
Match the following:

Column I Column II Column III
1. Krebs cycle (a) 1,3-Bisphosphoglycerate → 3-Phosphoglycerate (p) Pyruvate dehydrogenase
2. Glycolysis (b) Succinyl CoA Succinate (q) NADH dehydrogenase
3. ETS (c) Pyruvic acid → Acetyl CoA (r) Two ATP are produced
4. Link reaction (d) Transfer of electrons from Complex I to Ubiquinone (s) Succinyl CoA – synthetase

Answer:

Column I Column II Column III
1. Krebs cycle (b) Succinyl CoA Succinate (s) Succinyl CoA – synthetase
2. Glycolysis (a) 1,3-Bisphosphoglycerate → 3-Phosphoglycerate (r) Two ATP are produced
3. ETS (d) Transfer of electrons from Complex I to Ubiquinone (q) NADH dehydrogenase
4. Link reaction (c) Pyruvic acid → Acetyl CoA (p) Pyruvate dehydrogenase

Question 44.
Apply Your Knowledge

Question 1.
While teaching respiration professor said that oxygen is important for respiration in humans, Rakesh kept thinking, where exactly oxygen is required during cellular respiration? What would be the correct explanation for his doubt?
Answer:
Oxygen is very important for life, we humans cannot survive without oxygen. Glycolysis, link reaction and Krebs cycle do not involve oxygen. In cellular reaction, oxygen is required only during ETS where it acts as an electron acceptor hence leading to terminal oxidation where it gets converted into water called metabolic water.

The process of respiration is very fast and occurs continuously as cell require continuous supply of energy to carry out metabolic activities, thus, we require oxygen for cellular respiration even when we are sleeping.

Question 2.
Sonal while studying ETS had a doubt, why FADH2 yields only 2 ATP’s whereas NADH2 yields three ATP’s? What would be the correct explanation for her doubt?
Answer:

  1. During ETS, NADH2 and FADH2 undergoes oxidation where they are converted to NAD+ and FAD+ respectively.
  2. During this conversion, hydrogen is removed, which latter forms proton and electron. This electron so formed is passed on to different electron carriers. During this transfer of electron, energy is released which is used in ATP synthesis.
  3. In case of NADH2, energy is released at three places hence results into formation of 3 ATPs whereas, in case of FADH2 energy is released at only two places, hence results into formation of only 2 ATPs.
  4. Here, the ATP formation occurs by Chemiosmotic hypothesis.

Question 45.
Quick Review

Various steps involved in glycolysis:

Step(s) Substrate Enzyme End product(s)
Phosphorylation Glucose + ATP Hexokinase Glucose – 6 – Phosphate + ADP
Isomerisation Glucose – 6-Phosphate Phosphohexose isomerase Fructose – 6 – Phosphate
Phosphorylation Fructose – 6-Phosphate + ATP (Phosphate donor) Phosphofructokinase Fructose 1,6-Diphosphate + ADP
Cleavage Fructose -1, 6-Diphosphate Aldolase 3 – Phosphoglyceraldehyde + Dihydroxyacetone phosphate
Phosphorylation and Dehydrogenation 3-PGAL + H3PO4 + NAD+ Triosephosphate

dehydrogenase

1, 3 Diphosphoglyceric acid + NADH + H+
Dephosphorylation 1, 3-DPGA + ADP Diphosphoglycerate kinase (Mg2) ATP + 3-Phosphoglyceric acid
Rearrangement 3-PGA Phosphoglycerate mutase 2-Phosphoglyceric acid
Dehydration 2-PGA Enolase Phosphoenol Pyruvic acid + H20
Dephosphorylation Phosphoenol Pyruvic acid +ADP Pyruvate kinase Pyruvic acid + ATP

Various steps involved in Krebs cycle:

Step(s) Substrate Enzyme End product(s)
Condensation Acetyl-CoA+Oxalo- acetic acid + H20 Citrate synthase Citric acid (6C) + Coenzyme- A
Dehydration
Hydration
It is again completed in two steps:
Citric acid
Cis-Aconitic acid + H20
Aconitase
Aconitase
Cis-Aconitic acid + H20 Iso-citric acid(6C)
Oxidative decarboxylation a. Isocitric acid + NAD+ Isocitrate dehydrogenase Oxalo succinic acid(6C) + NADH + H+
b. Oxalosuccinic acid Isocitrate dehydrogenase a – ketoglutaric acid(5C) + CO
Oxidative Decarboxylation. (-2H) (-C02) a-Ketoglutaric acid + H20 + NAD + Coenzyme A a-Ketoglutarate dehydrogenase complex Succinyl-CoA(4C) + NADH + H++co2
Substrate level phosphorylation Succinyl – Co A + GDP + iP Succinyl CoA synthetase Succinic acid (4C) + Coenzyme-A + GTP
Dehydrogenation (-2H) Succinic acid + FAD (H-acceptor) Succinate dehydrogenase Fumaric acid (4C) + FADH2
Hydration(+H20) Fumaric acid + H20 Hydration(+H20) Fumaric acid + H20
Dehydrogenation (-2H) Malic acid + NAD+ (H-acceptor) Dehydrogenation (-2H) Malic acid + NAD+ (H-acceptor)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 7

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 46.
Exercise

Question 1.
Define phosphorylation.
Answer:
It is the formation of ATP, by addition inorganic phosphate to ADP.
ADP + Pi → ATP

Question 2.
Mention the different ways of phosphorylation.
Answer:
Phosphorylation occurs in three different ways as – photophosphorylation, substrate-level phosphorylation and oxidative phosphorylation.

Question 3.
Define substrate-level phosphorylation.
Answer:
Substrate-level phosphorylation is a direct phosphorylation of ADP by transfer of a phosphate group from any suitable substrate. It occurs in cytoplasm of the cells and matrix of mitochondria.

Question 4.
What is fermentation?
Answer:
1. Anaerobic respiration is the cellular respiration that does not involve the atmospheric oxygen. It is also called as fermentation.
2. It involves glycolysis where the product of glycolysis i.e. pyruvate is converted to either lactic acid or ethanol.

Question 5.
Where does glycolysis occurs?
Answer:
Glycolysis is a process where glucose is broken down into two molecules of pyruvic acid, hence called glycolysis (glucose-breaking). It is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration. It occurs in the cytoplasm of the cell. It involves ten steps.
Glycolysis consists of two major phases:
1. Preparatory phase (1-5 steps).
2. Payoff phase (6-10 steps).
1. Preparatory phase:
a. In this phase, glucose is phosphorylated twice by using two ATP molecules and a molecule of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate is formed.
b. It is then cleaved into two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate and dihydroxy acetone phosphate. These two molecules are 3-carbon carbohydrates (trioses) and are isomers of each other.
c. Dihydroxy acetone phosphate is isomerised to second molecule of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate.
d. Therefore, two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate are formed.
e. Preparatory phase of glycolysis ends.

2. Payoff phase:
a. In this phase, both molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate are converted to two molecules of 1,3- bisphoglycerate by oxidation and phosphorylation. Here, the phosphorylation is brought about by inorganic phosphate instead of ATP.
b. Both molecules of 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate are converted into two molecules of pyruvic acid through series of reactions accompanied with release of energy. This released energy is used to produce ATP (4 molecules) by substrate-level phosphorylation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 6.
What is glycolysis? Explain with the help of schematic representation.
Answer:
Glycolysis is a process where glucose is broken down into two molecules of pyruvic acid, hence called glycolysis (glucose-breaking). It is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration. It occurs in the cytoplasm of the cell. It involves ten steps.
Glycolysis consists of two major phases:
1. Preparatory phase (1-5 steps).
2. Payoff phase (6-10 steps).
1. Preparatory phase:
a. In this phase, glucose is phosphorylated twice by using two ATP molecules and a molecule of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate is formed.
b. It is then cleaved into two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate and dihydroxy acetone phosphate. These two molecules are 3-carbon carbohydrates (trioses) and are isomers of each other.
c. Dihydroxy acetone phosphate is isomerised to second molecule of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate.
d. Therefore, two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate are formed.
e. Preparatory phase of glycolysis ends.

2. Payoff phase:
a. In this phase, both molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate are converted to two molecules of 1,3- bisphoglycerate by oxidation and phosphorylation. Here, the phosphorylation is brought about by inorganic phosphate instead of ATP.
b. Both molecules of 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate are converted into two molecules of pyruvic acid through series of reactions accompanied with release of energy. This released energy is used to produce ATP (4 molecules) by substrate-level phosphorylation.

Question 7.
Define fermentation. What are the different types of fermentation?
Answer:
1. Anaerobic respiration is the cellular respiration that does not involve the atmospheric oxygen. It is also called as fermentation.
2. It involves glycolysis where the product of glycolysis i.e. pyruvate is converted to either lactic acid or ethanol.
It is a process of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvic acid undergoes reduction by addition of one proton and two electrons donated by NADH+H+ to form lactic acid as the product and NAD+ as the byproduct of oxidation. Skeletal muscles usually derive energy by this process.
Alcoholic fermentation is a type of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvate is decarboxylated to acetaldehyde. The acetaldehyde is then reduced by NADH+H+ to ethanol and Carbon dioxide. Since ethanol is produced during the process, it is termed alcoholic fermentation.

Question 8.
Name the products of lactic acid fermentation.
Answer:
It is a process of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvic acid undergoes reduction by addition of one proton and two electrons donated by NADH+H+ to form lactic acid as the product and NAD+ as the byproduct of oxidation. Skeletal muscles usually derive energy by this process.

Question 9.
Write the chemical reaction of lactic acid fermentation.
Answer:
It is a process of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvic acid undergoes reduction by addition of one proton and two electrons donated by NADH+H+ to form lactic acid as the product and NAD+ as the byproduct of oxidation. Skeletal muscles usually derive energy by this process.

Question 10.
Explain alcoholic fermentation.
Answer:
Alcoholic fermentation is a type of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvate is decarboxylated to acetaldehyde. The acetaldehyde is then reduced by NADH+H+ to ethanol and Carbon dioxide. Since ethanol is produced during the process, it is termed alcoholic fermentation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 11.
Less energy is produced during anaerobic respiration that in aerobic respiration. Justify.
Answer:
Anaerobic respiration produces less energy because:

  1. Incomplete breakdown of respiratory substrate takes place.
  2. Some of the products of anaerobic respiration can be oxidised further to release energy which shows that anaerobic respiration does not liberate the whole energy contained in the respiratory substrate.
  3. NADH2 does not produce ATP, as electron transport is absent.
  4. Only 2 ATP molecules are generated from one molecule of glucose during anaerobic respiration.

Question 12.
Enlist steps involved in aerobic respiration.
Answer:
It involves glycolysis, acetyl CoA formation (connecting link reaction), Krebs cycle, electron transfer chain reaction and terminal oxidation.

Question 13.
Write the reaction of connecting link between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.
Answer:
This reaction is called as ‘connecting link’ reaction between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.

Question 14.
How glycolysis is regulated?
Answer:
Glycolysis is strongly regulated by the complex interplay between ATP consumption, NADH2 regeneration and regulation of various glycolytic enzymes like hexokinase, PFK-1, pyruvate kinase, etc. Besides, it is also controlled by hormones like glucagon, epinephrine and insulin.

Question 15.
Write the significance of ETS.
Answer:
Significance of ETS:

  1. Major amount of energy is generated through ETS or terminal oxidation in the form of ATP molecules.
  2. Per glucose molecule 38 ATP molecules are formed, out of which 34 ATP molecules are produced through ETS.
  3. Oxidized coenzymes such as NAD and FAD are regenerated from their reduced forms (NADH+H+ and FADH2) for recycling.
  4. In this process, energy is released in a controlled and stepwise manner to prevent any damage to the cell.
  5. ETS produces water molecules.

Question 16.
Give the schematic representation of glycolysis.
Answer:
Glycolysis is a process where glucose is broken down into two molecules of pyruvic acid, hence called glycolysis (glucose-breaking). It is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration. It occurs in the cytoplasm of the cell. It involves ten steps.
Glycolysis consists of two major phases:
1. Preparatory phase (1-5 steps).
2. Payoff phase (6-10 steps).
1. Preparatory phase:
a. In this phase, glucose is phosphorylated twice by using two ATP molecules and a molecule of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate is formed.
b. It is then cleaved into two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate and dihydroxy acetone phosphate. These two molecules are 3-carbon carbohydrates (trioses) and are isomers of each other.
c. Dihydroxy acetone phosphate is isomerised to second molecule of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate.
d. Therefore, two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate are formed.
e. Preparatory phase of glycolysis ends.

2. Payoff phase:
a. In this phase, both molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate are converted to two molecules of 1,3- bisphoglycerate by oxidation and phosphorylation. Here, the phosphorylation is brought about by inorganic phosphate instead of ATP.
b. Both molecules of 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate are converted into two molecules of pyruvic acid through series of reactions accompanied with release of energy. This released energy is used to produce ATP (4 molecules) by substrate-level phosphorylation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 17.
Describe the formation of Acetyl Co-A in respiration.
Answer:

  1. The conversion of pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA is an oxidative decarboxylation reaction.
  2. It is catalyzed by a multienzyme complex-pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDH). This enzyme is present in mitochondria of eukaryotes and cytosol of prokaryotes.
  3. This reaction is called as ‘connecting link’ reaction between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.

Question 18.
Give the schematic representation of the overall view of Krebs cycle.
Answer:

  1. Krebs cycle or citric acid cycle is the second phase of aerobic respiration which takes place in the matrix of the mitochondria.
  2. The acetyl CoA formed during the link reaction undergoes aerobic oxidation.
  3. This cycle serves a common oxidative pathway for carbohydrates, fats and proteins.
  4. In mitochondria pyruvic acid is decarboxylated and the remaining 2-carbon fragment is combined with a molecule of coenzyme A to form acetyl-CoA.
  5. This reaction is an oxidative decarboxylation process and produces H+ ions and electrons along with carbon dioxide. During the process NAD+ is reduced to NADH+H+.
  6. P-oxidation of fatty acids also produces acetyl-CoA as the end product.
  7. Acetyl-CoA from both sources is condensed with oxaloacetic acid to form citric acid. Citric acid is oxidized step-wise by mitochondrial enzymes, releasing carbon dioxide.
  8. Regeneration of oxaloacetic acid occurs to complete the cycle.
  9. There are four steps of oxidation in this cycle, catalyzed by dehydrogenases (oxidoreductases) using NAD+ or FAD+ as the coenzyme.
  10. The coenzymes are consequently reduced to NADH+H+ and FADH2 respectively. These transfer their electrons to the mitochondrial respiratory chain to get reoxidised.
  11. One molecule of GTP (ATP) is also generated for every molecule of citric acid oxidized.

Question 19.
Explain why the respiratory pathway is an amphibolic pathway?
Answer:

  1. Respiration is considered as a catabolic process; however, it is not entirely correct in case of Krebs cycle.
  2. Many reactions of Krebs cycle involve oxidation of acetyl CoA to release energy and C02.
  3. However, the breakdown of respiratory substrates provides intermediates like a-ketoglutarate, oxaloacetate are used as precursors for synthesis of fatty acids, glutamic acid and aspartic acid respectively.
  4. Thus, as the same respiratory process acts as catabolic as well as anabolic pathway for synthesis of various intermediate metabolic products, it is called amphibolic pathway.

Question 20.
Write a detailed note on the connecting link between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.
Answer:

  1. The conversion of pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA is an oxidative decarboxylation reaction.
  2. It is catalyzed by a multienzyme complex-pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDH). This enzyme is present in mitochondria of eukaryotes and cytosol of prokaryotes.
  3. This reaction is called as ‘connecting link’ reaction between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.

Question 21.
Give the diagrammatic representation of ETS.
Answer:

  1. NADH2 and FADH2 produced during glycolysis, connecting link reaction and Krebs cycle are oxidized with the help of various electron carriers and enzymes.
  2. These carriers and enzymes are arranged on inner mitochondrial membrane in the form of various complexes as complex I, II, III, VI and V.
  3. NADH+H+ is oxidised by NADH dehydrogenase (complex I) and it’s electrons are transferred to ubiquinone (coenzyme Q-CoQ) present on inner membrane of mitochondria. Reduced ubiquinone is called as ubiqunol.
  4. FADH2 is oxidised by complex II (Succinate dehydrogenase) and these electrons are also transferred to CoQ.
  5. During oxidation of NADH+H+ and FADH2, electrons and protons are released but only electrons are canned forward whereas protons are released into outer chamber of mitochondria (intermembrane space).
  6. Ubiquinol is oxidised by complex-III (Cytochrome bcl complex) and it’s electrons are transferred to cytochrome C.
  7. Cytochrome C is a small, iron-containing protein, loosely associated with inner membrane. It acts as a mobile electron carrier, transferring the electrons between complex III and IV.
  8. Cytochrome C is oxidised by complex IV or cytochrome C oxidase consisting of cytochrome a and a3. Electrons are transferred by this complex to the molecular oxygen. This is terminal oxidation.
  9. Reduced molecular oxygen reacts with protons to form water molecule called as metabolic water.
  10. Protons necessary for this are channelled from outer chamber of mitochondria into inner chamber by F0 part of oxysome (complex V) present in inner mitochondrial membrane.
  11. This proton channelling by F0 is coupled to catalytic site of F1 which catalyses the synthesis of ATP from ADP and inorganic phosphate. This is oxidative phosphorylation.
  12. As transfer of protons is accompanied with synthesis of ATP, this process is named as ‘Chemiosmosis’ by Peter Mitchell.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 22.
Explain the process of terminal oxidation. Give its significance (any two points).
Answer:

  1. NADH2 and FADH2 produced during glycolysis, connecting link reaction and Krebs cycle are oxidized with the help of various electron carriers and enzymes.
  2. These carriers and enzymes are arranged on inner mitochondrial membrane in the form of various complexes as complex I, II, III, VI and V.
  3. NADH+H+ is oxidised by NADH dehydrogenase (complex I) and it’s electrons are transferred to ubiquinone (coenzyme Q-CoQ) present on inner membrane of mitochondria. Reduced ubiquinone is called as ubiqunol.
  4. FADH2 is oxidised by complex II (Succinate dehydrogenase) and these electrons are also transferred to CoQ.
  5. During oxidation of NADH+H+ and FADH2, electrons and protons are released but only electrons are canned forward whereas protons are released into outer chamber of mitochondria (intermembrane space).
  6. Ubiquinol is oxidised by complex-III (Cytochrome bcl complex) and it’s electrons are transferred to cytochrome C.
  7. Cytochrome C is a small, iron-containing protein, loosely associated with inner membrane. It acts as a mobile electron carrier, transferring the electrons between complex III and IV.
  8. Cytochrome C is oxidised by complex IV or cytochrome C oxidase consisting of cytochrome a and a3. Electrons are transferred by this complex to the molecular oxygen. This is terminal oxidation.
  9. Reduced molecular oxygen reacts with protons to form water molecule called as metabolic water.
  10. Protons necessary for this are channelled from outer chamber of mitochondria into inner chamber by F0 part of oxysome (complex V) present in inner mitochondrial membrane.
  11. This proton channelling by F0 is coupled to catalytic site of F1 which catalyses the synthesis of ATP from ADP and inorganic phosphate. This is oxidative phosphorylation.
  12. As transfer of protons is accompanied with synthesis of ATP, this process is named as ‘Chemiosmosis’ by Peter Mitchell.

Question 23.
1. Enlist the main steps involved in aerobic respiration and their place of occurrence.
2. Differentiate between photosynthesis and aerobic respiration.
Answer:
1. Glycolysis takes place in the cytoplasm of a cell.
2. It is catalyzed by a multienzyme complex-pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDH). This enzyme is present in mitochondria of eukaryotes and cytosol of prokaryotes.,
3. Krebs cycle or citric acid cycle is the second phase of aerobic respiration which takes place in the matrix of the mitochondria. and These carriers and enzymes are arranged on inner mitochondrial membrane in the form of various complexes as complex I, II, III, VI and V.

Question 24.
1. Give the schematic representation of ETS.
2. Differentiate between respiration and combustion.
Answer:

  1. NADH2 and FADH2 produced during glycolysis, connecting link reaction and Krebs cycle are oxidized with the help of various electron carriers and enzymes.
  2. These carriers and enzymes are arranged on inner mitochondrial membrane in the form of various complexes as complex I, II, III, VI and V.
  3. NADH+H+ is oxidised by NADH dehydrogenase (complex I) and it’s electrons are transferred to ubiquinone (coenzyme Q-CoQ) present on inner membrane of mitochondria. Reduced ubiquinone is called as ubiqunol.
  4. FADH2 is oxidised by complex II (Succinate dehydrogenase) and these electrons are also transferred to CoQ.
  5. During oxidation of NADH+H+ and FADH2, electrons and protons are released but only electrons are canned forward whereas protons are released into outer chamber of mitochondria (intermembrane space).
  6. Ubiquinol is oxidised by complex-III (Cytochrome bcl complex) and it’s electrons are transferred to cytochrome C.
  7. Cytochrome C is a small, iron-containing protein, loosely associated with inner membrane. It acts as a mobile electron carrier, transferring the electrons between complex III and IV.
  8. Cytochrome C is oxidised by complex IV or cytochrome C oxidase consisting of cytochrome a and a3. Electrons are transferred by this complex to the molecular oxygen. This is terminal oxidation.
  9. Reduced molecular oxygen reacts with protons to form water molecule called as metabolic water.
  10. Protons necessary for this are channelled from outer chamber of mitochondria into inner chamber by F0 part of oxysome (complex V) present in inner mitochondrial membrane.
  11. This proton channelling by F0 is coupled to catalytic site of F1 which catalyses the synthesis of ATP from ADP and inorganic phosphate. This is oxidative phosphorylation.
  12. As transfer of protons is accompanied with synthesis of ATP, this process is named as ‘Chemiosmosis’ by Peter Mitchell.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 25.
Enlist the different respiratory substrate.
Answer:
Respiratory substrates are the molecules that are oxidized during respiration to release energy which can be used for ATP synthesis. Carbohydrates, fats and proteins are the common respiratory substrate. Glucose is the most common respiratory substrate.

Question 26.
Define R.Q. What is its value for fats?
Answer:
1. Respiratory quotient (R.Q.) or respiratory ratio is the ratio of volume of CO2 released to the volume of O2 consumed in respiration.
2. R.Q. = Volume of CO2 released/Volume of O2 consumed

Question 27.
Write the significance of respiration.
Answer:

  1. Respiration provides energy for biosynthesis of biomolecules.
  2. It is also a source of energy for cell division, growth, repairs and replacement of worn out parts, movements,
    locomotion etc.
  3. Various intermediates of Krebs cycle are used as building blocks for synthesis of other complex compounds.
  4. Coupled with photosynthesis, it helps to maintain the balance between C02 and O2 in the atmosphere.
  5. Anaerobic respiration (fermentation) is used in various industries such as dairies, bakeries, distilleries, leather industries, paper industries etc. It is used in the commercial production of alcohol, organic acids, vitamins, antibiotics etc.

Question 47.
Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
Respiration is regarded as a ________ process.
(A) catabolic
(B) anabolic
(C) reduction
(D) synthetic
Answer:
(A) catabolic

Question 2.
Anaerobic respiration is also called as ________ .
(A) Glycolysis
(B) fermentation
(C) phosphoryaltion
(D) decarboxylation
Answer:
(B) fermentation

Question 3.
The first compound formed in glycolysis is
(A) Glucose-6-phosphate
(B) Glucose-1,6-biphosphate
(C) Fructose-6-phosphate
(D) Pyruvic acid
Answer:
(A) Glucose-6-phosphate

Question 4.
Which of the following compounds in last step of glycolysis gives pyruvic acid?
(A) 3 – phosphoglyceraldehyde
(B) dihydroxy acetone phosphate
(C) phosphoenolpyruvate
(D) 2-phosphoglycerate
Answer:
(C) phosphoenolpyruvate

Question 5.
In glycolysis, dehydration occurs during formation of
(A) 3 – phosphoglyceraldehyde
(B) 2 – phosphoglycerate
(C) phosphoenolpyruvate
(D) dihydroxyacetone phosphate
Answer:
(B) 2 – phosphoglycerate

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 6.
In which of the following steps dehydrogenation occurs?
(A) Glucose → Glucose 6-phosphate
(B) 3-phophoglcerate → 2-phophoglccratc
(C) phosphoenolpyruvate → pyruvate
(D) 3 – phosphoglyceraldehyde → 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate
Answer:
(D) 3 – phosphoglyceraldehyde → 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate

Question 7.
The compound common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration is
(A) C02
(B) pyruvic acid
(C) acetyl CoA
(D) free oxygen
Answer:
(B) pyruvic acid

Question 8.
Which compound is found both in respiration and photosynthesis?
(A) Phosphoglycerate
(B) Phosphoglyceraldehyde
(C) Both (A) and (B)
(D) Succinic acid
Answer:
(C) Both (A) and (B)

Question 9.
Which type of respiration does not release C02?
(A) Aerobic respiration
(B) Alcoholic fermentation
(C) Lactic acid fermentation
(D) Krebs cycle
Answer:
(C) Lactic acid fermentation

Question 10.
What is the overall goal of glycolysis, Krebs cycle and electron transport system?
(A) Synthesis of ATP in fermentation reaction
(B) Carbohydrates
(C) Nucleic acids
(D) ATP in small stepwise units
Answer:
(D) ATP in small stepwise units

Question 11.
The intermediate between glycolysis and TCA cycle is:
(A) Lactic acid
(B) Acetaldehyde
(C) Fructose-6-phosphate
(D) Acetyl Co-A
Answer:
(D) Acetyl Co-A

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 12.
During alcoholic fermentation, decarboxylation of pyruvate gives
(A) acetaldehyde
(B) lactic acid
(C) ethyl alcohol
(D) methyl alcohol
Answer:
(A) acetaldehyde

Question 13.
Where the link reaction occurs in prokaryotes?
(A) cytoplasm
(B) mitochondrial matrix
(C) cell membrane
(D) mitochondrial membrane
Answer:
(A) cytoplasm

Question 14.
In Krebs cycle, dehydration of substrate occurs
(A) once
(B) twice
(C) thrice
(D) four times
Answer:
(A) once

Question 15.
Which of the following steps generate ATP without ETS?
(A) Pyruvic acid → Acetyl Co-A
(B) ∝-ketoglutarate → Succinic acid
(C) Iso-citric acid → Oxalosuccinic acid
(D) Succinyl Co-A → Succinic acid
Answer:
(D) Succinyl Co-A → Succinic acid

Question 16.
In Krebs cycle, the acid which undergoes oxidative decarboxylation is
(A) citric acid
(B) succinic acid
(C) malic acid
(D) ∝-ketoglutaric acid
Answer:
(D) ∝-ketoglutaric acid

Question 17.
During Krebs cycle, fumaric acid gets converted into malic acid by
(A) decarboxylation
(B) dehydrogenation
(C) dehydration
(D) hydration
Answer:
(D) hydration

Question 18.
Krebs cycle is also called TCA cycle because
(A) the first compound formed is citric acid.
(B) it was discovered by Sir Hans Krebs.
(C) organic acids formed have 3 carboxylic acid groups.
(D) acetyl Co-A is formed
Answer:
(C) organic acids formed have 3 carboxylic acid groups.

Question 19.
Which of the following compound is the acceptor of Acetyl Co-A in Krebs cycle?
(A) Oxaloacetic acid
(B) Fumaric acid
(C) Malic acid
(D) Oxalo succinic acid
Answer:
(A) Oxaloacetic acid

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 20.
Which of the following compounds is formed in Krebs cycle from fumaric acid?
(A) Oxalo acetic acid
(B) Malic acid
(C) ∝-KGA
(D) Citric acid
Answer:
(B) Malic acid

Question 21.
Which of the following step of aerobic respiration would be omitted when fatty acids are used as respiratory substrate?
(A) Glycolysis
(B) Krebs cycle
(C) Electron transfer chain reaction
(D) Terminal oxidation.
Answer:
(A) Glycolysis

Question 22.
During Krebs cycle, decarboxylation occurs _______ time/s.
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
Answer:
(B) 2

Question 23.
The conversion of malic acid to oxalo acetic acid is catalyzed by
(A) malate reductase
(B) malate thiokinase
(C) fumarase
(D) malate dehydrogenase
Answer:
(D) malate dehydrogenase

Question 24.
Electron carriers of oxidative phosphorylation are present on
(A) outer membrane of mitochondria.
(B) inner membrane of mitochondria.
(C) thylakoid membrane of chloroplast.
(D) matrix of mitochondria.
Answer:
(B) inner membrane of mitochondria.

Question 25.
Which of the following derives maximum energy per molecule of glucose?
(A) Alcoholic fermentation.
(B) Lactic acid fermentation.
(C) Aerobic respiration in unicellular organisms.
(D) Glycolysis in liver cells.
Answer:
(C) Aerobic respiration in unicellular organisms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 26.
The cytochrome which donates de-energised electron to oxygen is
(A) cytochrome-a
(B) cytochrome-b
(C) cytochrome-a3
(D) cytochrome-c
Answer:
(C) cytochrome-a3

Question 27.
In terminal oxidation FADH2 is oxidized by
(A) complex I
(B) complex II
(C) complex III
(D) complex IV
Answer:
(B) complex II

Question 28.
The net gain of energy from a molecule of glucose in the aerobic respiration is
(A) 38
(B) 35
(C) 70
(D) 76
Answer:
(A) 38

Question 29.
Each molecule of NADH2 through ETS yields
(A) 1 ATP
(B) 2 ATPs
(C) 3 ATPs
(D) 4 ATPs
Answer:
(C) 3 ATPs

Question 30.
One glucose molecule, through ETS yields
(A) 2 ATP molecules
(B) 3 ATP molecules
(C) 34 ATP molecules
(D) 38 ATP molecules
Answer:
(C) 34 ATP molecules

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 31.
The adenosine triphosphate (ATP) gain during glycolysis, connecting link and Krebs cycle respectively are _______ .
(A) 8, 6,24
(B) 8,24, 6
(C) 24, 8, 6
(D) 6, 8, 24
Answer:
(A) 8, 6,24

Question 32.
The respiratory quotient (R.Q.) of carbohydrate is ________ .
(A) 0.7
(B) 1
(C) 0.9
(D) 0.1
Answer:
(B) 1

Question 33.
R. Q. for proteins is about _______ .
(A) 0.7
(B) 0.8
(C) 0.9
(D) 1.0
Answer:
(C) 0.9

Question 48.
Competitive Corner:

Question 1.
Which of the following statements regarding mitochondria is INCORRECT?
(A) Inner membrane is convoluted with infoldings.
(B) Mitochondrial matrix contains single circular DNA molecule and ribosomes.
(C) Outer membrane is permeable to monomers of carbohydrates, fats and proteins.
(D) Enzymes of electron transport are embedded in outer membrane.
Hint: Enzymes of electron transport are embedded in inner membrane.
Answer:
(D) Enzymes of electron transport are embedded in outer membrane.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 2.
Where is the respiratory electron transport system (ETS) located in plants?
(A) Intermembrane space
(B) Mitochondrial matrix
(C) Outer mitochondrial membrane
(D) Inner mitochondrial membrane
Answer:
(D) Inner mitochondrial membrane

Question 3.
In case of anaerobic respiration, the R.Q is _____ .
(A) always less than one
(B) always more than one
(C) always infinity
(D) Variable on the basis of substrate.
Answer:
(C) always infinity

Question 4.
The net gain of ATP molecules during aerobic breakdown of one glucose molecule is _______ .
(A) 40
(B) 38
(C) 36
(D) 30
Answer:
(B) 38

Question 5.
During glycolysis the compounds PGAL and DHAP are formed from fructose 1,6- diphosphate by _______ .
(A) cleavage
(B) isomerisation
(C) phosphorylation
(D) condensation
Answer:
(A) cleavage

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 6.
Number of oxygen molecules utilized in glycolysis is ________ .
(A) 0
(B) 2
(C) 4
(D) 6
Answer:
(A) 0

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Balbharati Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

1. Fill in the Blanks.

Question 1.
__________ is the area of law that deals with the Internet’s relationship to technological and electronic elements.
Answer:
Cyberlaw

Question 2.
__________ is the part of the overall legal system that deals with the Internet, cyberspace, and their respective legal issues.
Answer:
Cyberlaw

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 3.
__________ covers a fairly broad area, encompassing several subtopics including freedom of expression, access to and usage of the Internet, and online privacy.
Answer:
Cyberlaw

Question 4.
The attempts to change outdated laws and provides ways to deal with cybercrimes.
Answer:
Information Technology Act 2000

Question 5.
The Act offers the much-needed legal framework so that information is not denied.
Answer:
Information Technology

Question 6.
The Act has also proposed a legal framework for the authentication and origin of an electronic records.
Answer:
Information Technology

Question 7.
__________ is also called moral philosophy is the discipline concerned with what is morally good and bad, right or wrong.
Answer:
Ethics

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 8.
__________ is the standards of behaviour; principles of right and wrong behaviour.
Answer:
Morals

Question 9.
Thus __________ are dictated by society, culture or religion.
Answer:
Morals

Question 10.
Computer Crime is alternatively referred to as __________
Answer:
Cybercrime

Question 11.
Computer crime is an act performed by a knowledgeable computer user, sometimes referred to as a __________
Answer:
Hacker

Question 12.
A __________ who illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information.
Answer:
Hacker

Question 13.
__________ can involve criminal activities that are traditional in nature, such as theft, fraud, forgery, defamation and mischief.
Answer:
Cybercrimes

Question 14.
__________ is nothing but copyright violation of software created originally by an individual or an institution.
Answer:
Software piracy

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 15.
__________ includes stealing of codes/programs and other information illegally and creating the imitated copy by unauthorized means.
Answer:
Software piracy

Question 16.
Gaining access without the users’ permission is known as __________
Answer:
Unauthorized Access

Question 17.
__________ means granting access rights to resources.
Answer:
Authorization

Question 18.
A __________ is a legal right that gives the creator of a literary, artistic, musical, or other creative work.
Answer:
Copyright

Question 19.
__________ owners have the right to control the reproduction of their work, including the right to receive the royalty payment for that reproduction.
Answer:
Copyright

Question 20.
Activity such as decipher codes or passwords and breaking security systems for illegal reasons is called __________
Answer:
Cracking

Question 21.
The cracker will use a program or script known as a __________
Answer:
Crack

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 22.
__________ is a criminal practice where an individual uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone.
Answer:
Cyberstalking

Question 23.
__________ is a technique of extracting confidential information such as credit card numbers and username password combos by pretending as a legal enterprise.
Answer:
Phishing

Question 24.
__________ is typically carried out by email spoofing.
Answer:
Phishing

Question 25.
__________ is presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent.
Answer:
Plagarism

Question 26.
__________ refers to unauthorised intrusion into a computer or a network.
Answer:
Hacking

Question 27.
__________ is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer operating system and programming language.
Answer:
Hacker

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 28.
__________ is a method of converting the original message into random text.
Answer:
Encryption

Question 29.
Full form of SSL is __________
Answer:
Secure Socket Layer

Question 30.
Through the __________, transmission of data is encrypted.
Answer:
Secure Socket Layer

Question 31.
__________ refers to a network security (Hardware and Software) system which blocks certain types of information.
Answer:
Firewall

Question 32.
__________ is an Act to provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange and other means of electronic communication.
Answer:
Information Technology Act, 2000

Question 33.
__________ aims to provide the legal infrastructure for E-Commerce in India.
Answer:
Information Technology Act, 2000

Question 34.
The __________ have a major impact on E-Businesses and the new economy in India.
Answer:
Cyber laws

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 35.
The __________ also aims to provide for the legal framework.
Answer:
Information Technology Act, 2000

Question 36.
__________ has been replaced with the electronic signature to make it a more technology-neutral act.
Answer:
Digital Signature

2. True or False.

Question 1.
Criminal Law is the area of law that deals with the Internet’s relationship to technological and electronic elements.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
Cyberlaw is the part of the overall legal system that deals with the Internet, cyberspace, and their respective legal issues.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
Cyberlaw covers a fairly broad area, encompassing several subtopics including freedom of expression, access to and usage of the Internet, and online privacy.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 4.
The Information Technology Act 2000 attempts to change outdated laws and provides ways to deal with cybercrimes.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
The Information Technology Act offers the much-needed legal framework so that information is not denied.
Answer:
True

Question 6.
The Computer Act has also proposed a legal framework for the authentication and origin of an electronic records.
Answer:
False

Question 7.
Morals are also called moral philosophy is the discipline concerned with what is morally good and bad, right or wrong.
Answer:
False

Question 8.
Ethics is the standards of behaviour; principles of right and wrong behaviour.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
Thus Morals are dictated by society, culture, or religion.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
Computer Crime is alternatively referred to as Hacker.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 11.
Computer crime is an act performed by a knowledgeable computer user, sometimes referred to as a Hacker.
Answer:
True

Question 12.
A Cybercrime who illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information.
Answer:
False

Question 13.
Cybercrimes can involve criminal activities that are traditional in nature, such as theft, fraud, forgery, defamation, and mischief.
Answer:
True

Question 14.
Software piracy is nothing but copyright violation of software created originally by an individual or an institution.
Answer:
True

Question 15.
Unauthorized access includes stealing of codes/programs and other information illegally and creating the imitated copy by unauthorized means.
Answer:
False

Question 16.
Gaining access without the user’s permission is known as Software piracy.
Answer:
False

Question 17.
Authorization means granting access rights to resources.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 18.
Cracking is a legal right that gives the creator of a literary, artistic, musical, or other creative work.
Answer:
False

Question 19.
Copyright owners have the right to control the reproduction of their work, including the right to receive the royalty payment for that reproduction.
Answer:
True

Question 20.
Activity such as decipher codes or passwords and breaking security systems for illegal reasons is called copyright.
Answer:
False

Question 21.
The cracker will use a program or script known as a Crack.
Answer:
True

Question 22.
Cyberstalking is a criminal practice where an individual uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone.
Answer:
True

Question 23.
Phishing is a technique of extracting confidential information such as credit card numbers and username password combos by pretending as a legal enterprise.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 24.
Phishing is typically carried out by email spoofing.
Answer:
True

Question 25.
Plagiarism is presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent.
Answer:
True

Question 26.
Hacking refers to unauthorized intrusion into a computer or a network.
Answer:
True

Question 27.
Hacker is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer operating system and programming language.
Answer:
True

Question 28.
Encryption is a method of converting the original message into random text.
Answer:
True

Question 29.
The full form of SSL is Secure Socket Layer.
Answer:
True

Question 30.
Through the Encryption transmission of data is encrypted.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 31.
Encryption refers to a network security (Hardware and Software) system which blocks certain types of information.
Answer:
False

Question 32.
A digital signature is an Act to provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange and other means of electronic communication.
Answer:
False

Question 33.
Information Technology Act, 2000 aims to provide the legal infrastructure for E-Commerce in India.
Answer:
True

Question 34.
Cyber laws have a major impact on E-Businesses and the new economy in India.
Answer:
True

Question 35.
The Information Technology Act, 2000 also aims to provide for the legal framework.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 36.
Cyber laws have been replaced with electronic signatures to make it a more technology-neutral act.
Answer:
False

3. Multiple Choice Question (Single Choice)

Question 1.
__________ is the area of law that deals with the Internet’s relationship to technological and electronic elements.
(A) Cyberlaw
(B) Criminal Law
(C) Business Law
(D) Internet Law
Answer:
(A) Cyberlaw

Question 2.
__________ is the part of the overall legal system that deals with the Internet, cyberspace, and their respective legal issues.
(A) Cyberlaw
(B) Criminal Law
(C) Business Law
(D) Internet Law
Answer:
(A) Cyberlaw

Question 3.
__________ covers a fairly broad area, encompassing several subtopics including freedom of expression, access to and usage of the Internet, and online privacy.
(A) Cyberlaw
(B) Criminal Law
(C) Business Law
(D) Internet Law
Answer:
(A) Cyberlaw

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 4.
The __________ attempts to change outdated laws and provides ways to deal with cybercrimes.
(A) Information Technology Act 2000
(B) Cyber Rule
(C) Computer Act
(D) Legal Act
Answer:
(A) Information Technology Act 2000

Question 5.
The __________ Act offers the much-needed legal framework so that information is not denied.
(A) Cyber Rule
(B) Information Technology
(C) Computer Act
(D) Legal Act
Answer:
(B) Information Technology

Question 6.
The __________ Act has also proposed a legal framework for the authentication and origin of an electronic records.
(A) Cyber Rule
(B) Information Technology
(C) Computer Act
(D) Legal Act
Answer:
(B) Information Technology

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 7.
__________ is also called moral philosophy is the discipline concerned with what is morally good and bad, right or wrong.
(A) Ethics
(B) Morals
(C) Society
(D) Culture
Answer:
(A) Ethics

Question 8.
__________ is the standards of behaviour; principles of right and wrong behaviour.
(A) Ethics
(B) Morals
(C) Society
(D) Culture
Answer:
(B) Morals

Question 9.
Thus __________ are dictated by society, culture or religion.
(A) Ethics
(B) Morals
(C) Society
(D) Culture
Answer:
(B) Morals

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 10.
Computer Crime is alternatively referred to as __________
(A) Cybercrime
(B) Hacker
(C) Computer crime
(D) Illegal Act
Answer:
(A) Cybercrime

Question 11.
Computer crime is an act performed by a knowledgeable computer user, sometimes referred to as a __________
(A) Cybercrime
(B) Hacker
(C) Computer crime
(D) Illegal Act
Answer:
(B) Hacker

Question 12.
A __________ who illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information.
(A) Cybercrime
(B) Hacker
(C) Computer crime
(D) Illegal Act
Answer:
(B) Hacker

Question 13.
__________ can involve criminal activities that are traditional in nature, such as theft, fraud, forgery, defamation, and mischief.
(A) Cybercrimes
(B) Hacker
(C) Computer crime
(D) Illegal Act
Answer:
(A) Cybercrimes

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 14.
__________ is nothing but copyright violation of software created originally by an individual or an institution.
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(A) Software piracy

Question 15.
__________ includes stealing of codes/programs and other information illegally and creating the imitated copy by unauthorized means.
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(A) Software piracy

Question 16.
Gaining access without the users’ permission is known as __________
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(B) Unauthorized access

Question 17.
__________ means granting access rights to resources.
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(C) Authorization

Question 18.
A __________ is a legal right that gives the creator of a literary, artistic, musical, or other creative work.
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(D) Copyright

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 19.
__________ owners have the right to control the reproduction of their work, including the right to receive the royalty payment for that reproduction.
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(D) Copyright

Question 20.
Activity such as decipher codes or passwords and breaking security systems for illegal reasons is called __________
(A) Cracking
(B) Crack
(C) Cyberstalking
(D) Phishing
Answer:
(A) Cracking

Question 21.
The cracker will use a program or script known as a __________
(A) Cracking
(B) Crack
(C) Cyberstalking
(D) Phishing
Answer:
(B) Crack

Question 22.
__________ is a criminal practice where an individual uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone.
(A) Cracking
(B) Crack
(C) Cyberstalking
(D) Phishing
Answer:
(C) Cyberstalking

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 23.
__________ is a technique of extracting confidential information such as credit card numbers and username password combos by pretending as a legal enterprise.
(A) Cracking
(B) Crack
(C) Cyberstalking
(D) Phishing
Answer:
(D) Phishing

Question 24.
__________ is typically carried out by email spoofing.
(A) Cracking
(B) Crack
(C) Cyberstalking
(D) Phishing
Answer:
(D) Phishing

Question 25.
__________ is presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent.
(A) Plagiarism
(B) Hacking
(C) Hacker
(D) A. Cracking
Answer:
(A) Plagarism

Question 26.
__________ refers to unauthorised intrusion into a computer or a network.
(A) Plagiarism
(B) Hacking
(C) Hacker
(D) Cracking
Answer:
(B) Hacking

Question 27.
__________ is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer operating system and programming language.
(A) Plagiarism
(B) Hacking
(C) Hacker
(D) Cracking
Answer:
(C) Hacker

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 28.
__________ is a method of converting the original message into random text.
(A) Encryption
(B) Secure Socket Layer
(C) Firewall
(D) Hardware
Answer:
(A) Encryption

Question 29.
Full form of SSL is __________
(A) Secure Socket Layer
(B) Secure Switch Layer
(C) Secure Session Lesson
(D) System Secure Layer
Answer:
(A) Secure Socket Layer

Question 30.
Through the __________, transmission of data is encrypted.
(A) Secure Socket Layer
(B) Secure Switch Layer
(C) Secure Session Lesson
(D) System Secure Layer
Answer:
(A) Secure Socket Layer

Question 31.
__________ refers to a network security (Hardware and Software) system which blocks certain types of information.
(A) Encryption
(B) Secure Socket Layer
(C) Firewall
(D) Hardware
Answer:
(C) Firewall

Question 32.
__________ is an Act to provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange and other means of electronic communication.
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000
(B) Cyber laws
(C) Digital Signature
(D) Digital Certificate
Answer:
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 33.
__________ aims to provide the legal infrastructure for e-commerce in India.
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000
(B) Cyber laws
(C) Digital signature
(D) Digital Certificate
Answer:
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000

Question 34.
The __________ have a major impact on E-Businesses and the new economy in India.
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000
(B) Cyber Laws
(C) Digital signature
(D) Digital Certificate
Answer:
(B) Cyber Laws

Question 35.
The also aims to provide for the legal framework.
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000
(B) Cyber Laws
(C) Digital signature
(D) Digital Certificate
Answer:
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000

Question 36.
__________ has been replaced with the electronic signature to make it a more technology-neutral act.
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000
(B) Cyber laws
(C) Digital Signature
(D) Digital Certificate
Answer:
(C) Digital Signature

4. Multiple Choice Two Correct Answers.

Question 1.
The Information Technology Act 2000 attempts to change outdated __________ and provides ways to deal with __________
(A) Authentication
(B) Laws
(C) Electronic record
(D) Cybercrimes
(E) Morals
Answer:
(B) Laws, (D) Cybercrimes

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 2.
The Information Technology Act has also proposed a legal framework for the __________ and origin of __________
(A) Authentication
(B) Laws
(C) Electronic record
(D) Cybercrimes
(E) Morals
Answer:
(A) Authentication, (C) Electronic record

Question 3.
Thus __________ are dictated by society, culture or religion while __________ are chosen by the person himself which governs his life.
(A) Authentication
(B) Laws
(C) Electronic record
(D) Morals
(E) Ethics
Answer:
(D) Morals, (E) Ethics

Question 4.
Hacker is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer __________ and __________
(A) Operating System
(B) Programming Language
(C) Individual
(D) Institution
(E) Passwords
Answer:
(A) Operating System, (B) Programming Language

Question 5.
Software piracy is nothing but copyright violation of software created originally by an __________ or an __________
(A) Operating system
(B) Programming language
(C) Individual
(D) Institution
(E) Passwords
Answer:
(C) Individual, (D) Institution

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 6.
Activity such as __________ or __________ and breaking security systems for illegal reasons is called cracking.
(A) Operating system
(B) Programming language
(C) Individual
(D) Decipher Codes
(E) Passwords
Answer:
(D) Decipher Codes, (E) Passwords

Question 7.
Phishing is a technique of extracting confidential information such as __________ and __________ combos by pretending as a legal enterprise.
(A) Computer
(B) Credit Card Numbers
(C) Network
(D) Username Password
(E) Programming Language
Answer:
(B) Credit Card Numbers, (D) Username Password

Question 8.
Hacking refers to unauthorised intrusion into a __________ or a __________
(A) Computer
(B) Credit Card Numbers
(C) Network
(D) Username Password
(E) Programming Language
Answer:
(A) Computer, (C) Network

Question 9.
Hacker is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer __________ and __________
(A) Operating system
(B) Programming language
(C) Individual
(D) Decipher Codes
(E) Passwords
Answer:
(A) Operating system, (B) Programming language

Question 10.
Encryption is a method of converting the __________ message into __________ text.
(A) Original
(B) Random
(C) Hardware
(D) Software
(E) Electronic communication
Answer:
(A) Original, (B) Random

Question 11.
Firewall refers to network security __________ and __________ system which blocks certain type of information.
(A) Original
(B) Random
(C) Hardware
(D) Software
(E) Electronic communication
Answer:
(C) Hardware, (D) Software

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 12.
Information Technology Act, 2000 is an Act to provide legal recognition for transaction carried out by means of __________ and other means of __________
(A) Original
(B) Random
(C) Hardware
(D) Electronic Data Interchange
(E) Electronic Communication
Answer:
(D) Electronic Data Interchange, (E) Electronic Communication

Question 13.
Information Technology Act, 2000 aims to provide the __________ infrastructure for __________ in India.
(A) Legal
(B) E-Commerce
(C) Original
(D) Random
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(A) Legal, (B) E-Commerce

5. Multiple Choice Three Correct Answers.

Question 1.
Cyberlaw is the area of law that deals with the Internet’s relationship to technological and electronic elements, including computers, __________, __________ and __________
(A) Software
(B) Internet
(C) Hardware
(D) Legal Issues
(E) Information Systems
Answer:
(A) Software, (C) Hardware, (E) Information Systems

Question 2.
Cyberlaw is the part of the overall legal system that deals with the __________, __________, and their respective __________
(A) Software
(B) Internet
(C) Cyberspace
(D) Legal Issues
(E) Information Systems
Answer:
(B) Internet, (C) Cyberspace, (D) Legal Issues

Question 3.
Cyber lawcoversafairlybroadarea,encompassingseveralsubtopicsincluding __________, access to and __________, and __________
(A) Freedom of expression
(B) Usage of the Internet
(C) Online privacy
(D) Electronic Crime
(E) Hi-Tech Crime
Answer:
(A) Freedom of expression, (B) Usage of the Internet, (C) Online privacy

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 4.
Computer Crime is alternatively referred to as __________, __________ or __________
(A) Freedom of expression
(B) Usage of the Internet
(C) Cybercrime
(D) Electronic Crime
(E) Hi-Tech Crime
Answer:
(C) Cybercrime, (D) Electronic Crime, (E) Hi-Tech Crime

Question 5.
Activity such as __________ codes or __________ and breaking __________ systems for illegal reasons is called cracking.
(A) Cyber Cafe
(B) Decipher
(C) Cyber Security
(D) Passwords
(E) Security
Answer:
(B) Decipher, (D) Passwords, (E) Security

Question 6.
The IT Act 2000 was amended in 2008 and 2011 and it includes rules for __________, __________, __________ by service provider, Audit of electronic document etc.
(A) Cyber Cafe
(B) Decipher
(C) Cyber Security
(D) Delivery of Services
(E) Security
Answer:
(A) Cyber Cafe, (C) Cyber Security, (D) Delivery of Services

6. Match the following.

Question 1.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Ethics (A) Computer Crime
(2) Morals (B) Principles of right and wrong
(3) Cyber Crime (C) Moral philosophy
(4) Hacker (D) Illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Ethics (C) Moral philosophy
(2) Morals (B) Principles of right and wrong
(3) Cyber Crime (A) Computer Crime
(4) Hacker (D) Illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information

Question 2.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Software Piracy (A) Legal right
(2) Unauthorized access (B) Gaining access without the users’ permission
(3) Authorization (C) Granting access rights to resources
(4) Copyright (D) Copyright violation of software

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Software Piracy (D) Copyright violation of software
(2) Unauthorized access (B) Gaining access without the users’ permission
(3) Authorization (C) Granting access rights to resources
(4) Copyright (A) Legal right

Question 3.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Copyright owners (A) Have the right to control the reproduction of their work
(2) Cracking (B) Will use a program or script known as a crack
(3) Cracker (C) Breaking security systems for illegal reasons
(4) Cyberstalking (D) Uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Copyright owners (A) Have the right to control the reproduction of their work
(2) Cracking (C) Breaking security systems for illegal reasons
(3) Cracker (B) Will use a program or script known as a crack
(4) Cyberstalking (D) Uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 4.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Phishing (A) Technique of extracting confidential information
(2) Plagiarism (B) Presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent
(3) Hacking (C) Safe and responsible use of information and communication technology
(4) Cyber Safety (D) Refers to unauthorized intrusion into a computer or a network

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Phishing (A) Technique of extracting confidential information
(2) Plagiarism (B) Presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent
(3) Hacking (D) Refers to unauthorized intrusion into a computer or a network
(4) Cyber Safety (C) Safe and responsible use of information and communication technology

Question 5.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Netiquette (A) Network Security
(2) Encryption (B) Method of converting the original message into random text
(3) Secure Socket Layer (C) Transmission of data is encrypted
(4) Firewall (D) Internet etiquette

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Netiquette (D) Internet etiquette
(2) Encryption (B) Method of converting the original message into random text
(3) Secure Socket Layer (C) Transmission of data is encrypted
(4) Firewall (A) Network Security

Question 6.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) IT Act 2000 (A) Provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange
(2) Digital Signature (B) Electronic Signature

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) IT Act 2000 (A) Provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange
(2) Digital Signature (B) Electronic Signature

7. Answer Briefly.

Question 1.
What is Cyber Law?
Answer:

  1. Cyberlaw is the area of law that deals with the Internet’s relationship to technological and electronic elements.
  2. Cyberlaw is the part of the overall legal system that deals with the Internet, cyberspace, and their respective legal issues.
  3. Cyberlaw covers a fairly broad area, encompassing several subtopics including freedom of expression, access to and usage of the Internet, and online privacy

Question 2.
State the advantages of Cyber Law.
Answer:

  1. The Information Technology Act 2000 attempts to change outdated laws and provides ways to deal with cybercrimes.
  2. The Information Technology Act offers the much-needed legal framework so that information is not denied.
  3. The Information Technology Act has also proposed a legal framework for the authentication and origin of electronic records.

Question 3.
Define Ethics and Morals.
Answer:

  1. Ethics is also called moral philosophy is the discipline concerned with what is morally good and bad, right or wrong.
  2. Morals are the standards of behaviour; principles of right and wrong behaviour.
  3. Thus Morals are dictated by society, culture, or religion.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 4.
What is Cyber Crime?
Answer:

  1. Computer Crime is alternatively referred to as Cybercrime.
  2. Computer crime is an act performed by a knowledgeable computer user, sometimes referred to as a Hacker.
  3. A Hacker who illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information.
  4. Cybercrimes can involve criminal activities that are traditional in nature, such as theft, fraud, forgery, defamation, and mischief.

Question 5.
State the examples of Cyber Crime.
Answer:

  1. Software piracy is nothing but copyright violation of software created originally by an individual or an institution.
  2. Software piracy includes stealing codes/programs and other information illegally and creating the imitated copy by unauthorized means.
  3. Gaining access without the users’ permission is known as unauthorized access.
  4. Authorization means granting access rights to resources.
  5. A copyright is a legal right that gives the creator of a literary, artistic, musical, or other creative work.
  6. Copyright owners have the right to control the reproduction of their work, including the right to receive the royalty payment for that reproduction.
  7. Activity such as decipher codes or passwords and breaking security systems for illegal reasons is called cracking.
  8. The cracker will use a program or script known as a Crack.
  9. Cyberstalking is a criminal practice where an individual uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone.
  10. Phishing is a technique of extracting confidential information such as credit card numbers and username password combos by pretending as a legal enterprise.
  11. Phishing is typically carried out by email spoofing.
  12. Plagiarism is presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent.
  13. Hacking refers to unauthorized intrusion into a computer or a network.
  14. Hacker is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer operating system and programming language.

Question 6.
Explain Security Procedures.
Answer:

  1. Encryption is a method of converting the original message into random text.
  2. The full form of SSL is Secure Socket Layer.
  3. Through the Secure Socket Layer, the transmission of data is encrypted.
  4. A firewall refers to a network security (Hardware and Software) system which blocks certain types of information.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 7.
Discuss the IT Act of India 2000 and its features.
Answer:

  1. Information Technology Act, 2000 is an Act to provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange and other means of electronic communication.
  2. Information Technology Act, 2000 aims to provide the legal infrastructure for E-Commerce in India.
  3. Cyber Laws have a major impact on e-businesses and the new economy in India.
  4. The Information Technology Act, 2000 also aims to provide for the legal framework.
  5. Digital signature has been replaced with electronic signature to make it a more technology-neutral act.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing

Balbharati Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing

1. Fill in the Blanks.

Question 1.
___________ resources have become a part of our day to day life.
Answer:
Online

Question 2.
The ___________ is a powerful media to transmit information.
Answer:
Internet

Question 3.
The pages of information displayed on the internet are referred to as ___________
Answer:
Web Pages

Question 4.
The standards and formats for presenting text and graphics on the internet are developed and approved by ___________ governing authorities.
Answer:
World Wide Web

Question 5.
The growing demand for attractive presentation of information using electronic means gave rise to the invention of ___________
Answer:
Websites

Question 6.
WWW stands for ___________
Answer:
World Wide Web

Question 7.
WWW stands for world wide web normally referred to as ___________
Answer:
Web

Question 8.
___________ is a simple text file created using HTML.
Answer:
Webpage

Question 9.
___________ is a collection of interlinked web pages containing text, images, audio and videos.
Answer:
Website

Question 10.
A ___________ is a software used to view web pages or websites available on the internet.
Answer:
Web browser

Question 11.
A ___________ is an application or a computer that sends webpages over the internet using the HTTP protocol.
Answer:
Web Server I

Question 12.
The functionality of website is managed by ___________
Answer:
Webserver

Question 13.
Full form of URL is ___________
Answer:
Uniform Resource Locator

Question 14.
___________ is an address of a web page on the internet.
Answer:
Uniform Resource Locator

Question 15.
The web pages are retrieved from the original location with the help of ___________
Answer:
Uniform Resource Locator

Question 16.
Full form of HTTP is ___________
Answer:
HyperText Transfer Protocol

Question 17.
___________ is a protocol used by WWW for client server communication.
Answer:
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 18.
Full for of HTML is ___________
Answer:
Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 19.
___________ enables to write code for a webpage.
Answer:
HyperText Markup Language

Question 20.
All the webpages in a website are linked with one another, with the help of ___________ links.
Answer:
Hypertext

Question 21.
___________ is a standard language for developing and creating interactive websites, introduced by Tim Berners Lee.
Answer:
HyperText Markup Language

Question 22.
___________ documents are created in any text editor for and can be run(executed) on any computer that has a web browser.
Answer:
HyperText Markup Language

Question 23.
___________ is compatible with most of the web browsers.
Answer:
Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 24.
___________ Tags are also called paired tags.
Answer:
Container

Question 25.
___________ Tags have a beginning tag and an end tag.
Answer:
Container

Question 26.
___________ Tags are standalone tags and do not have an end tag.
Answer:
Empty

Question 27.
___________ defines a header for a document or a section.
Answer:
<header>

Question 28.
___________ defines a container for navigation links.
Answer:
<nav>

Question 29.
___________ defines a section in a document.
Answer:
<section>

Question 30.
___________ defines an independent self-contained article.
Answer:
<article>

Question 31.
___________ defines content apart from the content (like a sidebar).
Answer:
<aside>

Question 32.
___________ defines a footer for a document or a section.
Answer:
<footer>

Question 33.
___________ defines additional details.
Answer:
<details>

Question 34.
_________ formatting is used to make a document look attractive thereby enhancing its appearance.
Answer:
Text

Question 35.
_________ displays text within it in Bold like Hello.
Answer:
<b>

Question 36.
_________ displays text within it in italicized manner like Hello.
Answer:
<i>

Question 37.
_________ displays text with underline like Hello.
Answer:
<u>

Question 38.
_________ displays text in small font size.
Answer:
<small>

Question 39.
_________ displays text in subscript form.
Answer:
<sub>

Question 40.
___________ displays text in superscript form.
Answer:
<sup>

Question 41.
The HTML ___________ element defines marked or highlighted text.
Answer:
<mark>

Question 42.
HTML provides ___________ levels of heading tags.
Answer:
Six

Question 43.
The ___________ tag displays text in bold and with largest heading level.
Answer:
<H1>

Question 44.
The ___________ tag displays text in the smallest heading level.
Answer:
<H6>

Question 45.
___________ tag is used to insert an image within a webpage.
Answer:
<IMG>

Question 46.
___________ is used to specify the path of an image file.
Answer:
src

Question 47.
___________ specifies height of the image in pixels.
Answer:
Height

Question 48.
___________ specifies width of the image in pixels.
Answer:
Width

Question 49.
___________ is referred as alternate text.
Answer:
Alt

Question 50.
___________ is a empty tag.
Answer:
<IMG>

Question 51.
___________ tag is used to display horizontal ruled line.
Answer:
<hr>

Question 52.
___________ sets color for the horizontal ruled line.
Answer:
color

Question 53.
___________ specifies the length of the ruled line in % or pixels.
Answer:
width

Question 54.
___________ sets thickness of a ruled line.
Answer:
size

Question 55.
___________ tag is used to define paragraphs.
Answer:
<P>

Question 56.
A ___________ is made up of rows and columns.
Answer:
Table

Question 57.
___________ is used to indicate creation of a table.
Answer:
<table>

Question 58.
___________ is used to specify a table heading.
Answer:
<caption>

Question 59.
___________ tag is used to create each row of the table.
Answer:
<tr>

Question 60.
___________ indicates table heading.
Answer:
<th>

Question 61.
___________ specifies data within the table (cell content).
Answer:
<td>

Question 62.
___________ attribute is required to display a border for the entire table.
Answer:
border

Question 63.
___________ displays border in a specific color.
Answer:
bordercolor

Question 64.
___________ the table either to the left, right or center.
Answer:
aligns

Question 65.
___________ sets the background color for the table.
Answer:
bgcolor

Question 66.
___________ are used to connect one document with another document.
Answer:
Hyperlinks

Question 67.
In HTML, Links are created by using ___________ tag.
Answer:
<a>

Question 68.
A ___________ by default appears blue in colour with an underline.
Answer:
Hyperlink

Question 69.
An ___________ link is underlined and purple.
Answer:
Visited

Question 70.
A ___________ link is underlined and blue.
Answer:
Active

Question 71.
___________ in HTML is used to accept user input.
Answer:
Forms

Question 72.
A ___________ is a collection of different elements also called as controls.
Answer:
Form

Question 73.
___________ attributes specifies a name to a form.
Answer:
Name

Question 74.
The ___________ attribute specifies the path where the form is to be submitted.
Answer:
Action

Question 75.
The ___________ attribute specifies the get or post method to be used when submitting the form data.
Answer:
Method

Question 76.
The default method of submitting form data is ___________
Answer:
GET

Question 77.
The data submitted by using ___________ is visible in the address bar.
Answer:
GET

Question 78.
The ___________ method of sending data does not display the form data in the address bar.
Answer:
POST

Question 79.
<Input type = “text”> creates a one line ___________
Answer:
Textbox

Question 80.
<Input type = “radio”> creates a ___________ button.
Answer:
Radio

Question 81.
The ___________ button allows one option selection against multiple choices.
Answer:
Radio

Question 82.
<Input type = “checkbox”> creates a ___________
Answer:
Checkbox

Question 83.
___________ allows more than one selection against multiple choices.
Answer:
Checkbox

Question 84.
<Input type = “submit”> displays a button for ___________ the form data to a server.
Answer:
Submitting

Question 85.
The ___________ type is used to create text contents in the form of ‘ * ‘ asterik or ‘ . ‘ disc.
Answer:
Password

Question 86.
The ___________ control clears the text content entered in the form.
Answer:
Reset

Question 87.
<Input type =”____________”> displays push button which activates on events.
Answer:
Button

Question 88.
_________ describes, the name of the control like text radio.
Answer:
Type

Question 89.
The ___________ attribute is a user defined value.
Answer:
Name

Question 90.
The ___________ attribute is used with text and password type.
Answer:
Max length

Question 91.
___________ specifies the maximum number of characters that can be entered in a text or password box.
Answer:
Max length

Question 92.
The ___________ attribute can be used with text and password type.
Answer:
Size

Question 93.
___________ specifies the width of the text box.
Answer:
Size

Question 94.
The ___________ attribute specifies the default selection for options in a checkbox or radio button.
Answer:
Checked

Question 95.
The ___________ attribute can be used with text, checkbox, radio, submit or reset.
Answer:
Value

Question 96.
The ___________ tag is used to create a textbox with multiple lines.
Answer:
<textarea>

Question 97.
___________ is used to specify name for the text area.
Answer:
Name

Question 98.
___________ specifies the number of lines in a text area.
Answer:
Rows

Question 99.
___________ specifies the width of a text area.
Answer:
Cols

Question 100.
___________ specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in the textarea.
Answer:
Max length

Question 101.
___________ specifies a short hint that describes the expected value of a textarea.
Answer:
Placeholder

Question 102.
___________ specifies that textarea must be filled out. i.e. It can not be blank.
Answer:
Required

Question 103.
___________ tag is used to create drop-down list.
Answer:
<select>

Question 104.
___________ assigns name to the control.
Answer:
Name

Question 105.
___________ allows the user to select more than one value.
Answer:
Multiple

Question 106.
The ___________ attribute is used to specify the number of visible values.
Answer:
Size

Question 107.
To define preselected option, ‘___________’ attribute is added to the <option>.
Answer:
Selected

Question 108.
___________ assigns value to the option specified in the dropdown list.
Answer:
Value

Question 109.
___________ was initially created to make webpages alive.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 110.
A ___________ is a list of commands that are executed by a scripting engine.
Answer:
Script

Question 111.
___________ are used to generate dynamic Web pages on the Web.
Answer:
Scripts

Question 112.
___________ can be use for client side or server side scripting language.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 113.
___________ code can be inserted in HTML program between <script> and </script> tag.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 114.
___________ attribute is used to set scripting language.
Answer:
Language

Question 115.
The ___________ is a basic unit of storage in a JavaScript program.
Answer:
Variable

Question 116.
___________ name may consist of alphabets, digits and underscore and dollar character with following rules.
Answer:
Variable

Question 117.
Standard keywords are not allowed as ___________ name.
Answer:
Variable

Question 118.
___________ name can be limited up to 255 characters.
Answer:
Variable

Question 119.
___________ name in javascript is declared with keyword ‘var’.
Answer:
Variable

Question 120.
_____________ provides data types to store and use different types of values.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 121.
Numerical value specially belongs to the ‘___________’ data type.
Answer:
Number

Question 122.
___________ data type can hold positive as well as negative values.
Answer:
Number

Question 123.
___________ are used for storing text.
Answer:
Strings

Question 124.
___________ type represents only two values ‘true’ and ‘false’.
Answer:
Boolean

Question 125.
JavaScript returns ‘___________’ when variable which is declared but not assigned.
Answer:
Undefined

Question 126.
___________ are used to do arithmetic and logical operations.
Answer:
Operators

Question 127.
Operators that require one operand is called as ___________ operator.
Answer:
Unary

Question 128.
Operators that require two operands are called as ___________ operator.
Answer:
Binary

Question 129.
___________ operators are used in mathematical expressions.
Answer:
Arithmetic

Question 130.
It is important to know that ___________ operator is not ‘equal to’ operator.
Answer:
Assignment

Question 131.
___________ operator is used to assign value of an expression to a variable.
Answer:
Assignment

Question 132.
___________ operators are used to check conditions or comparison of operands.
Answer:
Relational

Question 133.
___________ operators are used to verifying more than one condition at a time or to negate the condition.
Answer:
Logical

Question 134.
___________ (++) operator in JavaScript is used to increment value of variable by one.
Answer:
Increment

Question 135.
___________ operator in JavaScript is used to decrement value of variable by one.
Answer:
Decrement

Question 136.
___________ are non-executable statements in program.
Answer:
Comments

Question 137.
___________ are used to provide information or explanation about your programming construct.
Answer:
Comments

Question 138.
Statements added in ___________ are ignored by JavaScript.
Answer:
Comments

Question 139.
___________ is used to perform repetitive tasks whenever required.
Answer:
Function

Question 140.
___________ is reusable code block that will be executed when it is called.
Answer:
Function

Question 141.
___________ function is used to parse a string and convert it into a number.
Answer:
parseInt()

Question 142.
___________ function is used to parse a string and convert it into floating point representation.
Answer:
parseFloat()

Question 143.
___________ function displays alert popup box with ok button. This is also called as a message box.
Answer:
alert()

Question 144.
___________ function is used when you want input value from user at the time of program execution.
Answer:
prompt()

Question 145.
___________ function displays confirmation message box with ok and cancel button.
Answer:
confirm()

Question 146.
___________ string function used to convert the given string into lower case alphabets.
Answer:
toLowerCase()

Question 147.
___________ string function is used to convert given string into uppercase alphabets.
Answer:
toUpperCase()

Question 148.
___________ returns ‘true’ if given value is not a number. It returns ‘false’ if given value is number.
Answer:
isNaN()

Question 149.
A ___________ in any scripting and programming language is a small part of a program that we require again and again.
Answer:
Function

Question 150.
A ___________ is a subprogram designed to perform a particular task.
Answer:
Function

Question 151.
___________ can be called either by an event or by giving call to that function.
Answer:
Functions

Question 152.
___________ is an event-driven language.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 153.
___________ is an action done bv the user or an application.
Answer:
Event

Question 154.
___________ lets you execute a code when events are detected.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 155.
___________ when user moves the mouse away from an element.
Answer:
onMouseOut

Question 156.
___________ when user clicks an element.
Answer:
onClick

Question 157.
___________ when user moves the mouse over an element.
Answer:
onMouseOver

Question 158.
___________ when user releases a mouse button over an element.
Answer:
onMouseUp

2. True or False.

Question 1.
Online resources have become a part of our day-to-day life.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
The Internet is a powerful medium to transmit information.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
The pages of the information displayed on the internet are referred to as the worldwide web.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
The standards and formats for presenting text and graphics on the internet are developed and approved by Webpages governing authorities.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
The growing demand for attractive presentation of information using electronic means gave rise to the invention of Websites.
Answer:
True

Question 6.
WWW stands for world wide web.
Answer:
True

Question 7.
WWW stands for world wide web normally referred to as Webpage.
Answer:
False

Question 8.
The web is a simple text file created using HTML.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
A website is a collection of interlinked web pages containing text, images, audio, and videos.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
A web browser is software used to view web pages or websites available on the internet.
Answer:
True

Question 11.
A Web server is an application or a computer that sends webpages over the internet using the HTTP protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 12.
The functionality of the website is managed by Uniform Resource Locator.
Answer:
False

Question 13.
The full form of URL is Uniform Resource Locator.
Answer:
True

Question 14.
Uniform Resource Locator is an address of a web page on the internet.
Answer:
True

Question 15.
The web pages are retrieved from the original location with the help of Uniform Resource Locator.
Answer:
True

Question 16.
The full form of HTTP is HyperText Transfer Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 17.
Uniform Resource Locator is a protocol used by WWW for client-server communication.
Answer:
False

Question 18.
Full form of HTML is HyperText Markup Language.
Answer:
True

Question 19.
HyperText Markup Language enables to write code for a webpage.
Answer:
True

Question 20.
All the webpages in a website are linked with one another, with the help of HyperText links.
Answer:
True

Question 21.
HyperText Markup Language is a standard language for developing and creating interactive websites, introduced by Tim Berners Lee.
Answer:
True

Question 22.
Uniform Resource Locator documents are created in any text editor and can be run(executed) on any computer that has a web browser.
Answer:
False

Question 23.
HyperText Markup Language is compatible with most web browsers.
Answer:
False

Question 24.
Empty Tags are also called paired tags.
Answer:
False

Question 25.
Container Tags have a beginning tag and an end tag.
Answer:
True

Question 26.
Container Tags are standalone tags and do not have an end tag.
Answer:
False

Question 27.
<nav> defines a header for a document or a section.
Answer:
False

Question 28.
<header> defines a container for navigation links.
Answer:
False

Question 29.
<article> defines a section in a document.
Answer:
False

Question 30.
<section> defines an independent self-contained article.
Answer:
False

Question 31.
<aside> defines content apart from the content (like a sidebar).
Answer:
True

Question 32.
<footer> defines a footer for a document or a section.
Answer:
True

Question 33.
<details> defines additional details.
Answer:
True

Question 34.
<b> formatting is used to make a document look attractive thereby enhancing its appearance.
Answer:
False

Question 35.
<b> displays text within it in Bold like Hello.
Answer:
True

Question 36.
<i> display text within it in an italicized manner like Hello.
Answer:
True

Question 37.
<u> displays text with an underline like Hello.
Answer:
True

Question 38.
<small> displays text in small font size.
Answer:
True

Question 39.
Text displays text in subscript form.
Answer:
False

Question 40.
<sup> displays text in superscript form.
Answer:
True

Question 41.
The HTML <sub> element defines marked or highlighted text.
Answer:
False

Question 42.
HTML provides six levels of heading tags.
Answer:
True

Question 43.
The Six tag displays text in bold and with the largest heading level.
Answer:
False

Question 44.
The <H6> tag displays text in the smallest heading level.
Answer:
True

Question 45.
src tag is used to insert an image within a webpage.
Answer:
False

Question 46.
<IMG> is used to specify the path of an image file.
Answer:
False

Question 47.
Height specifies the height of the image in pixels.
Answer:
True

Question 48.
Width specifies the width of the image in pixels.
Answer:
True

Question 49.
Alt is referred to as alternate text.
Answer:
True

Question 50.
<IMG> is a empty tag.
Answer:
True

Question 51.
<P> tag is used to display horizontal ruled line.
Answer:
False

Question 52.
color sets the color for the horizontal ruled line.
Answer:
True

Question 53.
width specifies the length of the ruled line in % or pixels.
Answer:
True

Question 54.
size sets the thickness of a ruled line.
Answer:
True

Question 55.
<hr> tag is used to define paragraphs.
Answer:
False

Question 56.
A Table is made up of rows and columns.
Answer:
True

Question 57.
<caption> is used to indicate the creation of a table.
Answer:
False

Question 58.
<table> is used to specify a table heading.
Answer:
False

Question 59.
<tr> tag is used to create each row of the table.
Answer:
True

Question 60.
<th> indicates table heading.
Answer:
False

Question 61.
<td> specifies data within the table (cell content).
Answer:
True

Question 62.
A border attribute is required to display a border for the entire table.
Answer:
True

Question 63.
bgcolor displays borders in a specific color.
Answer:
False

Question 64.
border the table either to the left, right or center.
Answer:
False

Question 65.
bgcolor sets the background color for the table.
Answer:
True

Question 66.
Hyperlinks are used to connect one document with another document.
Answer:
True

Question 67.
In HTML, links are created by using <a> tag.
Answer:
True

Question 68.
A Hyperlink by default appears blue in colour with an underline.
Answer:
True

Question 69.
An Active link is underlined and purple.
Answer:
False

Question 70.
A Visited link is underlined and blue.
Answer:
False

Question 71.
Forms in HTML are used to accept user input.
Answer:
True

Question 72.
A Form is a collection of different elements also called controls.
Answer:
True

Question 73.
Name attributes specifies a name to a form.
Answer:
True

Question 74.
The Method attribute specifies the path where the form is to be submitted.
Answer:
False

Question 75.
The Action attribute specifies the get or post method to be used when submitting the form data.
Answer:
False

Question 76.
The default method of submitting form data is GET.
Answer:
True

Question 77.
The data submitted by using POST is visible in the address bar.
Answer:
False

Question 78.
The GET method of sending data does not display the form data in the address bar.
Answer:
False

Question 79.
<Input type = “text”> creates a one line Textbox.
Answer:
True

Question 80.
<Input type = “radio”> creates a radio button.
Answer:
True

Question 81.
The radio button allows one option selection against multiple choices.
Answer:
True

Question 82.
<Input type = “checkbox”> creates a Password.
Answer:
False

Question 83.
The button allows more than one selection against multiple choices.
Answer:
False

Question 84.
<Input type = “submit”> displays a button for Submitting the form data to a server.
Answer:
True

Question 85.
The Checkbox input type is used to create text contents in the form of ‘*’ asterisk or ‘•’ disc.
Answer:
False

Question 86.
The Reset control clears the text content entered in the form.
Answer:
True

Question 87.
<Input type = “Radio”> displays push button which activates on events.
Answer:
False

Question 88.
Maxlength describes the name of the control like text radio.
Answer:
False

Question 89.
The Name attribute is a user-defined value.
Answer:
True

Question 90.
Maxlength attribute is used with text and password type.
Answer:
True

Question 91.
Type specifies the maximum number of characters that can be entered in a text or password box.
Answer:
False

Question 92.
The ‘Size’ attribute can be used with text and password type.
Answer:
True

Question 93.
The value specifies the width of the text box.
Answer:
False

Question 94.
The ‘Checked’ attribute specifies the default selection for options in a checkbox or radio button.
Answer:
True

Question 95.
The ‘Size’ attribute can be used with text, checkbox, radio, submit or reset.
Answer:
False

Question 96.
The <textarea> tag is used to create a textbox with multiple lines.
Answer:
True

Question 97.
Name is used to specify a name for the textarea.
Answer:
True

Question 98.
Required specifies the number of lines in a text area.
Answer:
False

Question 99.
Maxlength specifies the width of a text area.
Answer:
False

Question 100.
Maxlength specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in the textarea.
Answer:
True

Question 101.
Placeholder specifies a short hint that describes the expected value of a textarea.
Answer:
True

Question 102.
Rows specify that textarea must be filled out. i.e. It can not be blank.
Answer:
False

Question 103.
Value tag is used to create a drop-down list.
Answer:
False

Question 104.
Name assigns a name to the control.
Answer:
True

Question 105.
Multiple allows the user to select more than one value.
Answer:
True

Question 106.
The Size attribute is used to specify the number of visible values.
Answer:
True

Question 107.
To define the preselected option, the ‘Selected’ attribute is added to the <option>.
Answer:
True

Question 108.
<select> assigns value to the option specified in the dropdown list.
Answer:
False

Question 109.
JavaScript was initially created to make web pages alive.
Answer:
True

Question 110.
A Script is a list of commands that are executed by a scripting engine.
Answer:
True

Question 111.
Scripts are used to generate dynamic Web pages on the Web.
Answer:
True

Question 112.
JavaScript can be used for the client-side or server-side scripting languages.
Answer:
True

Question 113.
Python code can be inserted in HTML program between <script> and </script> tag.
Answer:
False

Question 114.
The language attribute is used to set scripting language.
Answer:
True

Question 115.
A Variable is a basic unit of storage in a JavaScript program.
Answer:
True

Question 116.
The variable name may consist of alphabets, digits and underscore, and dollar characters with the following rules.
Answer:
True

Question 117.
Standard keywords are not allowed as Variable names.
Answer:
True

Question 118.
A variable names can be limited to up to 255 characters.
Answer:
True

Question 119.
Variable name in javascript is declared with keyword var’.
Answer:
True

Question 120.
JavaScript provides data types to store and use different types of values.
Answer:
True

Question 121.
Numerical value specially belongs to the ‘Boolean’ data type.
Answer:
False

Question 122.
The number data type can hold positive as well as negative values.
Answer:
True

Question 123.
Strings are used for storing text.
Answer:
True

Question 124.
Number type represents only two values ‘true’ and ‘false’.
Answer:
False

Question 125.
JavaScript returns ‘Undefined’ when a variable is declared but not assigned.
Answer:
True

Question 126.
Operators are used to doing arithmetic and logical operations.
Answer:
True

Question 127.
Operators that require one operand is called as Unary operator.
Answer:
True

Question 128.
Operators that require two operands are called Binary operators.
Answer:
True

Question 129.
Assignment operators are used in mathematical expressions.
Answer:
False

Question 130.
It is important to know that the Assignment operator is not an ‘equal to’ operator.
Answer:
True

Question 131.
The binary operator is used to assign the value of an expression to a variable.
Answer:
False

Question 132.
Relational operators are used to checking conditions or comparisons of operands.
Answer:
True

Question 133.
Logical operators are used to verifying more than one condition at a time or to negate the condition.
Answer:
True

Question 134.
The decrement (++) operator in JavaScript is used to increment the value of a variable by one.
Answer:
False

Question 135.
The increment operator in JavaScript is used to decrement the value of variables by one.
Answer:
False

Question 136.
Mistakes are non-executable statements in the program.
Answer:
False

Question 137.
Comments are used to provide information or explanation about your programming construct.
Answer:
True

Question 138.
Statements added in Comments are ignored by JavaScript.
Answer:
True

Question 139.
The function is used to perform repetitive tasks whenever required.
Answer:
True

Question 140.
The function is a reusable code block that will be executed when it is called.
Answer:
True

Question 141.
parseFloat() function is used to parse a string and convert it into a number.
Answer:
False

Question 142.
parselnt() function is used to parse a string and convert it into floating-point representation.
Answer:
False

Question 143.
alert() function displays an alert popup box with an ok button. This is also called a message box.
Answer:
False

Question 144.
prompt() function is used when you want input value from the user at the time of program execution.
Answer:
True

Question 145.
confirm() function displays a confirmation message box with ok and cancel buttons.
Answer:
True

Question 146.
toUpperCase() string function used to convert the given string into lower case alphabets.
Answer:
False

Question 147.
toLowerCase() string function is used to convert given string into uppercase alphabets.
Answer:
False

Question 148.
isNaN() returns ‘true’ if given value is not a number. It returns ‘false’ if the given value is a number.
Answer:
True

Question 149.
A Gmail in any scripting and programming language is a small part of a program that we require again and again.
Answer:
False

Question 150.
A Function is a subprogram designed to perform a particular task.
Answer:
True

Question 151.
Functions can be called either by an event or by giving a call to that function.
Answer:
True

Question 152.
JavaScript is an event-driven language.
Answer:
True

Question 153.
An event is an action done by the user or an application.
Answer:
True

Question 154.
JavaScript lets you execute a code when events are detected.
Answer:
True

Question 155.
onMouseUp when the user moves the mouse away from an element.
Answer:
False

Question 156.
onClick when the user clicks an element.
Answer:
True

Question 157.
onMouseOver when the user moves the mouse over an element.
Answer:
True

Question 158.
onClick when the user releases a mouse button over an element.
Answer:
False

3. Multiple Choice Question (Single Choice)

Question 1.
__________ resources have become a part of our day to day life.
(A) Online
(B) Internet
(C) Webpages
(D) World Wide Web
Answer:
(A) Online

Question 2.
The __________ is a powerful media to transmit information.
(A) Online
(B) Internet
(C) Webpages
(D) World Wide Web
Answer:
(B) Internet

Question 3.
The pages of information displayed on the internet are referred to as __________
(A) Online
(B) Internet
(C) Webpages
(D) World Wide Web
Answer:
(C) Web pages

Question 4.
The standards and formats for presenting text and graphics on the internet are developed and approved by __________ governing authorities.
(A) Online
(B) Internet
(C) Webpages
(D) World Wide Web
Answer:
(D) World Wide Web

Question 5.
The growing demand for attractive presentation of information using electronic means gave rise to the invention of __________
(A) Online
(B) Internet
(C) Webpages
(D) Websites
Answer:
(D) Websites

Question 6.
WWW stands for __________
(A) World Wide Web
(B) Webpage
(C) Website
(D) Web Browser
Answer:
(A) World Wide Web

Question 7.
WWW stands for world wide web normally referred to as __________
(A) World Wide Web
(B) Webpage
(C) Website
(D) Web
Answer:
(D) Web

Question 8.
__________ is a simple text file created using HTML.
(A) World Wide Web
(B) Webpage
(C) Website
(D) Web
Answer:
(B) Webpage

Question 9.
__________ is a collection of interlinked web pages containing text, images, audio and videos.
(A) World Wide Web
(B) Webpage
(C) Website
(D) Web
Answer:
(C) Website

Question 10.
A __________ is a software used to view web pages or websites available on the internet.
(A) World Wide Web
(B) Webpage
(C) Website
(D) Web Browser
Answer:
(D) Web Browser

Question 11.
A __________ is an application or a computer that sends webpages over the internet using the HTTP protocol.
(A) Webserver
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) HyperText Transfer Protocol
(D) Hypertext
Answer:
(A) Web Server

Question 12.
The functionality of website is managed by __________
(A) Webserver
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hypertext
Answer:
(A) Webserver

Question 13.
Full form of URL is __________
(A) Uniform Resource Locator
(B) United Research Live
(C) Uniform Research Live
(D) Uniform Research Locator
Answer:
(A) Uniform Resource Locator

Question 14.
__________ is an address of a web page on the internet.
(A) Web Server
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hypertext
Answer:
(B) Uniform Resource Locator

Question 15.
The web pages are retrieved from the original location with the help of __________
(A) Web Server
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hypertext
Answer:
(B) Uniform Resource Locator

Question 16.
Full form of HTTP is __________
(A) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Test Transfer Protocol
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Permission
(D) Hyper Text Transfer Permission
Answer:
(A) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 17.
__________ is a protocol used by WWW for client-server communication.
(A) Web Server
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hyper Text
Answer:
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 18.
Full form of HTML is __________
(A) Hyper Text Markup Language
(B) Hyper Test Markup Language
(C) Hyper Text Machine Language
(D) Hyper Test Machine Language
Answer:
(A) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 19.
__________ enables to write code for a webpage.
(A) Webserver
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language
Answer:
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 20.
All the webpages in a website are linked with one another, with the help of __________ links.
(A) Webserver
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) HyperText Transfer Protocol
(D) Hypertext
Answer:
(D) Hypertext

Question 21.
__________ is a standard language for developing and creating interactive websites, introduced by Tim Berners Lee.
(A) Web server
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language
Answer:
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 22.
__________ documents are created in any text editor for and can be run (executed) on any computer that has a web browser.
(A) Webserver
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language
Answer:
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 23.
__________ is compatible with most of the web browsers.
(A) Web server
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) HyperText Transfer Protocol
(D) HyperText Markup Language
Answer:
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 24.
__________ Tags are also called paired tags.
(A) Container
(B) Empty
(C) Web Server
(D) Uniform Resource Locator
Answer:
(A) Container

Question 25.
__________ Tags have a beginning tae and an end tag.
(A) Container
(B) Empty
(C) Web Server
(D) Uniform Resource Locator
Answer:
(A) Container

Question 26.
__________ Tags are standalone tags and do not have an end tag.
(A) Container
(B) Empty
(C) Web Server
(D) Uniform Resource Locator
Answer:
(B) Empty

Question 27.
__________ defines a header for a document or a section.
(A) <header>
(B) <nav>
(C) <section>
(D) <article>
Answer:
(A) <header>

Question 28.
__________ defines a container for navigation links.
(A) <header>
(B) <nav>
(C) <section>
(D) <article>
Answer:
(B) <nav>

Question 29.
__________ defines a section in a document.
(A) <header>
(B) <nav>
(C) <section>
(D) <article>
Answer:
(C) <section>

Question 30.
__________ defines an independent self-contained article.
(A) <header>
(B) <nav>
(C) <section>
(D) <article>
Answer:
(D) <article>

Question 31.
__________ defines content apart from the content (like a sidebar).
(A) <aside>
(B) <footer>
(C) <details>
(D) <header>
Answer:
(A) <aside>

Question 32.
__________ defines a footer for a document or a section.
(A) <aside>
(B) <footer>
(C) <details>
(D) <header>
Answer:
(B) <footer>

Question 33.
__________ defines additional details.
(A) <aside>
(B) <footer>
(C) <details>
(D) <header>
Answer:
(C) <details>

Question 34.
__________ formatting is used to make a document look attractive thereby enhancing it’s appearance.
(A) Text
(B) <b>
(C) <i>
(D) <u>
Answer:
(A) Text

Question 35.
__________ displays text within it in Bold like Hello.
(A) Text
(B) <b>
(C) <i>
(D) <u>
Answer:
(B) <b>

Question 36.
__________ displays text within it in italicized manner like Hello.
(A) Text
(B) <b>
(C) <i>
(D) <u>
Answer:
(C) <i>

Question 37.
__________ displays text with underline like Hello.
(A) Text
(B) <b>
(C) <i>
(D) <u>
Answer:
(D) <u>

Question 38.
__________ displays text in small font size.
(A) <small>
(B) <sub>
(C) <sup>
(D) <mark>
Answer:
(A) <small>

Question 39.
__________ displays text in subscript form.
(A) <small>
(B) <sub>
(C) <sup>
(D) <mark>
Answer:
(B) <sub>

Question 40.
__________ displays text in superscript form.
(A) <small>
(B) <sub>
(C) <sup>
(D) <mark>
Answer:
(C) <sup>

Question 41.
The HTML __________ element defines marked or highlighted text.
(A) <small>
(B) <sub>
(C) <sup>
(D) <mark>
Answer:
(D) <mark>

Question 42.
HTML provides __________ levels of heading tags.
(A) Six
(B) <H1>
(C) <H6>
(D) <H2>
Answer:
(A) Six

Question 43.
The __________ tag displays text in bold and with largest heading level.
(A) Six
(B) <H1>
(C) <H6>
(D) <H2>
Answer:
(B) <H1>

Question 44.
The __________ tag displays text in the smallest heading level.
(A) Six
(B) <H1>
(C) <H6>
(D) <H2>
Answer:
(C) <H6>

Question 45.
__________ tag is used to insert an image within a webpage.
(A) <IMG>
(B) src
(C) Height
(D) Width
Answer:
(A) <IMG>

Question 46.
__________ is used to specify the path of an image file.
(A) <IMG>
(B) src
(C) Height
(D) Width
Answer:
(B) src

Question 47.
__________ specifies height of the image in pixels.
(A) <IMG>
(B) src
(C) Height
(D) Width
Answer:
(C) Height

Question 48.
__________ specifies width of the image in pixels.
(A) <IMG>
(B) src
(C) Height
(D) Width
Answer:
(D) Width

Question 49.
__________ is referred as alternate text.
(A) Alt
(B) <IMG>
(C) <hr>
(D) color
Answer:
(A) Alt

Question 50.
__________ is a empty tag.
(A) Alt
(B) <IMG>
(C) <hr>
(D) color
Answer:
(B) <IMG>

Question 51.
__________ tag is used to display horizontal ruled line.
(A) Alt
(B) <IMG>
(C) <hr>
(D) color
Answer:
(C) <hr>

Question 52.
__________ sets color for the horizontal ruled line.
(A) Alt
(B) <IMG>
(C) <hr>
(D) color
Answer:
(D) color

Question 53.
__________ specifies the length of the ruled line in % or pixels.
(A) width
(B) size
(C) <P>
(D) color
Answer:
(A) width

Question 54.
__________ sets thickness of a ruled line.
(A) width
(B) size
(C) <P>
(D) color
Answer:
(B) size

Question 55.
__________ tag is used to define paragraphs.
(A) width
(B) size
(C) <P>
(D) color
Answer:
(C) <P>

Question 56.
A __________ is made up of rows and columns.
(A) Table
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <th>
Answer:
(A) Table

Question 57.
__________ is used to indicate creation of a table.
(A) <table>
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <th>
Answer:
(A) <table>

Question 58.
__________ is used to specify a table heading.
(A) <table>
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <th>
Answer:
(B) <caption>

Question 59.
__________ tag is used to create each row of the table.
(A) <table>
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <th>
Answer:
(C) <tr>

Question 60.
__________ indicates table heading.
(A) <table>
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <th>
Answer:
(D) <th>

Question 61.
__________ specifies data within the table (cell content).
(A) <table>
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <td>
Answer:
(D) <td>

Question 62.
__________ attribute is required to display a border for the entire table.
(A) border
(B) bordercolor
(C) aligns
(D) bgcolor
Answer:
(A) border

Question 63.
__________ displays border in a specific color.
(A) border
(B) bordercolor
(C) aligns
(D) bgcolor
Answer:
(B) bordercolor

Question 64.
__________ the table either to the left, right or center.
(A) border
(B) bordercolor
(C) aligns
(D) bgcolor
Answer:
(C) aligns

Question 65.
__________ sets the background color for the table.
(A) border
(B) bordercolor
(C) aligns
(D) bgcolor
Answer:
(D) bgcolor

Question 66.
__________ are used to connect one document with another document.
(A) Hyperlinks
(B) <a>
(C) Hypertext
(D) Visited
Answer:
(A) Hyperlinks

Question 67.
In HTML, Links are created bv usinsr __________ tag.
(A) Hypertext
(B) <a>
(C) Hyperlink
(D) Visited
Answer:
(B) <a>

Question 68.
A __________ by default appears blue in colour with an underline.
(A) Hypertext
(B) <a>
(C) Hyperlink
(D) Visited
Answer:
(C) Hyperlink

Question 69.
A __________ link is underlined and purple.
(A) Hypertext
(B) <a>
(C) Hyperlink
(D) Visited
Answer:
(D) Visited

Question 70.
An __________ link is underlined and blue.
(A) Hypertext
(B) <a>
(C) Hyperlink
(D) Active
Answer:
(D) Active

Question 71.
__________ in HTML is used to accept user input.
(A) Forms
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(A) Forms

Question 72.
A __________ is a collection of different elements also called as controls.
(A) Form
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(A) Form

Question 73.
__________ attributes specifies a name to a form.
(A) Name
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(A) Name

Question 74.
The __________ attribute specifies the path where the form is to be submitted.
(A) Name
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(B) Action

Question 75.
The __________ attribute specifies the get or post method to be used when submitting the form data.
(A) Name
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(C) Method

Question 76.
The default method of submitting form data is __________
(A) Name
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(D) GET

Question 77.
The data submitted by using __________ is visible in the address bar.
(A) Name
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(D) GET

Question 78.
The __________ method of sending data does not display the form data in the address bar.
(A) POST
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(A) POST

Question 79.
<Input type = “text”> creates a one line __________
(A) Textbox
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(A) Textbox

Question 80.
<Input type = “radio”> creates a __________ button.
(A) Textbox The
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(B) Radio

Question 81.
The __________ button allows one option selection against multiple choices.
(A) Textbox
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(B) Radio

Question 82.
<Input type =”checkbox”> creates a __________
(A) Textbox
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(C) Checkbox

Question 83.
__________ allows more than one selection against multiple choices.
(A) Textbox
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(C) Checkbox

Question 84.
<Input type = “submit”> displays a button for __________ the form data to a server.
(A) Textbox
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(D) Submitting

Question 85.
The __________ input type is used to create text contents in the form of ‘*’ asterik or ‘.’ disc.
(A) Password
(B) Reset
(C) Button
(D) Textbox
Answer:
(A) Password

Question 86.
The __________ control clears the text content entered in the form.
(A) Password
(B) Reset
(C) Button
(D) Textbox
Answer:
(B) Reset

Question 87.
<Input type = “___________”> displays push button which activates on events.
(A) Password
(B) Reset
(C) Button
(D) Textbox
Answer:
(C) Button

Question 88.
__________ describes, the name of the control like text radio.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(A) Type

Question 89.
The __________ attribute is a user defined value.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(B) Name

Question 90.
__________ attribute is used with text and password type.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(C) Maxlength

Question 91.
__________ specifies the maximum number of characters that can be entered in a text or password box.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(C) Maxlength

Question 92.
The ‘___________’ attribute can be used with text and password type.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(D) Size

Question 93.
__________ specifies the width of the text box.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(D) Size

Question 94.
The ‘______________’ attribute specifies the default selection for options in a checkbox or radio button.
(A) Checked
(B) Value
(C) Name
(D) Maxlength
Answer:
(A) Checked

Question 95.
The ‘______________’ attribute can be used with text, checkbox, radio, submit or reset.
(A) Checked
(B) Value
(C) Name
(D) Maxlength
Answer:
(B) Value

Question 96.
The __________ tag is used to create a textbox with multiple lines.
(A) <textarea>
(B) Name
(C) Rows
(D) Cols
Answer:
(A) <textarea>

Question 97.
__________ is used to specify name for the textarea.
(A) <textarea>
(B) Name
(C) Rows
(D) Cols
Answer:
(B) Name

Question 98.
__________ specifies the number of lines in a textarea.
(A) <textarea>
(B) Name
(C) Rows
(D) Cols
Answer:
(C) Rows

Question 99.
__________ specifies the width of a text area.
(A) <textarea>
(B) Name
(C) Rows
(D) Cols
Answer:
(D) Cols

Question 100.
__________ specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in the textarea.
(A) Maxlength
(B) Placeholder
(C) Required
(D) Rows
Answer:
(A) Maxlength

Question 101.
__________ specifies a short hint that describes the expected value of a textarea.
(A) Maxlength
(B) Placeholder
(C) Required
(D) Rows
Answer:
(B) Placeholder

Question 102.
__________ specifies that textarea must be filled out. i.e. It can not be blank.
(A) Maxlength
(B) Placeholder
(C) Required
(D) Rows
Answer:
(C) Required

Question 103.
__________ tag is used to create drop-down list.
(A) <select>
(B) Name
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(A) <select>

Question 104.
__________ assigns name to the control.
(A) <select>
(B) Name
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(B) Name

Question 105.
__________ allows the user to select more than one value.
(A) <select>
(B) Name
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(C) Multiple

Question 106.
The __________ attribute is used to specify the number of visible values.
(A) <select>
(B) Name
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(D) Size

Question 107.
To define preselected option, ‘___________’ attribute is added to the <option>.
(A) Selected
(B) Value
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(A) Selected

Question 108.
__________ assigns value to the option specified in the dropdown list.
(A) Selected
(B) Value
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(B) Value

Question 109.
__________ was initially created to make webpages alive.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Script
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 110.
A __________ is a list of commands that are executed by a scripting engine.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Script
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(B) Script

Question 111.
__________ are used to generate dynamic Web pages on the Web.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Scripts
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(B) Scripts

Question 112.
__________ can be use for client side or server side scripting language.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Script
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 113.
__________ code can be inserted in HTML program between <script> and </script> tag.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Script
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 114.
__________ attribute is used to set scripting language.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Scrip
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(C) Language

Question 115.
The __________ is a basic unit of storage in a JavaScript program.
(A) Variable
(B) Java
(C) .Net
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Variable

Question 116.
__________ name may consist of alphabets, digits and underscore and dollar character with following rules.
(A) Variable
(B) Java
(C) .Net
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Variable

Question 117.
Standard keywords are not allowed as __________ name.
(A) Variable
(B) Java
(C) .Net
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Variable

Question 118.
__________ name can be limited up to 255 characters.
(A) Variable
(B) Java
(C) .Net
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Variable

Question 119.
__________ name in javascript is declared with keyword ‘var’.
(A) Variable
(B) Java
(C) .Net
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Variable

Question 120.
__________ provides data types to store and use different types of values.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 121.
Numerical value specially belongs to the ‘____________’ data type.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(B) Number

Question 122.
__________ data type can hold positive as well as negative values.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(B) Number

Question 123.
__________ are used for storing text.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(C) Strings

Question 124.
__________ type represents only two values ‘true’ and ‘false’.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(D) Boolean

Question 125.
JavaScript returns ‘____________’ when variable which is declared but not assigned.
(A) Undefined
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(A) Undefined

Question 126.
__________ are used to do arithmetic and logical operations.
(A) Operators
(B) Unary
(C) Binary
(D) Arithmetic
Answer:
(A) Operators

Question 127.
Operators that require one operand is called as __________ operator.
(A) Operators
(B) Unary
(C) Binary
(D) Arithmetic
Answer:
(B) Unary

Question 128.
Operators that require two operands are called as __________ operator.
(A) Operators
(B) Unary
(C) Binary
(D) Arithmetic
Answer:
(C) Binary

Question 129.
__________ operators are used in mathematical expressions.
(A) Operators
(B) Unary
(C) Binary
(D) Arithmetic
Answer:
(D) Arithmetic

Question 130.
It is important to know that __________ operator is not ‘equal to’ operator.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Increment
Answer:
(A) Assignment

Question 131.
__________ operator is used to assign value of an expression to a variable.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Increment
Answer:
(A) Assignment

Question 132.
__________ operators are used to check conditions or comparison of operands.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Increment
Answer:
(B) Relational

Question 133.
__________ operators are used to verifying more than one condition at a time or to negate the condition.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Increment
Answer:
(C) Logical

Question 134.
__________ (++) operator in JavaScript is used to increment value of variable by one.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Increment
Answer:
(D) Increment

Question 135.
__________ operator in JavaScript is used to decrement value of variable by one.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Decrement
Answer:
(D) Decrement

Question 136.
___________ are non-executable statements in program.
(A) Comments
(B) Mistakes
(C) Java
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Comments

Question 137.
___________ are used to provide information or explanation about your programming construct.
(A) Comments
(B) Mistakes
(C) Java
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Comments

Question 138.
Statements added in ___________ are ignored by JavaScript.
(A) Comments
(B) Mistakes
(C) Java
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Comments

Question 139.
___________ is used to perform repetitive tasks whenever required.
(A) Function
(B) parseInt()
(C) parseFloat()
(D) alert()
Answer:
(A) Function

Question 140.
___________ is reusable codeblock that will be executed when it is called.
(A) Function
(B) parseInt()
(C) parseFloat()
(D) alert()
Answer:
(A) Function

Question 141.
___________ function is used to parse a string and convert it into a number.
(A) Function
(B) parseInt()
(C) parseFloat()
(D) alert()
Answer:
(B) parseInt()

Question 142.
___________ function is used to parse a string and convert it into floating point representation.
(A) Function
(B) parseInt()
(C) parseFloat()
(D) alert()
Answer:
(C) parseFloat()

Question 143.
___________ function displays alert popup box with ok button. This is also called as a message box.
(A) Function
(B) parselnt()
(C) parseFloat()
(D) alert()
Answer:
(D) alert()

Question 144.
___________ function is used when you want input value from user at the time of program execution.
(A) prompt()
(B) confirm()
(C) toLowerCase()
(D) toUpperCase()
Answer:
(A) prompt()

Question 145.
___________ function displays confirmation message box with ok and cancel button.
(A) prompt()
(B) confirm()
(C) toLowerCase()
(D) toUpperCase()
Answer:
(B) confirm()

Question 146.
___________ string function used to convert the given string into lower case alphabets.
(A) prompt()
(B) confirm()
(C) toLowerCase()
(D) toUpperCase()
Answer:
(C) toLowerCase()

Question 147.
___________ string function is used to convert given string into uppercase alphabets.
(A) prompt()
(B) confirm()
(C) toLowerCase()
(D) toUpperCase()
Answer:
(D) toUpperCase()

Question 148.
___________ returns ‘true’ if given value is not a number. It returns ‘false’ if given value is number.
(A) prompt()
(B) confirm()
(C) toLowerCase()
(D) isNaN()
Answer:
(D) isNaN()

Question 149.
A ___________ in any scripting and programming language is a small part of a program that we require again and again.
(A) Function
(B) Gmail
(C) Hotmail
(D) Program
Answer:
(A) Function

Question 150.
A ___________ is a subprogram designed to perform a particular task.
(A) Function
(B) Gmail
(C) Hotmail
(D) Program
Answer:
(A) Function

Question 151.
___________ can be called either by an event or by giving call to that function.
(A) Function
(B) Gmail
(C) Hotmail
(D) Program
Answer:
(A) Function

Question 152.
___________ is an event-driven language.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Event
(C) Function
(D) Driven
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 153.
___________ is an action done by the user or an application.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Event
(C) Function
(D) Driven
Answer:
(B) Event

Question 154.
___________ lets you execute a code when events are detected.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Event
(C) Function
(D) Driven
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 155.
___________ when user moves the mouse away from an element.
(A) onMouseOut
(B) onClick
(C) onMouseOver
(D) onMouseUp
Answer:
(A) onMouseOut

Question 156.
___________ when user clicks an element.
(A) onMouseOut
(B) onClick
(C) onMouseOver
(D) OnMouseUp
Answer:
(B) onClick

Question 157.
___________ when user moves the mouse over an element.
(A) onMouseOut
(B) onClick
(C) onMouseOver
(D) OnMouseUp
Answer:
(C) onMouseOver

Question 158.
___________ when user releases a mouse button over an element.
(A) onMouseOut
(B) onClick
(C) onMouseOver
(D) OnMouseUp
Answer:
(D) onMouseUp

4. Multiple Choice Two Correct Answers.

Question 1.
The standards and formats for presenting __________ and __________ on the internet are developed and approved by world wide web governing authorities.
(A) web pages
(B) Text
(C) graphics
(D) websites
(E) text editor
Answer:
(B) Text, (C) graphics

Question 2.
A web browser is a software used to view __________ or __________ available on the internet.
(A) web pages
(B) Text
(C) graphics
(D) websites
(E) text editor
Answer:
(A) web pages, (D) websites

Question 3.
HyperText Transfer Protocol documents are created in any __________ for and can be run(executed) on any computer that has a __________
(A) web pages
(B) Text
(C) graphics
(D) text editor
(E) web browser
Answer:
(D) text editor, (E) web browser

Question 4.
Every HTML page is enclosed within two tags __________ and __________
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <html>
(D) Container tags
(E) </html>
Answer:
(C) <html>, (E) </html>

Question 5.
The page is divided into two sections internally __________ section and __________ section.
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <html>
(D) Container tags
(E) </html>
Answer:
(A) Head, (B) body

Question 6.
HTML tags are categorized as _________ & __________
(A) Beginning
(B) Container tags
(C) End
(D) Empty tags
(E) Standalone
Answer:
(B) Container tags, (D) Empty tags

Question 7.
Container Tags have a __________ tag and an __________ tag.
(A) Beginning
(B) Container tags
(C) End
(D) Empty tags
(E) Standalone
Answer:
(A) Beginning, (C) End

Question 8.
Empty tags are __________ tags and do not have an __________ tag.
(A) Beginning
(B) Container tags
(C) Standalone
(D) End
(E) Empty Tag
Answer:
(C) Standalone, (D) End

Question 9.
_________ and __________ tag indicates that the document is an html file.
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <html>
(D) Container tags
(E) </html>
Answer:
(C) <html>, (E) </html>

Question 10.
____________ and __________ includes <Title> within it. the text within <head> is not displayed on the webpage.
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <head>
(D) Container tags
(E) </head>
Answer:
(C) <head>, (E) </head>

Question 11.
__________ and __________ content within this tag is displayed on the title bar.
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <title>
(D) Container tags
(E) </title>
Answer:
(C) <title>, (E) </title>

Question 12.
__________ and __________ tag includes all content which is to be developed in the web browser.
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <body>
(D) Container tags
(E) </body>
Answer:
(C) <body>, (E) </body>

Question 13.
<footer> defines a footer for a __________ or a __________
(A) Document
(B) Section
(C) Rows
(D) Columns
(E) Tags
Answer:
(A) Document, (B) Section

Question 14.
A table is made up of __________ and __________
(A) Document
(B) Section
(C) Rows
(D) Columns
(E) Tags
Answer:
(C) Rows, (D) Columns

Question 15.
The __________ and __________ used to create a table.
(A) Document
(B) Section
(C) Rows
(D) Tags
(E) Attributes
Answer:
(D) Tags, (E) Attributes

Question 16.
A Hyperlink by default appears __________ in colour with an __________
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Post
(E) Text
Answer:
(B) Blue, (C) Underline

Question 17.
The method attribute specifies __________ or __________ method to be used when submitting the form data.
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Post
(E) Text
Answer:
(A) Get, (D) Post

Question 18.
Method of form are __________ or __________
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Post
(E) Text
Answer:
(A) Get, (D) Post

Question 19.
Maxlength attribute is used with __________ and __________ type.
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Text
(E) Password
Answer:
(D) Text, (E) Password

Question 20.
Maxlength specifies the maximum number of characters which can be entered in a __________ or __________ box.
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Text
(E) Password
Answer:
(D) Text, (E) Password

Question 21.
The ‘Size’ attribute can be used with __________ and __________ type.
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Text
(E) Password
Answer:
(D) Text, (E) Password

Question 22.
The ‘Checked’ attribute specifies the default selection for options in a __________ or __________ button.
(A) Checkbox
(B) Selected
(C) Radio
(D) Value
(E) Client
Answer:
(A) Checkbox, (C) Radio

Question 23.
The attributes of <option> tag are __________ & __________
(A) Checkbox
(B) Selected
(C) Radio
(D) Value
(E) Client
Answer:
(B) Selected, (D) Value

Question 24.
JavaScript can be use for __________ side or __________ side scripting language.
(A) Checkbox
(B) Selected
(C) Radio
(D) Client
(E) Server
Answer:
(D) Client, (E) Server

Question 25.
Number data type can hold __________ as well as __________ values.
(A) Positive
(B) Negative
(C) True
(D) False
(E) Logical
Answer:
(A) Positive, (B) Negative

Question 26.
Boolean Type represents only two values ‘__________’ and ‘__________’.
(A) Positive
(B) Negative
(C) True
(D) False
(E) Logical
Answer:
(C) True, (D) False

Question 27.
Operators are used to do __________ and __________ operations.
(A) Positive
(B) Negative
(C) True
(D) Arithmetic
(E) Logical
Answer:
(D) Arithmetic, (E) Logical

Question 28.
Java script supports two types of comments __________ & __________
(A) Ok
(B) Single line comment
(C) Cancel
(D) Multiline Comment
(E) Programming
Answer:
(B) Single line comment, (D) Multiline Comment

Question 29.
Confirm() function displays confirmation message box with __________ and __________ button.
(A) Ok
(B) Single line comment
(C) Cancel
(D) Multiline comment
(E) Programming
Answer:
(A) Ok, (C) Cancel

Question 30.
A Function in any __________ and __________ languages is small part of program that we require again and again.
(A) Ok
(B) Single line comment
(C) Cancel
(D) Scripting
(E) Programming
Answer:
(D) Scripting, (E) Programming

Question 31.
Functions can be called either by an __________ or by giving __________ to that function.
(A) Event
(B) User
(C) Application
(D) Call
(E) Attributes
Answer:
(A) Event, (D) Call

Question 32.
Event is an action done by the __________ or an __________
(A) Event
(B) User
(C) Application
(D) Call
(E) Attributes
Answer:
(B) User, (C) Application

5. Multiple Choice Three Correct Answers.

Question 1.
The popular extensions of image file are __________, __________ and __________
(A) Left
(B) Png
(C) Right
(D) Jpg
(E) Gif
Answer:
(B) Png, (D) Jpg, (E) Gif

Question 2.
It aligns the table either to the __________, __________ or __________
(A) Left
(B) Png
(C) Right
(D) Center
(E) Gif
Answer:
(A) Left, (C) Right, (D) Center

Question 3.
__________, __________, __________ tags can have bgcolor attribute for specifying background color to a row or a column respectively.
(A) <tr>
(B) <th>
(C) <td>
(D) Name
(E) Size
Answer:
(A) <tr>, (B) <th>, (C) <td>

Question 4.
The attributes of <select> tag are __________, __________ & __________
(A) Name
(B) Alphabets
(C) Multiple
(D) Numbers
(E) Size
Answer:
(A) Name, (C) Multiple, (E) Size

Question 5.
When we store information it is in the form of __________, __________ or __________ values.
(A) Name
(B) Alphabets
(C) Multiple
(D) Numbers
(E) Alphanumeric
Answer:
(B) Alphabets, (D) Numbers, (E) Alphanumeric

Question 6.
In JavaScript null is, just a value which means “__________”, “__________”, “__________”
(A) Nothing
(B) Empty
(C) Unknown
(D) Arithmetic
(E) Relational
Answer:
(A) Nothing, (B) Empty, (C) Unknown

Question 7.
Most of the operators can be divided into groups __________, __________ and __________ operators.
(A) Nothing
(B) Empty
(C) Arithmetic
(D) Relational
(E) Logical
Answer:
(C) Arithmetic, (D) Relational, (E) Logical

6. Match the following.

Question 1.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) World Wide Web (A) A collection of interlinked web page
(2) Webpage (B) Web
(3) Website (C) A simple text file created using HTML
(4) Web Browser (D) A web browser is a software used to view web pages

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) World Wide Web (B) Web
(2) Webpage (C) A simple text file created using HTML
(3) Website (A) A collection of interlinked web page
(4) Web Browser (D) A web browser is a software used to view web pages

Question 2.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Web Server (A) A protocol used by WWW
(2) Uniform Resource Locator (B) An application or a computer that sends webpages
(3) HyperText Transfer Protocol (C) An address of a web page on the internet
(4) Hyper Text Markup Language (D) Enables to write code for a webpage

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Web Server (B) An application or a computer that sends webpages
(2) Uniform Resource Locator (C) An address of a web page on the internet
(3) HyperText Transfer Protocol (A) A protocol used by WWW
(4) Hyper Text Markup Language (D) Enables to write code for a webpage

Question 3.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Container Tags (A) Defines a header
(2) Empty tags (B) Paired tags
(3) <!DOCTYPE html> (C) Standalone tags
(4) <header> (D) A document type declaration

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Container Tags (B) Paired tags
(2) Empty tags (C) Standalone tags
(3) <!DOCTYPE html> (D) A document type declaration
(4) <header> (A) Defines a header

Question 4.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <nav> (A) Defines a container
(2) <section> (B) Defines an independent self-contained article
(3) <article> (C) Defines a section
(4) <aside> (D) Defines content apart from the content

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <nav> (A) Defines a container
(2) <section> (C) Defines a section
(3) <article> (B) Defines an independent self-contained article
(4) <aside> (D) Defines content apart from the content

Question 5.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <footer> (A) Defines additional details
(2) <details> (B) Displays text within it in italicized manner
(3) <b> (C) Displays text within it in Bold
(4) <i> (D) Defines a footer

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <footer> (D) Defines a footer
(2) <details> (A) Defines additional details
(3) <b> (C) Displays text within it in Bold
(4) <i> (B) Displays text within it in italicized manner

Question 6.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <u> (A) Displays text with underline
(2) <small> (B) Displays text in subscript form
(3) <sub> (C) Displays text in small font size
(4) <ins> (D) Anything that appears within <ins>…</ins> element is displayed as inserted text

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <u> (A) Displays text with underline
(2) <small> (C) Displays text in small font size
(3) <sub> (B) Displays text in subscript form
(4) <ins> (D) Anything that appears within

Question 7.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <del> (A) Smallest heading level
(2) <mark> (B) Largest heading level
(3) <H1> (C) The HTML element defines marked or highlighted text
(4) <H6> (D) Anything that appears within <del>…</del>… element, is displayed as deleted text

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <del> (D) Anything that appears within <del>…</del>… element, is displayed as deleted text
(2) <mark> (C) The HTML element defines marked or highlighted text
(3) <H1> (B) Largest heading level
(4) <H6> (A) Smallest heading level

Question 8.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1)  <IMG> tag (A) Specifies the width of the image
(2) src (B) It is used to specify the path of an image file
(3) Height (C) Specifies the height of the image
(4) Width (D) Insert an image

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1)  <IMG> tag (D) Insert an image
(2) src (B) It is used to specify the path of an image file
(3) Height (C) Specifies the height of the image
(4) Width (A) Specifies the width of the image

Question 9.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) alt (A) It is referred to as alternate text
(2) <HR> tag (B) Define paragraphs
(3) <P> tag (C) Display horizontal ruled line
(4) table (D) Rows and column

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) alt (A) It is referred as alternate text
(2) <HR> tag (C) Display horizontal ruled line
(3) <P> tag (B) Define paragraphs
(4) table (D) Rows and column

Question 10.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <table> (A) It indicates table heading
(2) <caption> (B) It is used to speedy a table heading
(3) <tr> (C) Create each row of the table
(4) <th> (D) It is used to indicate creation of a table

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <table> (D) It is used to indicate creation of a table
(2) <caption> (B) It is used to speedy a table heading
(3) <tr> (C) Create each row of the table
(4) <th> (A) It indicates table heading

Question 11.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <td> (A) It specifies data within the table
(2) Border (B) Aligns the table
(3) Border color (C) Displays border in a specific color
(4) Align (D) Display a border

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <td> (A) It specifies data within the table
(2) Border (D) Display a border
(3) Border color (C) Displays border in a specific color
(4) Align (B) Aligns the table

Question 12.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Bgcolor (A) Creates a checkbox
(2) <Input type =”text”> (B) Creates a one line textbox
(3) <Input type =”radio”> (C) Creates a radio button
(4) <Input type =”checkbox”> (D) Sets the background color

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Bgcolor (D) Sets the background color
(2) <Input type =”text”> (B) Creates a one line textbox
(3) <Input type =”radio”> (C) Creates a radio button
(4) <Input type =”checkbox”> (A) Creates a checkbox

Question 13.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <Input type =”submit”> (A) Displays a button for submitting
(2) <Input type =”password”> (B) The reset control clears the text content
(3) <Input type =”reset”> (C) Create text contents in the form of ‘*’asterik or ‘ . ‘ disc
(4) <Input type =”button”> (D) Displays push button

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <Input type =”submit”> (A) Displays a button for submitting
(2) <Input type =”password”> (C) Create text contents in the form of ‘*’asterik or ‘ . ‘ disc
(3) <Input type =”reset”> (B) The reset control clears the text content
(4) <Input type =”button”> (D) Displays push button

Question 14.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Number type (A) Division by 0
(2) String Type (B) Storing text
(3) Boolean Type (C) ‘True’ and ‘False’
(4) Infinity (D) ‘Number’ data type

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Number type (D) ‘Number’ data type
(2) String Type (B) Storing text
(3) Boolean Type (C) ‘True’ and ‘False’
(4) Infinity (A) Division by 0

Question 15.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Null (A) “Nothing”, “Empty”, “Unknown”
(2) Undefined (B) Arithmetic and logical operations
(3) Operators (C) Variable which is declared but not assigned
(4) One operand (D) Unary operator

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Null (A) “Nothing”, “Empty”, “Unknown”
(2) Undefined (C) Variable which is declared but not assigned
(3) Operators (B) Arithmetic and logical operations
(4) One operand (D) Unary operator

Question 16.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Two operands (A) Mathematical expressions
(2) Arithmetic operators (B) Binary operator
(3) Relational operators (C) Check conditions or comparison of operands
(4) Comments (D) Non-executable statements

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Two operands (B) Binary operator
(2) Arithmetic operators (A) Mathematical expressions
(3) Relational operators (C) Check conditions or comparison of operands
(4) Comments (D) Non-executable statements

Question 17.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) ParseInt() (A) Number
(2) ParseFloat() (B) Floating point
(3) Alert() (C) Displays ok and cancel buttons
(4) Prompt() (D) Message box

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) ParseInt() (A) Number
(2) ParseFloat() (B) Floating point
(3) Alert() (D) Message box
(4) Prompt() (C) Displays ok and cancel buttons

Question 18.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Confirm() (A) Function displays a confirmation message box
(2) toLowerCase() (B) Convert the given string into lower case alphabets
(3) toUpperCase() (C) Convert given string into uppercase alphabets
(4) onMouseOut (D) When the user moves the mouse away from an element

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Confirm() (A) Function displays a confirmation message box
(2) toLowerCase() (B) Convert the given string into lower case alphabets
(3) toUpperCase() (C) Convert given string into uppercase alphabets
(4) onMouseOut (D) When the user moves the mouse away from an element

Question 19.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) onClick (A) When the user presses a key
(2) onMouseOver (B) When the user moves the mouse over an element
(3) onMouseUp (C) When the user releases a mouse button over an element
(4) onKeyDown (D) When a user clicks an element
(5) onKeyUp (E) When the user releases key

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) onClick (D) When a user clicks an element
(2) onMouseOver (B) When the user moves the mouse over an element
(3) onMouseUp (C) When the user releases a mouse button over an element
(4) onKeyDown (A) When the user presses a key
(5) onKeyUp (E) When the user releases key

7. Answer Briefly.

Question 1.
What is Internet?
Answer:

  1. Online resources have become a part of our day-to-day life.
  2. The Internet is a powerful medium to transmit information.
  3. The pages of the information displayed on the internet are referred to as Webpages.
  4. The standards and formats for presenting text and graphics on the internet are developed and approved by worldwide web governing authorities.
  5. The growing demand for attractive presentation of information using electronic means gave rise to the invention of Websites.

Question 2.
Discuss the Components of the web.
Answer:

  1. WWW stands for world wide web.
  2. WWW stands for world wide web normally referred to as Web.
  3. The webpage is a simple text file created using HTML.
  4. A website is a collection of interlinked web pages containing text, images, audio, and videos.
  5. A web browser is software used to view web pages or websites available on the internet.
  6. A Web server is an application or a computer that sends webpages over the internet using the HTTP protocol.
  7. The functionality of the website is managed by the webserver.
  8. The full form of URL is Uniform Resource Locator.
  9. Uniform Resource Locator is an address of a web page on the internet.
  10. The web pages are retrieved from the original location with the help of a Uniform Resource Locator.
  11. The full form of HTTP is HyperText Transfer Protocol.
  12. HyperText Transfer Protocol is a protocol used by WWW for client-server communication.
  13. The full form of HTML is HyperText Markup Language.
  14. HyperText Markup Language enables to write code for a webpage.
  15. All the web pages in a website are linked with one another, with the help of Hypertext Links.

Question 3.
What is HTML?
Answer:

  1. HyperText Markup Language is a standard language for developing and creating interactive websites, introduced by Tim Berners Lee.
  2. HyperText Markup Language documents are created in any text editor and can be run(executed) on any computer that has a web browser.
  3. HyperText Markup Language is compatible with most web browsers.

Question 4.
Write down the classification of HTML Tags.
Answer:
HTML tags are categorized as Container tags & Empty tags

  1. Container Tags are also called paired tags.
  2. Container Tags have a beginning tag and an end tag.
  3. Empty Tags are standalone tags and do not have an end tag.

Question 5.
Discuss the structure of a web page using HTML5.
Answer:

  1. <header> defines a header for a document or a section.
  2. <nav> defines a container for navigation links.
  3. <seetion> defines a section in a document.
  4. <article> defines an independent self-contained article.
  5. <aside> defines content apart from the content (like a sidebar).
  6. <footer> defines a footer for a document or a section.
  7. <details> defines additional details.

Question 6.
Explain the Text formatting element.
Answer:

  1. Text formatting is used to make a document look attractive thereby enhancing its appearance.
  2. <b> displays text within it in Bold like Hello.
  3. <i> displays text within it in an italicized manner like Hello.
  4. <u> displays text with an underline like Hello.
  5. <small> displays text in small font size.
  6. <sub> displays text in subscript form.
  7. <sup> displays text in superscript form.
  8. The HTML <mark> element defines marked or highlighted text.

Question 7.
Explain Heading levels.
Answer:

  1. HTML provides six levels of heading tags.
  2. The <H1> tag displays text in bold and with the largest heading level.
  3. The <H6> tag displays text in the smallest heading level.

Question 8.
Explain Inserting an image, a horizontal ruled line, and a paragraph.
Answer:

  1. <IMG> tag is used to insert an image within a webpage.
  2. src is used to specify the path of an image file.
  3. Height specifies the height of the image in pixels.
  4. Width specifies the width of the image in pixels.
  5. Alt is referred to as alternate text.
  6. <IMG> is an empty tag.
  7. <hr> tag is used to display horizontal ruled line.
  8. color sets the color for the horizontal ruled line.
  9. Width specifies the length of the ruled line in % or pixels.
  10. Size sets the thickness of a ruled line.
  11. <P> tag is used to define paragraphs.

Question 9.
Write a note on creating a table.
Answer:

  1. A Table is made up of rows and columns.
  2. <table> is used to indicate the creation of a table.
  3. <caption> is used to specify a table heading.
  4. <tr> tag is used to create each row of the table.
  5. <th> indicates table heading.
  6. <td> specifies data within the table (cell content).

Question 10.
Discuss the attributes of the table.
Answer:

  1. A border attribute is required to display a border for the entire table.
  2. Border color displays borders in a specific color.
  3. Aligns the table either to the left, right, or center.
  4. Bgcolor sets the background color for the table.

Question 11.
Explain Creating hyperlinks in a web page and HTML Link colors.
Answer:

  1. Hyperlinks are used to connect one document with another document.
  2. In HTML, Links are created by using <a> tag.
  3. A Hyperlink by default appears blue in colour with an underline.
  4. A Visited link is underlined and purple.
  5. An Active link is underlined and blue.

Question 12.
Discuss the Forms in HTML.
Answer:

  1. Forms in HTML are used to accept user input.
  2. A Form is a collection of different elements also called controls.
  3. Name attributes specifies a name to a form.
  4. The Action attribute specifies the path where the form is to be submitted.
  5. The Method attribute specifies the get or post method to be used when submitting the form data.
  6. The default method of submitting form data is GET.
  7. The data submitted by using GET is visible in the address bar.
  8. The POST method of sending data does not display the form data in the address bar.

Question 13.
Explain the <Input> tag and type of control.
Answer:

  1. <Input type = “text”> creates a one-line Textbox.
  2. <Input type = “radio”> creates a Radio button.
  3. The Radio button allows one option selection against multiple choices.
  4. <Input type = “checkbox’^ creates a Checkbox.
  5. A checkbox allows more than one selection against multiple choices.
  6. <Input type = “submit”> displays a button for Submitting the form data to a server.
  7. The Password input type is used to create text contents in the form of ‘*’ asterisk or ‘•’ disc.
  8. The Reset control clears the text content entered in the form.
  9. <Input type = “Button.”> displays push button which activates on events.

Question 14.
Write down the attributes of <Input>.
Answer:

  1. The type describes the name of the control like text radio.
  2. The Name attribute is a user-defined value.
  3. Maxlength attribute is used with text and password type.
  4. Max length specifies the maximum number of characters that can be entered in a text or password box.
  5. The ‘Size’ attribute can be used with text and password type.
  6. Size specifies the width of the text box.
  7. The ‘Checked’ attribute specifies the default selection for options in a checkbox or radio button.
  8. The ‘Value’ attribute can be used with text, checkbox, radio, submit or reset.

Question 15.
Explain <Textarea> tag and its attribute.
Answer:

  1. The <Textarea> tag is used to create a textbox with multiple lines.
  2. Name is used to specify a name for the textarea.
  3. Rows specify the number of lines in a text area.
  4. Cols specify the width of a text area.
  5. Max length specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in the textarea.
  6. Placeholder specifies a short hint that describes the expected value of a textarea.
  7. Required specifies that textarea must be filled out. i.e. It can not be blank.

Question 16.
Explain the attributes of <select> and <option> tag.
Answer:

  1. <select> tag is used to create drop-down list.
  2. Name assigns a name to the control.
  3. Multiple allows the user to select more than one value.
  4. The Size attribute is used to specify the number of visible values.
  5. To define the preselected option, the ‘Selected‘ attribute is added to the <option>.
  6. Value assigns value to the option specified in the dropdown list.

Question 17.
Write down Scripting in HTML.
Answer:

  1. JavaScript was initially created to make web pages alive.
  2. A Script is a list of commands that are executed by a scripting engine.
  3. Scripts are used to generate dynamic Web pages on the Web.
  4. JavaScript can be used for the client-side or server-side scripting language.
  5. JavaScript code can be inserted in HTML program between <script> and </script> tag.
  6. The language attribute is used to set scripting language.

Question 18.
Explain Variables.
Answer:

  1. A Variable is a basic unit of storage in a JavaScript program.
  2. The variable name may consist of alphabets, digits and underscore, and dollar characters with the following rules.
  3. Standard keywords are not allowed as Variable names.
  4. Variable names can be limited to up to 255 characters.
  5. Variable name in javascript is declared with keyword ‘var’.

Question 19.
Explain Data Types.
Answer:

  1. JavaScript provides data types to store and use different types of values.
  2. Numerical value specially belongs to the ‘Number’ data type.
  3. Number data types can hold positive as well as negative values.
  4. Strings are used for storing text.
  5. Boolean type represents only two values ‘true’ and ‘false’.
  6. JavaScript returns ‘Undefined’ when a variable is declared but not assigned.

Question 20.
Discuss Operators and types of Operators.
Answer:

  1. Operators are used to doing arithmetic and logical operations.
  2. Operators that require one operand is called as Unary operator.
  3. Operators that require two operands are called Binary operators.
  4. Arithmetic operators are used in mathematical expressions.
  5. It is important to know that the Assignment operator is not ‘equal to’ operator.
  6. The assignment operator is used to assign the value of an expression to a variable.
  7. Relational operators are used to checking conditions or comparisons of operands.
  8. Logical operators are used to verifying more than one condition at a time or to negate the condition.
  9. The increment (++) operator in JavaScript is used to increment the value of the variable by one.
  10. Decrement operator in JavaScript is used to decrement the value of the variable by one.

Question 21.
Explain Comments in JavaScript.
Answer:

  1. Comments are non-executable statements in the program.
  2. Comments are used to provide information or explanation about your programming construct.
  3. Statements added in Comments are ignored by JavaScript.

Question 22.
What is Function and commonly used Built-In Functions in JavaScript?
Answer:

  1. The function is used to perform repetitive tasks whenever required.
  2. The function is a reusable code block that will be executed when it is called.
  3. parselnt() function is used to parse a string and convert it into a number
  4. parseFloat() function is used to parse a string and convert it into floating-point representation.
  5. alert() function displays an alert popup box with an ok button. This is also called a message box
  6. prompt() function is used when you want input value from the user at the time of program execution.
  7. confirm() function displays a confirmation message box with ok and cancels button
  8. toLowerCase() string function used to convert the given string into lower case alphabets
  9. toUpperCase() string function is used to convert given string into uppercase alphabets
  10. isNaN() returns ‘true’ if given value is not a number. It returns ‘false’ if the given value is a number.

Question 23.
What are User Defined Functions?
Answer:

  1. A Function in any scripting and programming language is small part of a program that we require again and again.
  2. A Function is a subprogram designed to perform a particular task.
  3. Functions can be called either by an event or by giving a call to that function.

Question 24.
Explain Event Handling.
Answer:

  1. JavaScript is an event-driven language.
  2. An event is an action done by the user or an application.
  3. JavaScript lets you execute a code when events are detected.

Question 25.
Explain Event Handler.
Answer:

  1. onMouseOut when the user moves the mouse away from an element.
  2. onClick when the user clicks an element.
  3. onMouseOver when the user moves the mouse over an element.
  4. onMouseUp when the user releases a mouse button over an element.

8A. Write Codes in HTML.

Question 1.
My First Page in HTML
Answer:
<html>
<head>
<title> First Page </title>
</head>
<body bgcolor = green >
<font color=”red” size=”20″> This is my first web page
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q1

Question 2.
Write the the HTML Program which contains Text Formatting Elements.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Example of HTML5 text formatting tags</title>
</head>
<body>
<b>This text is bold</b><br><br>
<i>This text is italic</i><br><br>
<mark>This text is marked</ mark><br><br>
This is <sub>subscript</sub> and <sup>superscript</sup><br><br>
<ins>This text is inserted to the document</ins><br><br>
<del>This text is deleted from the document</del><br><br>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q2

Question 3.
Write down the HTML program which provides six levels of the heading tags.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Heading levels</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=skyblue>
<H1>Heading level 1 Text is largest in size</H1>
<H2>Heading level 2</H2>
<H3>Heading level 3</H3>
<H4>Heading level 4</H4>
<H5>Heading level 5</H5>
<H6>Heading level 6 Text is smallest in size</H6>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q3

Question 4.
Create a table in HTML which contains 4 rows and 3 columns.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Table with 4 rows and 3 columns</title>
</head>
<body>
<table border=”2″>
<tr>
<th>Sr. No.</th>
<th>Input Device</th>
<th>Output Device</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Keyboard</td>
<td>Monitor</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Mouse</td>
<td>Printer</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td> Joystick</td>
<td>Plotter</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body></html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q4

Question 5.
Create a table in HTML with rowspan attribute.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Table with rowspan attribute</title>
</head><body>
<table border=”3″>
<tr>
<td rowspan=2>Colors</td>
<td bgcolor=red>Red</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td bgcolor=green>Green</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q5

Question 6.
Create a table in HTML with col span attribute.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title> Table with colspan</title>
</head>
<body>
<table border =”3″>
<tr>
<td colspan=”2″ align=”center”> Colors </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td bgcolor=red>Red</td>
<td bgcolor=green>Green</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q6

Question 7.
Create a Form with input elements in HTML.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Form with Input elements</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=”orange”>
<h1>use of form</h1>
<form>
Enter your name
<input type=”text” Name-‘n1″ max length=”20″><Br>
Enter your standard:
<input type=”radio” name=”r1″ value =”11″>
11<sup>th</sup>
<input type=”radio” name=”r1″ value=”12″>
12<sup>th</sup><br>
Choose your optional subjects : <br>
<input type=”checkbox” name=”c1″ Value=”Hindi”>Hindi<br>
<input type=”checkbox” name=”c1″ Value=”German”>German<br>
<input type=”checkbox” name=”c1″ Value=”Biology”>Biology<br>
<input type=”checkbox” name=”c1″ Value=”IT”>IT<br>
<input type=”submit” value=”Submit”><br>
</form>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q7

Question 8.
Create a Form element and textarea in HTML.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title> Form elements and textarea</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor = “cyan” text=”Red”>
<h1> Use of form elements </h1>
<form method = “post” action = “data.php”>
Enter your name:
<input type = “text” name = “fn”> <br>
Select your city :
<select name=”ct”>
<option>Pune</option>
<option>Nagpur</option>
<option>Solapur</option>
</select><br>
Enter your address: <textarea name = “address” rows = “3” cols = “30”placeholder = “your address” required>
</textarea> <br>
<input type = “submit” value = “send”>
</form>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q8

Question 9.
Write down the HTML 5 program it includes semantic tags like header, footer & nav.
Answer:
<!Doctype Html>
<html>
<head>
<title> Html 5 program it includes semantic tags like header, footer & nav </title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=yellow>
<header>
<h1>HTML5 includes new semantics</h1>
<p>It includes semantic tags like header, footer, nav </header>
<header>
<h1>Example of complete HTML5 Basics</h1>
<h2>The markup of the future under development.</h2>
</header>
<nav>
<h1><p>The nav element represents a section of navigation links. It is suitable for either site navigation or a table of contents.</p></h1>
<a href=”/”>http://www.gmail.com</a><br><a href=”http://www.facebook.com”>Facebook website</a><br>
</nav>
<aside>
<h1>Other education based websites of State</h1>
<a href=”http://mahahsscboard.ac.in”>State Board website</a><br>
<a href=”http://examinfo.mhhsc.ac.in”>Online Exam Website<a/><br>
</aside>
<section>
<h1>Impressive Web Designing</h1>
<p>The aside element is for content that is tangentially related to the content around it, and is typically useful for marking up sidebars.</p></section><section> <h1>Articles on:Article tag</h1>
</section>
<article>
<p>The article element represents an independent section of a document, page or site. It is suitable for content like news or blog articles, forum posts or individual comments.</p>
</article>
<footer>© 2020 Reliable.</footer>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q9

8B. Write a program in Javascript.

Question 1.
Write a JavaScript program to calculate the multiplication of two numbers.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>multiplication of two numbers</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=”yellow”>
<h1>Program to calculate multiplication of two numbers </h1>
<script language=”javascript”>
var a,b,c;
a=75; b=100.45;
c=a*b;
document.write(“<br><h1>multiplication of two numbers : “+c+”</h1>”);
</script>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q1

Question 2.
Write a program to calculate the area of a circle.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Area of circle</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=yellow>
<h1> Program to calculate area of circle </h1>
<script language=”javascript”>
var r,area;
r=prompt(“Enter the radius of circle”);
area=3.14*r*r;
document.write(“<h1>you entered radius value: </h1>” +r);
document.write(“<h1>Area of circle is: </h1>”+area);
</script>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q2.1

Question 3.
Write a Program to check number is even or odd.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Program to check number is even or odd</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=”green”>
<h1> Program to check number is even or odd </h1>
<script language=”javascript”> var a,b
a=prompt(“Enter your value:-“);
b=parseInt(a);
// input is converted into number data type
if(b%2==0)
alert(“Number is even”); else
alert(“Number is odd”);
</script>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q3
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q3.1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q3.2

Question 4.
Write a Java Script Program which contains Conditional Statement.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>conditional statement</title>
<script language=”javascript”>
function check()
{
var age;
age=form1.t1.value;
if(age>=18)
alert(“Qualifies for driving”);
else
alert(”Does not qualifies for driving”);
}
</script>
</head>
<body>
<form name=”form 1″>
<center>Enter your age:-<input type=”text” name=”t1″><br><br>
<input type=”button” value=”SUBMIT” onClick=”check()”>
</form>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q4
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q4.1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q4.2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q4.3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Balbharati Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

1. Fill in the Blanks.

Question 1.
A ___________ often abbreviated as DB.
Answer:
Database

Question 2.
___________ is collection of interrelated data.
Answer:
Database

Question 3.
Full for of DBMS is ___________
Answer:
Database Management System

Question 4.
A ___________ is a software for creating and managing databases.
Answer:
Database Management System

Question 5.
The ___________ provides users and programmers with a systematic way to create, retrieve, update and manage data.
Answer:
Database Management System

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 6.
___________ holds a fixed-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
Answer:
CHAR

Question 7.
___________ holds a variable length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
Answer:
VARCHAR

Question 8.
___________ can represent numbers with or without the fractional part.
Answer:
DECIMAL

Question 9.
___________ is used for storing integer values.
Answer:
INT

Question 10.
___________ holds the date including day, month and year.
Answer:
DATE

Question 11.
___________ holds time. Format: HH:MM:SS.
Answer:
TIME()

Question 12.
This logical structure of database is known as a ___________
Answer:
Model

Question 13.
___________ define how the data is connected to each other and how they are processed and stored inside the system.
Answer:
Data model

Question 14.
___________ describes the method of storing and retrieving the data.
Answer:
Data model

Question 15.
___________ is the primary data model, which is used widely around the world for data storage and processing.
Answer:
Relational data model

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 16.
___________ is simple and has all the properties and capabilities required to process data with storage efficiency.
Answer:
Relational data model

Question 17.
___________ ensures that all operations within the work unit are completed successfully.
Answer:
Atomicity

Question 18.
___________ ensures that the database properly changes states upon a successfully committed transaction.
Answer:
Consistency

Question 19.
___________ enables transactions to operate independently of and transparent to each other.
Answer:
Isolation

Question 20.
___________ ensures that the result or effect of a committed transaction persists in case of a system failure.
Answer:
Durability

Question 21.
RDBMS stands for ___________
Answer:
Relational Database Management System

Question 22.
In ___________ a database is considered as a collection of interrelated data.
Answer:
Relational Database Management System

Question 23.
The ___________ is the basic data storage unit in a Relational database.
Answer:
Table

Question 24.
___________ consists of columns and rows.
Answer:
Table

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 25.
A ___________ consists of one or more tables according to which data is stored in a table.
Answer:
Database

Question 26.
___________ designer decides the name of the table and titles of columns.
Answer:
Database

Question 27.
A ___________ is composed of fields and contains all the data about one particular person, company, or item in a database.
Answer:
Record

Question 28.
Record is also called as a ___________
Answer:
Tuple

Question 29.
A column or a combination of columns that can be used to identify one or more rows (tuples) in a table is called a ___________ of the table.
Answer:
Key

Question 30.
The group of one or more columns used to uniquely identify each row of a relation is called its ___________
Answer:
Primary Key

Question 31.
___________ is a field (or collection of fields) in one table that refers to the Primary Key in another table.
Answer:
Foreign Key

Question 32.
___________ link data from individual tables to increase the usefulness of the database.
Answer:
Relationships

Question 33.
A ___________ in the context of databases, is a situation that exists between two relational database tables.
Answer:
Relationship

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 34.
In a ___________ relationship, one record in a table is associated with one and only one record in another table.
Answer:
One-to-One

Question 35.
___________ relationships can also be viewed as Many-to-One relationships, depending on which way you look at it.
Answer:
One-to-Many

Question 36.
A ___________ relationship occurs when multiple records in a table are associated with multiple records in another table.
Answer:
Many-to-Many

Question 37.
Full form of SQL is ___________
Answer:
Structured Query Language

Question 38.
___________ is the standard language for Relational Database Management System.
Answer:
Structured Query Language

Question 39.
Full form of DDL is ___________
Answer:
Data Definition Language

Question 40.
___________ statements or commands are used to define and modify the database structure of your tables or schema.
Answer:
Data Definition Language

Question 41.
Full form of DML is ___________
Answer:
Data Manipulation Language

Question 42.
___________ statements or commands are used for managing data within tables.
Answer:
Data Manipulation Language

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 43.
Full form of DCL is ___________
Answer:
Data Control Language

Question 44.
___________ is used to control user access in a database.
Answer:
Data Control Language

2. True or False.

Question 1.
A database is often abbreviated as DB.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Hardware is a collection of interrelated data.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
The full form of DBMS is Database Management System.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
A Database Management System is software for creating and managing databases.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 5.
Information Technology provides users and programmers with a systematic way to create, retrieve, update and manage data.
Answer:
False

Question 6.
DECIMAL holds a fixed-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
Answer:
False

Question 7.
VARCHAR holds a variable-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
Answer:
True

Question 8.
CHAR can represent numbers with or without the fractional part.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
INT is used for storing integer values.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
TIME() holds the date including day, month, and year.
Answer:
False

Question 11.
DATE holds time. Format: HH:MM:SS.
Answer:
False

Question 12.
This logical structure of the database is known as a computer.
Answer:
False

Question 13.
Information Technology defines how the data is connected to each other and how they are processed and stored inside the system.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 14.
The data model describes the method of storing and retrieving the data.
Answer:
True

Question 15.
The relational data model is the primary data model, which is used widely around the world for data storage and processing.
Answer:
True

Question 16.
The relational data model is simple and has all the properties and capabilities required to process data with storage efficiency.
Answer:
True

Question 17.
Consistency ensures that all operations within the work unit are completed successfully.
Answer:
False

Question 18.
Atomicity ensures that the database properly changes states upon a successfully committed transaction.
Answer:
False

Question 19.
Isolation enables transactions to operate independently of and be transparent to each other.
Answer:
True

Question 20.
Durability ensures that the result or effect of a committed transaction persists in case of a system failure.
Answer:
True

Question 21.
RDBMS stands for Relational Database Management System.
Answer:
True

Question 22.
In Relational Database Management System a database is considered as a collection of interrelated data.
Answer:
True

Question 23.
The Table is the basic data storage unit in a Relational database.
Answer:
True

Question 24.
The table consists of columns and rows.
Answer:
True

Question 25.
A record consists of one or more tables according to which data is stored in a table.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 26.
The record designer decides the name of the table and the titles of columns.
Answer:
False

Question 27.
A Tuple is composed of fields and contains all the data about one particular person, company, or item in a database.
Answer:
False

Question 28.
Record is also called a Tuple.
Answer:
True

Question 29.
A column or a combination of columns that can be used to identify one or more rows (tuples) in a table is called a Key of the table.
Answer:
True

Question 30.
The group of one or more columns used to uniquely identify each row of a relation is called its Primary Key.
Answer:
True

Question 31.
Foreign Key is a field (or collection of fields) in one table that refers to the Primary Key in another table.
Answer:
True

Question 32.
Relationships link data from individual tables to increase the usefulness of the database.
Answer:
True

Question 33.
A Relationship in the context of databases is a situation that exists between two relational database tables.
Answer:
True

Question 34.
In a Many-to-Many relationship, one record in a table is associated with one and only one record in another table.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 35.
One-to-Many relationships can also be viewed as Many-to-One relationships, depending on which way you look at them.
Answer:
True

Question 36.
A One-to-One relationship occurs when multiple records in a table are associated with multiple records in another table.
Answer:
False

Question 37.
The full form of SQL is Structured Query Language.
Answer:
True

Question 38.
Data Definition Language is the standard language for Relational Database Management System.
Answer:
False

Question 39.
The full form of DDL is Data Definition Language.
Answer:
True

Question 40.
Structured Query Language statements or commands are used to define and modify the database structure of your tables or schema.
Answer:
False

Question 41.
The full form of DML is Data Manipulation Language.
Answer:
True

Question 42.
Data Definition Language statements or commands are used for managing data within tables.
Answer:
False

Question 43.
The full form of DCL is Data Control Language.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 44.
Data Manipulation Language is used to control user access in a database.
Answer:
False

3. Multiple Choice Question (Single Choice)

Question 1.
A ___________ often abbreviated as DB.
(A) Database
(B) Direct Banking
(C) Data Bank
(D) Direct Bank
Answer:
(A) Database

Question 2.
___________ is a collection of interrelated data.
(A) Database
(B) Direct Banking
(C) Data Bank
(D) Direct Bank
Answer:
(A) Database

Question 3.
Full form of DBMS is ___________
(A) Database Machine System
(B) Direct Banking Management System
(C) Data Bank Management
(D) Database Management System
Answer:
(D) Database Management System

Question 4.
A ___________ is a software for creating and managing databases.
(A) Database
(B) Direct Banking
(C) Data Bank
(D) Database Management System
Answer:
(D) Database Management System

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 5.
The ___________ provides users and programmers with a systematic way to create, retrieve, update and manage data.
(A) Database
(B) Direct Banking
(C) Data Bank
(D) Database Management System
Answer:
(D) Database Management System

Question 6.
___________ holds a fixed-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
(A) CHAR
(B) VARCHAR
(C) DECIMAL
(D) INT
Answer:
(A) CHAR

Question 7.
___________ holds a variable-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
(A) CHAR
(B) VARCHAR
(C) DECIMAL
(D) INT
Answer:
(B) VARCHAR

Question 8.
___________ can represent numbers with or without the fractional part.
(A) CHAR
(B) VARCHAR
(C) DECIMAL
(D) INT
Answer:
(C) DECIMAL

Question 9.
___________ is used for storing integer values.
(A) CHAR
(B) VARCHAR
(C) DECIMAL
(D) INT
Answer:
(D) INT

Question 10.
___________ holds the date including day, month and year.
(A) DATE
(B) TIME()
(C) CHAR
(D) VARCHAR
Answer:
(A) DATE

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 11.
___________ holds time. Format: HH:MM:SS.
(A) DATE
(B) TIME()
(C) CHAR
(D) VARCHA
Answer:
(B) TIME()

Question 12.
This logical structure of database is known as a ___________
(A) Model
(B) Data model
(C) Storage and Processing
(D) Relational data model
Answer:
(A) Model

Question 13.
___________ define how the data is connected to each other and how they are processed and stored inside the system.
(A) Model
(B) Data model
(C) Storage and Processing
(D) Relational data model
Answer:
(B) Data model

Question 14.
___________ describes the method of storing and retrieving the data.
(A) Model
(B) Data model
(C) Storage and Processing
(D) Relational data model
Answer:
(B) Data model

Question 15.
___________ is the primary data model, which is used widely around the world for data storage and processing.
(A) Model
(B) Data model
(C) Storage and Processing
(D) Relational data model
Answer:
(D) Relational data model

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 16.
___________ is simple and has all the properties and capabilities required to process data with storage efficiency.
(A) Model
(B) Data model
(C) Storage and Processing
(D) Relational data model
Answer:
(D) Relational data model

Question 17.
___________ ensures that all operations within the work unit are completed successfully.
(A) Atomicity
(B) Consistency
(C) Isolation
(D) Durability
Answer:
(A) Atomicity

Question 18.
___________ ensures that the database properly changes states upon a successfully committed transaction.
(A) Atomicity
(B) Consistency
(C) Isolation
(D) Durability
Answer:
(B) Consistency

Question 19.
___________ enables transactions to operate independently of and transparent to each other.
(A) Atomicity
(B) Consistency
(C) Isolation
(D) Durability
Answer:
(C) Isolation

Question 20.
___________ ensures that the result or effect of a committed transaction persists in case of a system failure.
(A) Atomicity
(B) Consistency
(C) Isolation
(D) Durability
Answer:
(D) Durability

Question 21.
RDBMS stands for ___________
(A) Relational Database Management System
(B) Regional Database Management System
(C) Recovery Database Management System
(D) Recovery Database Microsoft System
Answer:
(A) Relational Database Management System

Question 22.
In ___________ a database is considered as a collection of interrelated data.
(A) Relational Database Management System
(B) Regional Database Management System
(C) Recovery Database Management System
(D) Recovery Database Microsoft System
Answer:
(A) Relational Database Management System

Question 23.
The ___________ is the basic data storage unit in a Relational database.
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(A) Table

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 24.
___________ consists of columns and rows.
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(A) Table

Question 25.
A ___________ consists of one or more tables according to which data is stored in a table.
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(B) Database

Question 26.
___________ designer decides the name of the table and titles of columns.
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(B) Database

Question 27.
A ___________ is composed of fields and contains all the data about one particular person, company, or item in a database
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(C) Record

Question 28.
Record is also called as a ___________
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(D) Tuple

Question 29.
A column or a combination of columns that can be used to identify one or more rows (tuples) in a table is called a ___________ of the table.
(A) Key
(B) Primary Key
(C) Foreign Key
(D) Table
Answer:
(A) Key

Question 30.
The group of one or more columns used to uniquely identify each row of a relation is called its ___________
(A) Key
(B) Primary Key
(C) Foreign Key
(D) Table
Answer:
(B) Primary Key

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 31.
___________ is a field (or collection of fields) in one table that refers to the Primary Key in another table.
(A) Key
(B) Primary Key
(C) Foreign Key
(D) Table
Answer:
(C) Foreign Key

Question 32.
___________ link data from individual tables to increase the usefulness of the database.
(A) Relationships
(B) Primary Key
(C) Foreign Key
(D) Table
Answer:
(A) Relationships

Question 33.
A ___________ in the context of databases, is a situation that exists between two relational database tables.
(A) Relationship
(B) Primary Key
(C) Foreign Key
(D) Table
Answer:
(A) Relationship

Question 34.
In a ___________ relationship, one record in a table is associated with one and only one record in another table.
(A) One-to-One
(B) One-to-Many
(C) Many-to-Many
(D) Database
Answer:
(A) One-to-One

Question 35.
___________ relationships can also be viewed as Many-to-One relationships, depending on which way you look at it.
(A) One-to-One
(B) One-to-Many
(C) Many-to-Many
(D) Database
Answer:
(B) One-to-Many

Question 36.
A ___________ relationship occurs when multiple records in a table are associated with multiple records in another table.
(A) One-to-One
(B) One-to-Many
(C) Many-to-Many
(D) Database
Answer:
(C) Many-to-Many

Question 37.
Full form of SQL is ___________
(A) Structured Query Language
(B) Structured Question Language
(C) Sequence Question Language
(D) Simple Query Language
Answer:
(A) Structured Query Language

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 38.
___________ is the standard language for Relational Database Management System.
(A) Structured Query Language
(B) Structured Question Language
(C) Sequence Question Language
(D) Simple Query Language
Answer:
(A) Structured Query Language

Question 39.
Full form of DDL is ___________
(A) Data Definition Language
(B) Database Device Language
(C) Device Definition Language
(D) Data Division Language
Answer:
(A) Data Definition Language

Question 40.
___________ statements or commands are used to define and modify the database structure of your tables or schema.
(A) Data Definition Language
(B) Database Device Language
(C) Device Definition Language
(D) Data Division Language
Answer:
(A) Data Definition Language

Question 41.
Full form of DML is ___________
(A) Data Manipulation Language
(B) Data Machine Language
(C) Data Management Language
(D) Device Manipulation Language
Answer:
(A) Data Manipulation Language

Question 42.
___________ statements or commands are used for managing data within tables.
(A) Data Manipulation Language
(B) Data Machine Language
(C) Data Management Language
(D) Device Manipulation Language
Answer:
(A) Data Manipulation Language

Question 43.
Full form of DCL is ___________
(A) Dynamic Control Language
(B) Data Control Language
(C) Data Control List
(D) Dynamic Control List
Answer:
(B) Data Control Language

Question 44.
___________ is used to control user access in a database.
(A) Dynamic Control Language
(B) Data Control Language
(C) Data Control List
(D) Dynamic Control List
Answer:
(B) Data Control Language

4. Multiple Choice Two Correct Answers.

Question 1.
A Database Management System is a software for ___________ and ___________ databases.
(A) Creating
(B) Storing
(C) Retrieving
(D) Managing
(E) Processing
Answer:
(A) Creating, (D) Managing

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 2.
Data model describes the method of ___________ and ___________ the data.
(A) Creating
(B) Storing
(C) Retrieving
(D) Managing
(E) Processing
Answer:
(B) Storing, (C) Retrieving

Question 3.
Relational data model is the primary data model, which is used widely around the world for ___________ and ___________
(A) Creating
(B) Storing
(C) Retrieving
(D) Data storage
(E) Processing
Answer:
(D) Data storage, (E) Processing

Question 4.
Relational data model is simple and has all the ___________ and ___________ required to process data with storage efficiency.
(A) Properties
(B) Capabilities
(C) Retrieving
(D) Data storage
(E) Processing
Answer:
(A) Properties, (B) Capabilities

Question 5.
A table consists of information which is stored under different headings, called as ___________ or ___________
(A) Properties
(B) Fields
(C) Capabilities
(D) Retrieving
(E) Columns
Answer:
(B) Fields, (E) Columns

Question 6.
Table consists of ___________ and ___________
(A) Properties
(B) Fields
(C) Capabilities
(D) Columns
(E) Rows
Answer:
(D) Columns, (E) Rows

Question 7.
A Database consists of one or more ___________ according to which ___________ is stored in a table.
(A) Tables
(B) Data
(C) Capabilities
(D) Columns
(E) Rows
Answer:
(A) Tables, (B) Data

Question 8.
Database designer decides the name of the ___________ and ___________ of columns.
(A) Schema
(B) Table
(C) Fields
(D) Titles
(E) Capabilities
Answer:
(B) Table, (D) Titles

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 9.
Data Definition Language statements or commands are used to define and modify the database structure of your ___________ or ___________
(A) Table
(B) Schema
(C) Fields
(D) Titles
(E) Capabilities
Answer:
(A) Table, (B) Schema

5. Multiple Choice Three Correct Answers.

Question 1.
Database Management System stores data in such a way that it becomes easier to ___________, ___________ and ___________
(A) Retrieve
(B) Hierarchical
(C) Manipulate
(D) Update Information
(E) Network
Answer:
(A) Retrieve, (C) Manipulate, (D) Update Information

Question 2.
There are different data models like ___________ model, ___________ model and ___________ model.
(A) Network
(B) Hierarchical
(C) Relational
(D) Retrieve
(E) Manipulate
Answer:
(A) Network, (B) Hierarchical, (C) Relational

Question 3.
There are 3 types of relationships in relational database design ___________, ___________ & ___________
(A) Retrieve
(B) Manipulate
(C) One-to-One
(D) One-to-Many (or Many-to-One)
(E) Many-to-Many
Answer:
(C) One-to-One, (D) One-to-Many (or Many-to-One), (E) Many-to-Many

Question 4.
SQL is Structured Query Language, which is a computer language for ___________, ___________ and ___________ data stored in a relational database.
(A) Relational
(B) Storing
(C) Manipulating
(D) Retrieving
(E) Network
Answer:
(B) Storing, (C) Manipulating, (D) Retrieving

6. Match the following.

Question 1.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Database (A) Raw facts
(2) Data (B) Creating and managing databases
(3) Information (C) Collection of interrelated data
(4) DBMS (D) Processed data

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Database (C) Collection of interrelated data
(2) Data (A) Raw facts
(3) Information (D) Processed data
(4) DBMS (B) Creating and managing databases

Question 2.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Advantages of DBMS (A) Authorised users
(2) Data integrity (B) Data is accurate and consistent
(3) Data Security (C) Reducing Data Redundancy
(4) Backup and Recovery (D) Restores the database

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Advantages of DBMS (C) Reducing Data Redundancy
(2) Data integrity (B) Data is accurate and consistent
(3) Data Security (A) Authorised users
(4) Backup and Recovery (D) Restores the database

Question 3.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) CHAR (A) It is used for storing integer values
(2) VARCHAR (B) It can represent numbers
(3) DECIMAL (C) Holds a variable-length string
(4) INT (D) Holds a fixed-length string

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) CHAR (D) Holds a fixed-length string
(2) VARCHAR (C) Holds a variable-length string
(3) DECIMAL (B) It can represent numbers
(4) INT (A) It is used for storing integer values

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 4.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) DATE (A) It holds the date
(2) TIME (B) It holds time
(3) Model (C) Logical structure of database
(4) Relational data model (D) Primary data model

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) DATE (A) It holds the date
(2) TIME (B) It holds time
(3) Model (C) Logical structure of database
(4) Relational data model (D) Primary data model

Question 5.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Atomicity (A) Successfully committed transaction
(2) Consistency (B) Completed successfully
(3) Isolation (C) Persists in case of a system failure
(4) Durability (D) Operate independently

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Atomicity (B) Completed successfully
(2) Consistency (A) Successfully committed transaction
(3) Isolation (D) Operate independently
(4) Durability (C) Persists in case of a system failure

Question 6.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) RDBMS (A) Storage unit in a Relational database
(2) Table (B) Collection of interrelated data
(3) Database designer (C) Tuple
(4) Record (D) Decides the name of the table and titles of Columns

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) RDBMS (B) Collection of interrelated data
(2) Table (A) Storage unit in a Relational database
(3) Database designer (D) Decides the name of the table and titles of Columns
(4) Record (C) Tuple

Question 7.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Primary Key (A) Managing data within tables
(2) Structured Query Language (B) Uniquely identify each row
(3) Data Definition Language (C) Storing, manipulating, and retrieving data
(4) Data Manipulation Language (D) Define and modify the database

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Primary Key (B) Uniquely identify each row
(2) Structured Query Language (C) Storing, manipulating, and retrieving data
(3) Data Definition Language (D) Define and modify the database
(4) Data Manipulation Language (A) Managing data within tables

Question 8.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) SELECT (A) Extracts data from a table
(2) UPDATE (B) Updates data in a table
(3) DELETE (C) Deletes data from a table
(4) INSERT INTO (D) Insert data into a table

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) SELECT (A) Extracts data from a table
(2) UPDATE (B) Updates data in a table
(3) DELETE (C) Deletes data from a table
(4) INSERT INTO (D) Insert data into a table

7. Answer Briefly.

Question 1.
What are Database and DBMS?
Answer:

  1. A Database is often abbreviated as DB.
  2. A database is a collection of interrelated data.
  3. Full form of DBMS is Database Management System
  4. A Database Management System is software for creating and managing databases.
  5. The Database Management System provides users and programmers with a systematic way to create, retrieve, update and manage data.

Question 2.
Discuss the various Data types.
Answer:

  1. CHAR holds a fixed-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
  2. VARCHAR holds a variable-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
  3. DECIMAL can represent numbers with or without the fractional part.
  4. INT is used for storing integer values.
  5. DATE holds the date including day, month, and year.
  6. TIME() holds time. Format: HH:MM:SS.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 3.
Explain Data Model and Relational Model.
Answer:

  1. This logical structure of the database is known as a Model.
  2. The data model defines how the data is connected to each other and how they are processed and stored inside the system.
  3. The data model describes the method of storing and retrieving the data.
  4. The relational data model is the primary data model, which is used widely around the world for data storage and processing.
  5. The relational data model is simple and has all the properties and capabilities required to process data with storage efficiency.

Question 4.
Write down the Properties of Transactions.
Answer:

  1. Atomicity ensures that all operations within the work unit are completed successfully.
  2. Consistency ensures that the database properly changes states upon a successfully committed transaction.
  3. Isolation enables transactions to operate independently of and be transparent to each other.
  4. Durability ensures that the result or effect of a committed transaction persists in case of a system failure.

Question 5.
Explain the concept of RDBMS.
Answer:

  1. RDBMS stands for Relational Database Management System.
  2. In Relational Database Management System a database is considered as a collection of interrelated data.

Question 6.
Discuss the basic database concept.
Answer:

  1. The Table is the basic data storage unit in a Relational database.
  2. The table consists of columns and rows.
  3. A database consists of one or more tables according to which data is stored in a table.
  4. The database designer decides the name of the table and the titles of columns.
  5. A record is composed of fields and contains all the data about one particular person, company, or item in a database.
  6. Record is also called a Tuple,
  7. A column or a combination of columns that can be used to identify one or more rows (tuples) in a table is called a Key of the table.
  8. The group of one or more columns used to uniquely identify each row of a relation is called its Primary Key.
  9. Foreign Key is a field (or collection of fields) in one table that refers to the Primary Key in another table.

Question 7.
Explain Relationships in the database.
Answer:

  1. Relationships link data from individual tables to increase the usefulness of the database.
  2. A Relationship in the context of databases is a situation that exists between two relational database tables.

Question 8.
Discuss the types of relationships in Relational Database Design.
Answer:

  1. In a One-to-One relationship, one record in a table is associated with one and only one record in another table.
  2. One-to-Many relationships can also be viewed as Many-to-One relationships, depending on which way you look at them.
  3. A Many-to-Many relationship occurs when multiple records in a table are associated with multiple records in another table.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 9.
What is SQL and categories of SQL commands?
Answer:

  1. The full form of SQL is Structured Query Language.
  2. Structured Query Language is the standard language for Relational Database Management Systems.
  3. The full form of DDL is Data Definition Language.
  4. Data Definition Language statements or commands are used to define and modify the database structure of your tables or schema.
  5. The full form of DML is Data Manipulation Language.
  6. Data Manipulation Language statements or commands are used for managing data within tables.
  7. The full form of DCL is Data Control Language.
  8. Data Control Language is used to control user access in a database.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Balbharati Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

1. Fill in the Blanks.

Question 1.
______________ encompasses all of the technologies that we use in order to create, collect, process, protect and store information.
Answer:
Information Technology

Question 2.
______________ refers to hardware, software (computer programs), and computer networks.
Answer:
Information Technology

Question 3.
Full form of ICT is ______________
Answer:
Information and Communication Technology

Question 4.
______________ concept involves transfer and use of all kinds of information.
Answer:
Information and Communication Technology

Question 5.
______________ is the foundation of economy and a driving force of social changes in the 21st century.
Answer:
Information and Communication Technology

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 6.
______________ can be any character, text, word, number or raw facts.
Answer:
Data

Question 7.
______________ is data formatted in a manner that allows it to be utilized by human beings in some significant way.
Answer:
Information

Question 8.
The word Computer is derived from a Latin word ______________
Answer:
Computare

Question 9.
An electronic device which accepts input from the user, processes it according to the instructions given to it and gives the required result in the form of output, is a ______________
Answer:
Computer

Question 10.
A ______________ can process data, images, audio, video and graphics.
Answer:
Computer

Question 11.
______________ accepts data or instructions by way of input.
Answer:
Computer

Question 12.
______________ stores data.
Answer:
Computer

Question 13.
______________ can process data as required by the user.
Answer:
Computer

Question 14.
______________ gives results in the form of output.
Answer:
Computer

Question 15.
______________ controls all operations inside a computer.
Answer:
Computer

Question 16.
______________ is a specification detailing of how a set of software and hardware technology standards interact to form a computer system.
Answer:
Computer Architecture

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 17.
______________ refers to how a computer system is designed and how it works.
Answer:
Computer Architecture

Question 18.
______________ helps users to enter data and commands into a computer system.
Answer:
Input unit

Question 19.
The main function of ______________ devices is to direct commands and data into computer.
Answer:
Input

Question 20.
______________ is an input device that enters numbers and characters.
Answer:
Keyboard

Question 21.
A ______________ can be an input device for entering directions and commands.
Answer:
Mouse

Question 22.
Full form of CPU is ______________
Answer:
Central Processing Unit

Question 23.
After receiving data and commands from users, a computer system has to process it according to the instructions provided. Here, it has to rely on a component called the ______________
Answer:
Central Processing Unit

Question 24.
The ______________ further uses these three elements Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Control Unit and Memory Unit.
Answer:
Central Processing Unit

Question 25.
Full form of ALU is ______________
Answer:
Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Question 26.
______________ part of the CPU performs arithmetic operations.
Answer:
Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Question 27.
______________ can even perform logical functions like the comparison of data.
Answer:
Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 28.
______________ is the back bone of computers.
Answer:
Control Unit

Question 29.
______________ is responsible for coordinating tasks between all components of a computer system.
Answer:
Control Unit

Question 30.
The ______________ collects data from input units and sends it to processing units depending on its nature.
Answer:
Control Unit

Question 31.
______________ transmits processed data to output units to facilitate users.
Answer:
Control Unit

Question 32.
Once a user enters data using input devices, the computer system stores this data in its ______________
Answer:
Memory Unit

Question 33.
The ______________ uses a set of pre-programmed instructions to further transmit this data to other parts of the CPU.
Answer:
Memory Unit

Question 34.
______________ is internal memory of the computer.
Answer:
Primary Memory

Question 35.
______________ is also known as main memory.
Answer:
Primary Memory

Question 36.
______________ holds the data and instruction on which computer is currently working.
Answer:
Primary Memory

Question 37.
RAM stands for ______________
Answer:
Random Access Memory

Question 38.
______________ is known as read/write memory.
Answer:
Random Access Memory

Question 39.
______________ is generally referred to as main memory of the computer system.
Answer:
Random Access Memory

Question 40.
______________ is a temporary memory.
Answer:
Random Access Memory

Question 41.
______________ is also called as Volatile Memory.
Answer:
Random Access Memory

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 42.
ROM stands for ______________
Answer:
Read Only Memory

Question 43.
______________ is a Permanent Type memory.
Answer:
Read Only Memory

Question 44.
______________ cannot be overwritten by the computer.
Answer:
Read Only Memory

Question 45.
______________ is also called Non-Volatile Memory.
Answer:
Read Only Memory

Question 46.
______________ is an external memory of the computer.
Answer:
Secondary Memory

Question 47.
______________ is used to store the huge amount of different programs and information.
Answer:
Secondary Memory

Question 48.
______________ basically reproduce the data formatted by the computer for user’s benefit.
Answer:
Output Unit

Question 49.
______________ is a binary digit that holds only one of two values.
Answer:
Bit

Question 50.
A group of 4 bits is called a ______________
Answer:
Nibble

Question 51.
A group of 8 bits is called a ______________
Answer:
Byte

Question 52.
A ______________ is the smallest unit, which can represent a data item or a character.
Answer:
Byte

Question 53.
1 Byte is ______________
Answer:
8 Bits

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 54.
1 KiloByte (KB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 Bytes

Question 55.
1 MegaByte (MB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 KiloBytes

Question 56.
1 GigaByte (GB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 MegaBytes

Question 57.
1 TeraByte (TB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 GigaBytes

Question 58.
1 PetaByte (PB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 TeraBytes

Question 59.
1 ExaByte (EB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 PetaBytes

Question 60.
______________ comprises of the physical components that a computer system requires to function.
Answer:
Computer hardware

Question 61.
A set of instructions given to the computer is known as a ______________
Answer:
Program

Question 62.
Program or set of programs are called as ______________
Answer:
Software

Question 63.
______________ is a generic term used to describe computer programs.
Answer:
Software

Question 64.
______________ refers to the software which releases code in public domain for anyone to use.
Answer:
Open source software

Question 65.
Full form of FOSS ______________
Answer:
Free Open Source Software Policy

Question 66.
______________ and it enabled them to save some millions of rupees each year in licensing costs.
Answer:
Free Open Source Software Policy

Question 67.
In case of ______________, user has to purchase the software before using it.
Answer:
Closed Source Software

Question 68.
______________ is a program or group of programs designed for end users.
Answer:
Application Software

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 69.
______________ is also called end-user programs.
Answer:
Application Software

Question 70.
______________ is a set of instructions required for a computer to work.
Answer:
System Software

Question 71.
______________ is a program that allows different applications and various components of hardware.
Answer:
Linux Operating System

Question 72.
A computer would not be able to function correctly without an ______________
Answer:
Operating System

Question 73.
An ______________ is a software program that empowers the computer hardware to communicate and operate with the computer software.
Answer:
Operating System

Question 74.
The ______________ boots up the computer and makes sure that everything is operational.
Answer:
Operating System

Question 75.
The ______________ is also what runs the cell phone and most of the electronic devices.
Answer:
Operating System

Question 76.
The ______________ usually come preloaded on any computer, tablet, laptop or cell phone that user buy.
Answer:
Operating System

Question 77.
Full form of DOS is ______________
Answer:
Disk Operating System

Question 78.
______________ is a series of operating systems that are designed by Microsoft.
Answer:
Windows

Question 79.
______________ is the most commonly used operating system.
Answer:
Windows

Question 80.
Apple Corporation’s registered operating system is called ______________
Answer:
Mac OS

Question 81.
______________ is an open-source operating system created by Google.
Answer:
Chrome OS

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 82.
______________ is an open-source, portable, multi- multiprogramming, operating system.
Answer:
Linux

Question 83.
______________ is a free and open-source operating system for mobile phones provided by Google.
Answer:
Android

Question 84.
______________ is used by Nokia phones. This is closed source OS.
Answer:
Asha

Question 85.
______________ is a closed source operating system for smartphone and tablet devices.
Answer:
Blackberry

Question 86.
______________ is Apple’s closed source operating system for Apple’s iPhone, iPod Touch, iPad and second-generation Apple TVs.
Answer:
Iphone Operating System

Question 87.
______________ Phone is developed by Microsoft as a closed source operating system for mobile phones.
Answer:
Windows

Question 88.
______________ is used as the predominantly backbone of the Internet.
Answer:
Linux

Question 89.
______________ is one of the most popular GNU/Linux distribution.
Answer:
Ubuntu

Question 90.
Full form of GUI is ______________
Answer:
Graphical User Interface

Question 91.
Full form of CLI ______________
Answer:
Command Line Interface

Question 92.
The ______________ is when the user interacts with the computer using images, icons, and dialog boxes.
Answer:
Graphical User Interface

Question 93.
The ______________ option is used for quick search of the application.
Answer:
Search

Question 94.
The ______________ folder is where all the personal documents and settings are stored.
Answer:
Home

Question 95.
The ______________ is when user interacts with the computer using text.
Answer:
Command Line Interface

Question 96.
The ______________ are programs that are run when user types command name.
Answer:
Commands

Question 97.
______________ is Free and Open Source.
Answer:
Linux

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 98.
______________ Operating System is free from viruses.
Answer:
Linux

Question 99.
______________ Operating Systems can update themselves.
Answer:
Proprietary

Question 100.
______________ is a collection of software for a Linux distribution on the server.
Answer:
Repositories

Question 101.
The ______________ manager updates the operating system as well as other softwares periodically.
Answer:
Package

Question 102.
______________ is a group of interconnected computers or devices to have communication within themselves.
Answer:
Computer Network

Question 103.
A ______________ consists of a collection of computers, printers and other equipment that is connected together.
Answer:
Computer Network

Question 104.
Full form of LAN is ______________
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 105.
Full form of MAN is ______________
Answer:
Metropolitan Area Network

Question 106.
Full form of WAN is ______________
Answer:
Wide Area Network

Question 107.
______________ type of network covers the smallest area.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 108.
______________ covers an area larger than LAN.
Answer:
Metropolitan Area Network

Question 109.
______________ type of network comprises the largest of all.
Answer:
Wide Area Network

Question 110.
In ______________ usage area is limited to areas such as an office building, home, hospital, schools, etc.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 111.
______________ covers a short distance, and so the error and noise are minimized.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 112.
______________ type of network is easy to setup.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 113.
In ______________ data transmits at a very fast rate as the number of computers linked are limited.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 114.
______________ is a less expensive hardware and maintenance cost is also low.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 115.
______________ connects two or more separate computers that reside in the same or different cities.
Answer:
Metropolitan Area Network

Question 116.
Full for of ISP is ______________
Answer:
Internet Service Provider

Question 117.
______________ covers a large geographical area and may serve as an ISP.
Answer:
Metropolitan Area Network

Question 118.
______________ type of network is hard to design and maintain.
Answer:
Metropolitan Area Network

Question 119.
______________ is a computer network that extends over a large geographical area.
Answer:
Wide Area Network

Question 120.
In ______________ type of network the technology is high speed and relatively expensive.
Answer:
Wide Area Network

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 121.
A Communication medium used for ______________ is Telephone Network or Satellite Link.
Answer:
Wide Area Network

Question 122.
______________ is the design of a computer network.
Answer:
Network Architecture

Question 123.
A ______________ network has no dedicated servers.
Answer:
Peer-to-Peer

Question 124.
______________ type of architecture is most suitable for larger network.
Answer:
Client-Server

Question 125.
A computer which is seeking any resource from another computer is a ______________ computer.
Answer:
Client

Question 126.
If a computer has a resource which is served to another computer, it is a ______________ computer.
Answer:
Server

Question 127.
______________ means connecting computer to any other computer anywhere in the world.
Answer:
Internet

Question 128.
The ______________ is generally defined as a global network connecting millions of computers.
Answer:
Internet

Question 129.
The ______________ is a massive network of networks, a networking infrastructure.
Answer:
Internet

Question 130.
With the help of the ______________, one can easily be in touch with anyone in the whole world by sending electronic mail, by chatting.
Answer:
Internet

Question 131.
It can be said that ______________ provides a very strong connection or network between computers globally.
Answer:
Internet

Question 132.
Full form of ARPANET is ______________
Answer:
Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 133.
The first workable prototype of the internet came in the late 1960’s with the creation of ______________
Answer:
Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 134.
______________ used packet switching to allow multiple computers to communicate on a single network.
Answer:
Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 135.
Full form of TCP/IP is ______________
Answer:
Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol

Question 136.
______________ communications model that set standards for how data could be transmitted between multiple networks.
Answer:
Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol

Question 137.
Full form of WWW is ______________
Answer:
World Wide Web

Question 138.
Tim Berners-Lee invented the ______________
Answer:
World Wide Web

Question 139.
A ______________ is a set of rules that governs the communications between computers on a network.
Answer:
Protocol

Question 140.
______________ breaks down the message into packets and sends them out into the network.
Answer:
Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 141.
Full form of DNS is ______________
Answer:
Domain Name System

Question 142.
______________ translates network address into terms understood by humans and vice-versa.
Answer:
Domain Name System

Question 143.
DHCP stands for ______________
Answer:
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Question 144.
______________ can automatically assign internet addresses to computers and users.
Answer:
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Question 145.
FTP stands for ______________
Answer:
File Transfer Protocol

Question 146.
______________ is used to transfer and manipulate files on the internet.
Answer:
File Transfer Protocol

Question 147.
Full form of HTTP is ______________
Answer:
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 148.
______________ is an internet-based protocol for sending and receiving web pages.
Answer:
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 149.
Full form of IMAP is ______________
Answer:
Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 150.
______________ is used for receiving e-mail messages from server on the Internet.
Answer:
Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 151.
______________ maintains a copy of all the emails on server.
Answer:
Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 152.
Full form of IRC is ______________
Answer:
Internet Relay Chat

Question 153.
______________ facilitates communication in the form of text.
Answer:
Internet Relay Chat

Question 154.
POP3 stands for ______________
Answer:
Post Office Protocol Version 3

Question 155.
______________ is used for receiving e-mail from remote mail servers.
Answer:
Post Office Protocol Version 3

Question 156.
______________ is used for sending e-mail messages to the Server on the Internet.
Answer:
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

Question 157.
Full form of ITES is ______________
Answer:
IT Enabled Services

Question 158.
IT Enabled Services (ITES), also called as ______________
Answer:
Web Enabled Services

Question 159.
______________ covers the entire amount of operations which exploit Information Technology for improving efficiency of an organization.
Answer:
IT Enabled Services

Question 160.
______________ can develop interactive websites using knowledge of HTML, PHP and various other programming languages.
Answer:
Web Designer

Question 161.
It is possible to have career as a ______________ with the scripting skills.
Answer:
Software Developer

Question 162.
After getting knowledge about Database management one can work as a ______________
Answer:
Database Manager

Question 163.
______________ are responsible for ensuring that networks are watertight.
Answer:
Information Security Analyst

Question 164.
______________ using computerized accounting software can successfully handle accounting work.
Answer:
Professional Accountant

Question 165.
______________ after getting IT knowledge one can advise and guide others in investing the money in various investment schemes.
Answer:
Financial Advisor

Question 166.
It is possible to become a successful ______________ using one’s own creation and innovation.
Answer:
Animator

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 167.
Perhaps one of the trendiest and most fun jobs in the sector, a ______________
Answer:
Games Developer

Question 168.
As a career opportunity, to become an ______________, one should be good in tools such as Kdenlive, Audacity.
Answer:
Audio/Video Editor

Question 169.
______________ is the study and practice of environmentally sustainable computing or IT.
Answer:
Green Computing

Question 170.
The goals of ______________ are similar to green chemistry.
Answer:
Green Computing

Question 171.
______________ is important for all classes of systems, ranging from handheld systems to largescale data centers.
Answer:
Green Computing

Question 172.
Full form of IOT is ______________
Answer:
Internet of Things

Question 173.
The ______________ is the network of physical devices, vehicles, home appliances, and other items embedded with electronics, software, sensors, actuators, and connectivity.
Answer:
Internet of Things

Question 174.
______________ is the delivery of computing services over the internet.
Answer:
Cloud Computing

Question 175.
______________ is the process of examining data sets in order to draw conclusions about the information.
Answer:
Data Analytics

Question 176.
______________ technologies and techniques are widely used in commercial industries to enable organizations to make more-informed business decisions.
Answer:
Data Analytics

Question 177.
______________ is intelligence demonstrated by machines, in contrast to the natural intelligence displayed by humans and other animals.
Answer:
Artificial Intelligence

Question 178.
Computer science defines ______________ research as the study of “intelligent agents”.
Answer:
Artificial Intelligence

Question 179.
______________ is the scientific study of algorithms and statistical models that computer systems use to effectively perform a specific task.
Answer:
Machine Learning

Question 180.
______________ refers to data sets that are too large or complex for traditional data-processing application software.
Answer:
Big Data

Question 181.
______________ is a growing list of records, called blocks, which are linked using cryptography.
Answer:
Blockchain

2. True or False.

Question 1.
Information Technology encompasses all of the technologies that we use in order to create, collect, process, protect and store information.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Programmers refer to hardware, software (computer programs), and computer networks.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
The full form of ICT is Information and Communication Technology:
Answer:
True

Question 4.
The Computer Science concept involves the transfer and use of all kinds of information.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
Information and Communication Technology is the foundation of the economy and a driving force of social changes in the 21st century.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 6.
Data can be any character, text, word, number, or raw facts.
Answer:
True

Question 7.
The virus is data formatted in a manner that allows it to be utilized by human beings in some significant way.
Answer:
False

Question 8.
The word Computer is derived from the Latin word Komptom.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
An electronic device that accepts input from the user, processes it according to the instructions given to it, and gives the required result in the form of output, is a Typewriter.
Answer:
False

Question 10.
A computer can process data, images, audio, video, and graphics.
Answer:
True

Question 11.
Computer accepts data or instructions by way of input.
Answer:
True

Question 12.
Computer stores data.
Answer:
True

Question 13.
The computer can process data as required by the user.
Answer:
True

Question 14.
The computer gives results in the form of output.
Answer:
True

Question 15.
Machine controls all operations inside a computer.
Answer:
False

Question 16.
Computer Architecture is a specification detailing how a set of software and hardware technology standards interact to form a computer system.
Answer:
True

Question 17.
Website refers to how a computer system is designed and how it works.
Answer:
False

Question 18.
Storage Unit helps users to enter data and commands into a computer system.
Answer:
False

Question 19.
The main function of hardware devices is to direct commands and data into computers.
Answer:
False

Question 20.
The keyboard is an input device that enters numbers and characters.
Answer:
True

Question 21.
A Mouse can be an input device for entering directions and commands.
Answer:
True

Question 22.
The full form of CPU is Central Processing Unit.
Answer:
True

Question 23.
After receiving data and commands from users, a computer system has to process it according to the instructions provided. Here, it has to rely on a component called the Arithmetic and Logic Unit.
Answer:
False

Question 24.
The Central Processing Unit further uses these three elements Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Control Unit, and Memory Unit.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 25.
The full form of ALU is the Arithmetic and Logic Unit.
Answer:
True

Question 26.
The Control Unit part of the CPU performs arithmetic operations.
Answer:
False

Question 27.
Arithmetic and Logic Unit can even perform logical functions like the comparison of data.
Answer:
True

Question 28.
The arithmetic and Logic Unit is the backbone of computers.
Answer:
False

Question 29.
The Control unit is responsible for coordinating tasks between all components of a computer system.
Answer:
True

Question 30.
The Control Unit collects data from input units and sends it to processing units depending on its nature.
Answer:
True

Question 31.
Control Unit transmits processed data to output units to facilitate users.
Answer:
True

Question 32.
Once a user enters data using input devices, the computer system stores this data in its Control Unit.
Answer:
False

Question 33.
The memory unit uses a set of pre-programmed instructions to further transmit this data to other parts of the CPU.
Answer:
True

Question 34.
Secondary Memory is the internal memory of the computer.
Answer:
False

Question 35.
Secondary Memory is also known as main memory.
Answer:
False

Question 36.
Secondary Memory holds the data and instructions on which computer is currently working.
Answer:
False

Question 37.
RAM stands for Random Access Memory.
Answer:
True

Question 38.
Random Access Memory is known as reading/write memory.
Answer:
True

Question 39.
Random Access Memory is generally referred to as the main memory of the computer system.
Answer:
True

Question 40.
Random Access Memory is a temporary memory.
Answer:
True

Question 41.
Read-Only Memory is also called Volatile Memory.
Answer:
False

Question 42.
ROM stands for Read-Only Memory.
Answer:
True

Question 43.
Random Access Memory is a Permanent Type of memory.
Answer:
False

Question 44.
Random Access Memory cannot be overwritten by the computer.
Answer:
False

Question 45.
Random Access Memory is also called Non-Volatile Memory.
Answer:
False

Question 46.
Secondary Memory is an external memory of the computer.
Answer:
True

Question 47.
Secondary Memory is used to store a huge amount of different programs and information.
Answer:
True

Question 48.
Does the input Unit basically reproduce the data formatted by the computer for the user’s benefit?
Answer:
False

Question 49.
A bit is a binary digit that holds only one of two values.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 50.
A group of 4 bits is called a Nibble.
Answer:
True

Question 51.
A group of 8 bits is called a Kilobyte.
Answer:
False

Question 52.
A Byte is the smallest unit, which can represent a data item or a character.
Answer:
True

Question 53.
1 Byte is 8 Bits.
Answer:
True

Question 54.
1 KiloByte (KB) is 1,024 Bytes.
Answer:
True

Question 55.
1 MegaByte (MB) is 1 Terabyte.
Answer:
False

Question 56.
1 GigaByte (GB) is 1024 bites.
Answer:
False

Question 57.
1 TeraByte (TB) is 1,024 GigaBytes.
Answer:
True

Question 58.
1 PetaByte (PB) is 1,024 TeraBytes.
Answer:
True

Question 59.
1 ExaByte (EB) is 1024 Megabytes.
Answer:
False

Question 60.
The program comprises the physical components that a computer system requires to function.
Answer:
False

Question 61.
A set of instructions given to the computer is known as hardware.
Answer:
False

Question 62.
Program or set of programs are called Hardware.
Answer:
False

Question 63.
Hardware is a generic term used to describe computer programs.
Answer:
False

Question 64.
Open-source software refers to the software which releases code in the public domain for anyone to use.
Answer:
True

Question 65.
Full form of FOSS Free Open Source Software Policy.
Answer:
True

Question 66.
Free Open Source Software Policy and it enabled them to save some millions of rupees each year in licensing costs.
Answer:
True

Question 67.
In the case of Closed source software, a user has to purchase the software before using it.
Answer:
True

Question 68.
The machine is a program or group of programs designed for end-users.
Answer:
False

Question 69.
Hardware is also called end-user programs.
Answer:
False

Question 70.
Pen Drive is a set of instructions required for a computer to work.
Answer:
False

Question 71.
Linux Operating system is a program that allows different applications and various components of the hardware.
Answer:
True

Question 72.
A computer would not be able to function correctly without an operating system.
Answer:
True

Question 73.
An operating system is a software program that empowers the computer hardware to communicate and operate with the computer software.
Answer:
True

Question 74.
The operating system boots up the computer and makes sure that everything is operational.
Answer:
True

Question 75.
The operating system is also what runs the cell phone and most electronic devices.
Answer:
True

Question 76.
The operating systems usually come preloaded on any computer, tablet, laptop, or cell phone that the user buys.
Answer:
True

Question 77.
The full form of DOS is Disk Operating System.
Answer:
True

Question 78.
Linux is a series of operating systems that are designed by Microsoft.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 79.
Windows is the most commonly used operating system.
Answer:
True

Question 80.
Apple Corporation’s registered operating system is called Mac OS.
Answer:
True

Question 81.
Chrome OS is an open-source operating system created by Google.
Answer:
True

Question 82.
Linux is an open-source, portable, multi-multiprogramming, operating system.
Answer:
True

Question 83.
Asha is a free and open-source operating system for mobile phones provided by Google.
Answer:
False

Question 84.
Android is used by Nokia phones. This is a closed source OS.
Answer:
False

Question 85.
Blackberry is a closed source operating system for smartphone and tablet devices.
Answer:
True

Question 86.
Windows is Apple’s closed source operating system for Apple’s iPhone, iPod Touch, iPad, and second-generation Apple TVs.
Answer:
False

Question 87.
IOS Phone is developed by Microsoft as a closed source operating system for mobile phones.
Answer:
False

Question 88.
Linux is used as the predominant backbone of the Internet.
Answer:
True

Question 89.
Ubuntu is one of the most popular GNU/Linux distributions.
Answer:
True

Question 90.
The full form of GUI is Graphical User Interface.
Answer:
True

Question 91.
Full form of CLI Command Line Interface.
Answer:
True

Question 92.
The graphical user interface is when the user interacts with the computer using images, icons, and dialog boxes.
Answer:
True

Question 93.
The Home option is used for a quick search of the application.
Answer:
False

Question 94.
The Search folder is where all the personal documents and settings are stored.
Answer:
False

Question 95.
The Command is when the user interacts with the computer using text.
Answer:
False

Question 96.
The command-line interface is programs that are run when a user types the command name.
Answer:
False

Question 97.
Proprietary is Free and Open Source.
Answer:
False

Question 98.
Linux Operating System is free from viruses.
Answer:
True

Question 99.
Repositories Operating Systems can update themselves.
Answer:
False

Question 100.
The repository is a collection of software for a Linux distribution on the server.
Answer:
True

Question 101.
The Package manager updates the operating system as well as other software periodically.
Answer:
True

Question 102.
Local Area Network is a group of interconnected computers or devices to have communication within themselves.
Answer:
False

Question 103.
A Metropolitan Area Network consists of a collection of computers, printers, and other equipment that is connected together.
Answer:
False

Question 104.
The full form of LAN is the Local Area Network.
Answer:
True

Question 105.
The full form of MAN is Metropolitan Area Network.
Answer:
True

Question 106.
The full form of WAN is a Wide Area Network.
Answer:
True

Question 107.
Wide Area Network type of network covers the smallest area.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 108.
Metropolitan Area Network covers an area larger than LAN.
Answer:
True

Question 109.
Local Area Network type of network comprises the largest of all.
Answer:
False

Question 110.
In Local Area Network, usage area is limited to areas such as an office building, home, hospital, schools, etc.
Answer:
True

Question 111.
Metropolitan Area Network covers a short distance, and so the error and noise are minimized.
Answer:
False

Question 112.
Local Area Network type of network is easy to set up.
Answer:
True

Question 113.
In Local Area Network data transmits at a very fast rate as the number of computers linked is limited.
Answer:
True

Question 114.
Local Area Network is less expensive hardware and maintenance cost is also low.
Answer:
True

Question 115.
Metropolitan Area Network connects two or more separate computers that reside in the same or different cities.
Answer:
True

Question 116.
Full for of ISP is Internet Service Provider.
Answer:
True

Question 117.
Metropolitan Area Network covers a large geographical area and may serve as an ISP.
Answer:
True

Question 118.
Metropolitan Area Network type of network is hard to design and maintain.3
Answer:
True

Question 119.
A Wide Area Network is a computer network that extends over a large geographical area.
Answer:
True

Question 120.
In the Wide Area Network type of network, the technology is high speed and relatively expensive.
Answer:
True

Question 121.
A Communication medium used for Wide Area networks is Telephone networks or Satellite Link.
Answer:
True

Question 122.
Client-Server is the design of a computer network.
Answer:
False

Question 123.
A Peer-to-Peer network has no dedicated servers.
Answer:
True

Question 124.
Client-Server type of architecture is most suitable for larger networks.
Answer:
True

Question 125.
A computer that is seeking any resource from another computer is a Client computer.
Answer:
False

Question 126.
If a computer has a resource that is served to another computer, it is a client computer.
Answer:
False

Question 127.
Memory means connecting a computer to any other computer anywhere in the world.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 128.
The Internet is generally defined as a global network connecting millions of computers.
Answer:
True

Question 129.
The Internet is a massive network of networks, a networking infrastructure.
Answer:
True

Question 130.
With the help of the Internet, one can easily be in touch with anyone in the whole world by sending electronic mail, by chatting.
Answer:
True

Question 131.
It can be said that services provide a very strong connection or network between computers globally.
Answer:
False

Question 132.
The full form of ARPANET is Advanced Research Projects Agency Network.
Answer:
True

Question 133.
The first workable prototype of the internet came in the late 1960s with the creation of HTML.
Answer:
False

Question 134.
Packets used packet switching to allow multiple computers to communicate on a single network.
Answer:
False

Question 135.
The full form of TCP/IP is Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 136.
HTML communications model that set standards for how data could be transmitted between multiple networks.
Answer:
False

Question 137.
The full form of WWW is World Wide Web.
Answer:
True

Question 138.
Tim Berners-Lee invented the World Wide Web.
Answer:
True

Question 139.
A DNS is a set of rules that governs the communications between computers on a network. Protocol.
Answer:
False

Question 140.
Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol breaks down the message into packets and sends them out into the network.
Answer:
True

Question 141.
The full form of DNS is Domain Name System.
Answer:
True

Question 142.
Protocol translates network address into terms understood by humans and vice-versa.
Answer:
False

Question 143.
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 144.
DNS can automatically assign internet addresses to computers and users.
Answer:
False

Question 145.
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 146.
HTTP is used to transfer and manipulate files on the internet.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 147.
The full form of HTTP is HyperText Transfer Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 148.
HyperText Transfer Protocol is an internet-based protocol for sending and receiving web pages.
Answer:
True

Question 149.
The full form of IMAP is Internet Message Access Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 150.
FTP is used for receiving e-mail messages from servers on the Internet.
Answer:
False

Question 151.
HTTP maintains a copy of all the emails on the server.
Answer:
False

Question 152.
The full form of IRC is Internet Relay Chat.
Answer:
True

Question 153.
FTP facilitates communication in the form of text.
Answer:
False

Question 154.
POP3 stands for Post Office Protocol Version 3.
Answer:
True

Question 155.
Post Office Protocol Version 3 is used for receiving e-mail from remote mail servers.
Answer:
True

Question 156.
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used for sending e-mail messages to the Server on the Internet.
Answer:
True

Question 157.
The full form of ITES is IT Enabled Services.
Answer:
True

Question 158.
IT Enabled Services (ITES), also called as Information Technology.
Answer:
False

Question 159.
IT Enabled Services covers the entire amount of operations that exploit Information Technology for improving the efficiency of an organization.
Answer:
True

Question 160.
Database Manager can develop interactive websites using knowledge of HTML, PHP, and various other programming languages.
Answer:
False

Question 161.
It is possible to have a career as a Financial Advisor with scripting skills.
Answer:
False

Question 162.
After getting knowledge about Database management one can work as a Web Designer.
Answer:
False

Question 163.
Professional Accountant is responsible for ensuring that networks are watertight.
Answer:
False

Question 164.
Information Security Analyst using computerized accounting software can successfully handle accounting work.
Answer:
False

Question 165.
Software developers after getting IT knowledge one can advise and guide others in investing the money in various investment schemes.
Answer:
False

Question 166.
It is possible to become a successful Animator using one’s own creation and innovation.
Answer:
True

Question 167.
Perhaps one of the trendiest and most fun jobs in the sector, a games developer.
Answer:
True

Question 168.
As a career opportunity, to become an Audio/Video Editor, one should be good at tools such as Kdenlive, Audacity.
Answer:
True

Question 169.
Internet of Things is the study and practice of environmentally sustainable computing or IT.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 170.
The goals of Cloud Computing are similar to green chemistry.
Answer:
False

Question 171.
Green computing is important for all classes of systems, ranging from handheld systems to large-scale data centers.
Answer:
True

Question 172.
The full form of IoT is the Internet of Things.
Answer:
True

Question 173.
Data Analytics is the network of physical devices, vehicles, home appliances, and other items embedded with electronics, software, sensors, actuators, and connectivity.
Answer:
False

Question 174.
Artificial Intelligence is the delivery of computing services over the internet.
Answer:
False

Question 175.
Machine Learning is the process of examining data sets in order to draw conclusions about the information.
Answer:
False

Question 176.
Data analytics technologies and techniques are widely used in commercial industries to enable organizations to make more informed business decisions.
Answer:
True

Question 177.
Artificial Intelligence is intelligence demonstrated by machines, in contrast to the natural intelligence displayed by humans and other animals.
Answer:
True

Question 178.
Computer science defines Blockchain research as the study of “intelligent agents”.
Answer:
False

Question 179.
Machine Learning is the scientific study of algorithms and statistical models that computer systems use to effectively perform a specific task.
Answer:
True

Question 180.
Big Data refers to data sets that are too large or complex for traditional data-processing application software.
Answer:
True

Question 181.
Blockchain is a growing list of records, called blocks, which are linked using cryptography.
Answer:
True

3. Multiple Choice Question (Single Choice)

Question 1.
______________ encompasses all of the technologies that we use in order to create, collect, process, protect and store information.
(A) Information Technology
(B) Hardware
(C) Software
(D) System
Answer:
(A) Information Technology

Question 2.
______________ refers to hardware, software (computer programs), and computer networks.
(A) Hardware
(B) Software
(C) Information Technology
(D) Computer Programs
Answer:
(C) Information Technology

Question 3.
Full form of ICT is ______________
(A) Information and Computer Technology
(B) Internet and Communication Technology
(C) Information and Communication Technology
(D) Information and Carrier Technology
Answer:
(C) Information and Communication Technology

Question 4.
______________ concept involves transfer and use of all kinds of information.
(A) Information and Computer Technology
(B) Internet and Communication Technology
(C) Information and Communication Technology
(D) Information and Carrier Technology
Answer:
(C) Information and Communication Technology

Question 5.
______________ is the foundation of economy and a driving force of social changes in the 21st century.
(A) Information and Computer Technology
(B) Internet and Communication Technology
(C) Information and Communication Technology
(D) Information and Carrier Technology
Answer:
(C) Information and Communication Technology

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 6.
______________ can be any character, text, word, number or raw facts.
(A) Character
(B) Data
(C) Text
(D) Facts
Answer:
(B) Data

Question 7.
______________ is data formatted in a manner that allows it to be utilized by human beings in some significant way
(A) Information
(B) Information Technology
(C) System
(D) Programming
Answer:
(A) Information

Question 8.
The word Computer is derived from a Latin word ______________
(A) Computare
(B) Audio
(C) Video
(D) Graphics
Answer:
(A) Computare

Question 9.
An electronic device that accepts input from the user, processes it according to the instructions given to it, and gives the required result in the form of output, is a ______________
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 10.
A ______________ can process data, images, audio, video and graphics.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 11.
______________ accepts data or instructions by way of input.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 12.
______________ stores data.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 13.
______________ can process data as required by the user.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 14.
______________ gives results in the form of output.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 15.
______________ controls all operations inside a computer.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 16.
______________ is a specification detailing of how a set of software and hardware technology standards interact to form a computer system.
(A) Computer Architecture
(B) Hardware
(C) Software
(D) System
Answer:
(A) Computer Architecture

Question 17.
______________ refers to how a computer system is designed and how it works.
(A) Computer Architecture
(B) Hardware
(C) Software
(D) System
Answer:
(A) Computer Architecture

Question 18.
______________ helps users to enter data and commands into a computer system.
(A) Keyboard
(B) Mouse
(C) Input Unit
(D) Input
Answer:
(C) Input Unit

Question 19.
The main function of ______________ devices is to direct commands and data into computer.
(A) Keyboard
(B) Mouse
(C) Input Unit
(D) Input
Answer:
(D) Input

Question 20.
______________ is an input device that enters numbers and characters.
(A) Keyboard
(B) Mouse
(C) Input Unit
(D) Input
Answer:
(A) Keyboard

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 21.
A ______________ can be an input device for entering directions and commands.
(A) Keyboard
(B) Mouse
(C) Input Unit
(D) Input
Answer:
(B) Mouse

Question 22.
Full full for CPU is ______________
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Computer Processing Unit
(C) Central Programmer Unit
(D) Computer Programmer Unit
Answer:
(A) Central Processing Unit

Question 23.
After receiving data and commands from users, a computer system has to process it according to the instructions provided. Here, it has to rely on a component called the ______________
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
Answer:
(A) Central Processing Unit

Question 24.
The ______________ further uses these three elements Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Control Unit and Memory Unit.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory unit
Answer:
(A) Central Processing Unit

Question 25.
Full form of ALU is ______________
(A) Asian Learning Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Arithmetic Learning Unit
(D) Arithmetic Lesson unit
Answer:
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Question 26.
______________ part of the CPU performs arithmetic operations.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory unit
Answer:
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Question 27.
______________ can even perform logical functions like the comparison of data.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory unit
Answer:
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Question 28.
______________ is the backbone of computers.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
Answer:
(C) Control Unit

Question 29.
______________ responsible for coordinating tasks between all components of a computer system.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory unit
Answer:
(C) Control Unit

Question 30.
The ______________ collects data from input units and sends it to processing units depending on its nature.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
Answer:
(C) Control Unit

Question 31.
______________ transmits processed data to output units to facilitate users.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
Answer:
(C) Control Unit

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 32.
Once a user enters data using input devices, the computer system stores this data in its ______________
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory unit
Answer:
(D) Memory Unit

Question 33.
The ______________ uses a set of pre-programmed instructions to further transmit this data to other parts of the CPU.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
Answer:
(D) Memory Unit

Question 34.
______________ is internal memory of the computer.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(A) Primary memory

Question 35.
______________ is also known as main memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(A) Primary memory

Question 36.
______________ holds the data and instruction on which computer is currently working.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(A) Primary Memory

Question 37.
RAM stands for ______________
(A) Random Access Memory
(B) Read Access Memory
(C) Ram Access Memory
(D) Random Access Machine
Answer:
(A) Random Access Memory

Question 38.
______________ is known as read/write memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(B) Random Access Memory

Question 39.
______________ is generally referred to as main memory of the computer system.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(B) Random Access Memory

Question 40.
______________ is a temporary memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(B) Random Access Memory

Question 41.
______________ is also called as Volatile Memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(B) Random Access Memory

Question 42.
ROM stands for ______________
(A) Read-Only Memory
(B) Read Only Machine
(C) Rom Only Memory
(D) Ram Only Memory
Answer:
(A) Read-Only Memory

Question 43.
______________ is a Permanent Type memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(C) Read-Only Memory

Question 44.
______________ cannot be overwritten by the computer.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(C) Read-Only Memory

Question 45.
______________ is also called Non-Volatile Memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(C) Read-Only Memory

Question 46.
______________ is an external memory of the computer.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(D) Secondary Memory

Question 47.
______________ is used to store the huge amount of different programs and information.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(D) Secondary Memory

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 48.
______________ basically reproduce the data formatted by the computer for user’s benefit.
(A) Output unit
(B) Bit
(C) Nibble
(D) Byte
Answer:
(A) Output unit

Question 49.
______________ is a binary digit that holds only one of two values.
(A) Output unit
(B) Bit
(C) Nibble
(D) Byte
Answer:
(B) Bit

Question 50.
A group of 4 bits is called a ______________
(A) Output unit
(B) Bit
(C) Nibble
(D) Byte
Answer:
(C) Nibble

Question 51.
A group of 8 bits is called a ______________
(A) Output unit
(B) Bit
(C) Nibble
(D) Byte
Answer:
(D) Byte

Question 52.
A ______________ is the smallest unit, which can represent a data item or a character.
(A) Output unit
(B) Bit
(C) Nibble
(D) Byte
Answer:
(D) Byte

Question 53.
1 Byte is ______________
(A) 8 Bits
(B) 1,024 Bytes
(C) 1,024 KiloBytes
(D) 1,024 MegaBytes
Answer:
(A) 8 Bits

Question 54.
1 KiloByte (KB) is ______________
(A) 8 Bits
(B) 1,024 Bytes
(C) 1,024 KiloBytes
(D) 1,024 MegaBytes
Answer:
(B) 1,024 Bytes

Question 55.
1 MegaByte (MB) is ______________
(A) 8 Bits
(B) 1,024 Bytes
(C) 1,024 KiloBytes
(D) 1,024 MegaBytes
Answer:
(C) 1,024 KiloBytes

Question 56.
1 GigaByte (GB) is ______________
(A) 8 Bits
(B) 1,024 Bytes
(C) 1,024 KiloBytes
(D) 1,024 MegaBytes
Answer:
(D) 1,024 MegaBytes

Question 57.
1 TeraByte (TB) is ______________
(A) 1,024 GigaBytes
(B) 1,024 TeraBytes
(C) 1,024 PetaBytes
(D) MegaBytes
Answer:
(A) 1,024 GigaBytes

Question 58.
1 PetaByte (PB) is ______________
(A) 1,024 GigaBytes
(B) 1,024 TeraBytes
(C) 1,024 PetaBytes
(D) MegaBytes
Answer:
(B) 1,024 TeraBytes

Question 59.
1 ExaByte (EB) is ______________
(A) 1,024 GigaBytes
(B) 1,024 TeraBytes
(C) 1,024 PetaBytes
(D) MegaBytes
Answer:
(C) 1,024 PetaBytes

Question 60.
______________ comprises of the physical components that a computer system requires to function.
(A) Computer hardware
(B) Program
(C) Software
(D) Open source software
Answer:
(A) Computer hardware

Question 61.
A set of instructions given to the computer is known as a ______________
(A) Computer hardware
(B) Program
(C) Software
(D) Open source software
Answer:
(B) Program

Question 62.
Program or set of programs are called as ______________
(A) Computer hardware
(B) Program
(C) Software
(D) Open source software
Answer:
(C) Software

Question 63.
______________ is a generic term used to describe computer programs.
(A) Computer hardware
(B) Program
(C) Software
(D) Open source software
Answer:
(C) Software

Question 64.
______________ refers to the software which releases code in public domain for anyone to use.
(A) Computer hardware
(B) Program
(C) Software
(D) Open source software
Answer:
(D) Open source software

Question 65.
Full form of FOSS ______________
(A) Free Open Source Software Policy
(B) Free Open System Source Policy
(C) Free Open Source System Policy
(D) First Open Source Software Policy
Answer:
(A) Free Open Source Software Policy

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 66.
______________ and it enabled them to save some millions of rupees each year in licensing costs.
(A) Free Open Source Software Policy
(B) Free Open System Source Policy
(C) Free Open Source System Policy
(D) First Open Source Software Policy
Answer:
(A) Free Open Source Software Policy

Question 67.
In case of ______________, user has to purchase the software before using it.
(A) Free Open Source Software Policy
(B) Free Open System Source Policy
(C) Free Open Source System Policy
(D) Closed Source Software
Answer:
(D) Closed Source Software

Question 68.
______________ is a program or group of programs designed for end-users.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating system
(D) Operating system
Answer:
(A) Application Software

Question 69.
______________ is also called end-user programs.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating system
(D) Operating system
Answer:
(A) Application Software

Question 70.
______________ is a set of instructions required for a computer to work.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating system
(D) Operating system
Answer:
(B) System Software

Question 71.
______________ is a program that allows different applications and various components of hardware.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating System
(D) Operating system
Answer:
(C) Linux Operating System

Question 72.
A computer would not be able to function correctly without an ______________
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating System
(D) Operating System
Answer:
(D) Operating System

Question 73.
An ______________ is a software program that empowers the computer hardware to communicate and operate with the computer software.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating System
(D) Operating System
Answer:
(D) Operating System

Question 74.
The ______________ boots up the computer and makes sure that everything is operational.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating System
(D) Operating System
Answer:
(D) Operating System

Question 75.
The ______________ is also what runs the cell phone and most of the electronic devices.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating system
(D) Operating System
Answer:
(D) Operating System

Question 76.
The ______________ usually come preloaded on any computer, tablet, laptop or cell phone that user buy.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating System
(D) Operating System
Answer:
(D) Operating System

Question 77.
Full form of DOS is ______________
(A) Disk Operating System
(B) Disk Open System
(C) Dynamic Operating System
(D) Dynamic Open System
Answer:
(A) Disk Operating System

Question 78.
______________ is a series of operating systems that are designed by Microsoft.
(A) Windows
(B) Mac OS
(C) Chrome OS
(D) Linux
Answer:
(A) Windows

Question 79.
______________ is the most commonly used operating system.
(A) Windows
(B) Mac OS
(C) Chrome OS
(D) Linux
Answer:
(A) Windows

Question 80.
Apple Corporation’s registered operating system is called ______________
(A) Windows
(B) Mac OS
(C) Chrome OS
(D) Linux
Answer:
(B) Mac OS

Question 81.
______________ is an open-source operating system created by Google.
(A) Windows
(B) Mac OS
(C) Chrome OS
(D) Linux
Answer:
(C) Chrome OS

Question 82.
______________ is an open-source, portable, multi-multiprogramming, operating system.
(A) Windows
(B) Mac OS
(C) Chrome OS
(D) Linux
Answer:
(D) Linux

Question 83.
______________ is a free and open source operating system for mobile phones provided by Google.
(A) Android
(B) Asha
(C) Blackberry
(D) IOS
Answer:
(A) Android

Question 84.
______________ is used by Nokia phones. This is closed source OS.
(A) Android
(B) Asha
(C) Blackberry
(D) IOS
Answer:
(B) Asha

Question 85.
______________ is a closed source operating system for smartphone and tablet devices.
(A) Android
(B) Asha
(C) Blackberry
(D) IOS
Answer:
(C) Blackberry

Question 86.
______________ is Apple’s closed source operating system for Apple’s iPhone, iPod Touch, iPad and second-generation Apple TVs.
(A) Android
(B) Asha
(C) Blackberry
(D) iPhone Operating System
Answer:
(D) Iphone Operating System

Question 87.
______________ Phone is developed by Microsoft as a closed source operating system for mobile phones.
(A) Windows
(B) Android
(C) Linux
(D) Ubuntu
Answer:
(A) Windows

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 88.
______________ is used as the predominantly backbone of the Internet.
(A) Windows
(B) Android
(C) Linux
(D) Ubuntu
Answer:
(C) Linux

Question 89.
______________ is one of the most popular GNU/Linux distribution.
(A) Windows
(B) Android
(C) Linux
(D) Ubuntu
Answer:
(D) Ubuntu

Question 90.
Full form of GUI is ______________
(A) Graphical User Interface
(B) Graphic Using Internet
(C) Game Using Internet
(D) Game User Internet
Answer:
(A) Graphical User Interface

Question 91.
Full form of CLI ______________
(A) Command Line Internet
(B) Command Line Interface
(C) Central Line Interface
(D) Computer Line Interface
Answer:
(B) Command Line Interface

Question 92.
The ______________ is when the user interacts with the computer using images, icons, and dialog boxes.
(A) Graphical User Interface
(B) Command Line Interface
(C) Search
(D) Home
Answer:
(A) Graphical User Interface

Question 93.
The ______________ option is used for quick search of the application.
(A) Graphical User Interface
(B) Command Line Interface
(C) Search
(D) Home
Answer:
(C) Search

Question 94.
The ______________ folder is where all the personal documents and settings are stored.
(A) Graphical User Interface
(B) Command Line Interface
(C) Search
(D) Home
Answer:
(D) Home

Question 95.
The ______________ is when user interacts with the computer using text.
(A) Graphical User Interface
(B) Command Line Interface
(C) Search
(D) Home
Answer:
(B) Command Line Interface

Question 96.
The ______________ are programs that are run when user types command name.
(A) Commands
(B) Graphical User Interface
(C) Search
(D) Home
Answer:
(A) Commands

Question 97.
______________ is Free and Open Source.
(A) Linux
(B) Proprietary
(C) Repositories
(D) Package
Answer:
(A) Linux

Question 98.
______________ Operating System is free from viruses.
(A) Linux
(B) Proprietary
(C) Repositories
(D) Package
Answer:
(A) Linux

Question 99.
______________ Operating Systems can update themselves.
(A) Linux
(B) Proprietary
(C) Repositories
(D) Package
Answer:
(B) Proprietary

Question 100.
______________ is a collection of software for a Linux distribution on the server.
(A) Linux
(B) Proprietary
(C) Repositories
(D) Package
Answer:
(C) Repositories

Question 101.
The ______________ manager updates the operating system as well as other softwares periodically.
(A) Linux
(B) Proprietary
(C) Repositories
(D) Package
Answer:
(D) Package

Question 102.
______________ is a group of interconnected computers or devices to have communication within themselves.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Computer Network

Question 103.
A ______________ consists of a collection of computers, printers and other equipment that is connected together.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Computer Network

Question 104.
Full form of LAN is ______________
(A) Local Area Network
(B) Local Access Network
(C) Live Area Network
(D) Live Access Network
Answer:
(A) Local Area Network

Question 105.
Full form of MAN is ______________
(A) Metropolitan Area Network
(B) Metropolitan Access network
(C) Mobile Area Network
(D) Mobile Access Network
Answer:
(A) Metropolitan Area Network

Question 106.
Full form of WAN is ______________
(A) Wide Area Network
(B) World Area Network
(C) Wonder Area Network
(D) Wide Access Network
Answer:
(A) Wide Area Network

Question 107.
______________ type of network covers the smallest area.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 108.
______________ covers an area larger than LAN.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(D) Metropolitan Area Network

Question 109.
______________ type of network comprises the largest of all.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(C) Wide Area Network

Question 110.
In ______________ usage area is limited to areas such as an office building, home, hospital, schools, etc.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Question 111.
______________ covers a short distance, and so the error and noise are minimized.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Question 112.
______________ type of network is easy to setup.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Question 113.
In ______________ data transmits at a very fast rate as the number of computers linked are limited.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Question 114.
______________ is a less expensive hardware and maintenance cost is also low.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Question 115.
______________ connects two or more separate computers that reside in the same or different cities.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(D) Metropolitan Area Network

Question 116.
Full for of ISP is ______________
(A) Internet Service Provider
(B) International Service Provider
(C) Indian Server Provider
(D) Internet Server Provider
Answer:
(A) Internet Service Provider

Question 117.
______________ covers a large geographical area and may serve as an ISP.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(D) Metropolitan Area Network

Question 118.
______________ type of network is hard to design and maintain.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(D) Metropolitan Area Network

Question 119.
______________ is a computer network that extends over a large geographical area.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(C) Wide Area Network

Question 120.
In ______________ type of network the technology is high speed and relatively expensive.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(C) Wide Area Network

Question 121.
A Communication medium used for ______________ is Telephone Network or Satellite Link.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(C) Wide Area Network

Question 122.
______________ is the design of a computer network.
(A) Network architecture
(B) Peer-to-Peer
(C) Client-Server
(D) Client
Answer:
(A) Network Architecture

Question 123.
A ______________ network has no dedicated servers.
(A) Network architecture
(B) Peer-to-Peer
(C) Client-Server
(D) Client
Answer:
(B) Peer-to-Peer

Question 124.
______________ type of architecture is most suitable for larger network.
(A) Network architecture
(B) Peer-to-Peer
(C) Client-Server
(D) Client
Answer:
(C) Client-Server

Question 125.
A computer which is seeking any resource from another computer is a ______________ computer.
(A) Network architecture
(B) Peer-to-Peer
(C) Client-Server
(D) Client
Answer:
(D) Client

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 126.
If a computer has a resource which is served to another computer, it is a ______________ computer.
(A) Server
(B) Peer-to-Peer
(C) Client-Server
(D) Client
Answer:
(A) Server

Question 127.
______________ means connecting computer to any other computer anywhere in the world.
(A) Internet
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Internet

Question 128.
The ______________ is generally defined as a global network connecting millions of computers.
(A) Internet
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Internet

Question 129.
The ______________ is a massive network of networks, a networking infrastructure.
(A) Internet
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Internet

Question 130.
With the help of the ______________, one can easily be in touch with anyone in the whole world by sending electronic mail, by chatting.
(A) Internet
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Internet

Question 131.
It can be said that ______________ provides a very strong connection or network between computers globally.
(A) Internet
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Internet

Question 132.
Full form of ARPANET is ______________
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(B) Advanced Research Project Area Network
(C) Advanced Research Project Access Network
(D) Advance Recovery Project Area Network
Answer:
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 133.
The first workable prototype of the internet came in the late 1960’s with the creation of ______________
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(B) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(C) World Wide Web
(D) Local Area Network
Answer:
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 134.
______________ used packet switching to allow multiple computers to communicate on a single network.
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(B) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(C) World Wide Web
(D) Local Area Network
Answer:
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 135.
Full form of TCP/IP is ______________
(A) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(B) Transfer Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(C) Transmission Control Password and Internet Password
(D) Transfer Control Process and Internet Password
Answer:
(A) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol

Question 136.
______________ communications model that set standards for how data could be transmitted between multiple networks.
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(B) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(C) World Wide Web
(D) Local Area Network
Answer:
(B) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol

Question 137.
Full form of WWW is ______________
(A) World Wide Website
(B) Web Wide World
(C) World Wide Web
(D) Wide Web World
Answer:
(C) World Wide Web

Question 138.
Tim Berners-Lee invented the ______________
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(B) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(C) World Wide Web
(D) Local Area Network
Answer:
(C) World Wide Web

Question 139.
A ______________ is a set of rules that governs the communications between computers on a network.
(A) Protocol
(B) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol
(C) Domain Name System
(D) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Answer:
(A) Protocol

Question 140.
______________ breaks down the message into packets and sends them out into the network.
(A) Protocol
(B) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol
(C) Domain Name System
(D) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Answer:
(B) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 141.
Full form of DNS is ______________
(A) Domain Name System
(B) Dynamic Name System
(C) Domain Name Service
(D) Dynamic Name Service
Answer:
(A) Domain Name System

Question 142.
______________ translates network address into terms understood by humans and vice-versa.
(A) Protocol
(B) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol
(C) Domain Name System
(D) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Answer:
(C) Domain Name System

Question 143.
DHCP stands for ______________
(A) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(B) Domain Host Configuration Protocol
(C) Dynamic Host Configuration Process
(D) Domain Host Configuration Process
Answer:
(A) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Question 144.
______________ can automatically assign internet addresses to computers and users.
(A) Protocol
(B) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol
(C) Domain Name System
(D) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Answer:
(D) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Question 145.
FTP stands for ______________
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) File Transfer Process
(C) File Time Pass
(D) File Time Protocol
Answer:
(A) File Transfer Protocol

Question 146.
______________ is used to transfer and manipulate files on the internet.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) HyperText Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Internet Relay Chat
Answer:
(A) File Transfer Protocol

Question 147.
Full form of HTTP is ______________
(A) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Test Transfer Protocol
(C) Hyper Transfer Text
(D) Hyper Text Transfer Process
Answer:
(A) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 148.
______________ is an internet-based protocol for sending and receiving web pages.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Internet Relay Chat
Answer:
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 149.
Full form of IMAP is ______________
(A) Internet Message Access Protocol
(B) Internet Message Access Process
(C) Internet Message Access Program
(D) Information Message Access Protocol
Answer:
(A) Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 150.
______________ is used for receiving e-mail messages from server on the Internet.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) HyperText Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Internet Relay Chat
Answer:
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 151.
______________ maintains a copy of all the emails on server.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Internet Relay Chat
Answer:
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 152.
Full form of IRC is ______________
(A) Internet Relay Chat
(B) International Relay Chat
(C) Internet Regional Chat
(D) Internet Random Chat
Answer:
(A) Internet Relay Chat

Question 153.
______________ facilitates communication in the form of text.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Internet Relay Chat
Answer:
(D) Internet Relay Chat

Question 154.
POP3 stands for ______________
(A) Post Office Protocol Version 3
(B) Post Office Process Version 3
(C) Protocol Office Post Version 3
(D) Process Office Protocol Version 3
Answer:
(A) Post Office Protocol Version 3

Question 155.
______________ is used for receiving e-mail from remote mail servers.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Post Office Protocol Version 3
Answer:
(D) Post Office Protocol Version 3

Question 156.
______________ is used for sending e-mail messages to the Server on the Internet.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Answer:
(D) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

Question 157.
Full form of ITES is ______________
(A) IT Enabled Services
(B) IT Encrypted Service
(C) IT Essential Service
(D) IT Safe Service
Answer:
(A) IT Enabled Services

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 158.
IT Enabled Services (ITES), also called as ______________
(A) Web Enabled Services
(B) Word Enabled Services
(C) Wide Enabled Services
(D) Web Engineer Services
Answer:
(A) Web Enabled Services

Question 159.
______________ covers the entire amount of operations which exploit Information Technology for improving efficiency of an organization.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) IT Enabled Services
Answer:
(D) IT Enabled Services

Question 160.
______________ can develop interactive websites using knowledge of HTML, PHP and various
other programming languages.
(A) Web Designer
(B) Software Developer
(C) Database Manager
(D) Information Security Analyst
Answer:
(A) Web Designer

Question 161.
It is possible to have career as a ______________ with the scripting skills.
(A) Web Designer
(B) Software Developer
(C) Database Manager
(D) Information Security Analyst
Answer:
(B) Software Developer

Question 162.
After getting knowledge about Database management one can work as a ______________
(A) Web Designer
(B) Software Developer
(C) Database Manager
(D) Information Security Analyst
Answer:
(C) Database Manager

Question 163.
______________ are responsible for ensuring that networks are watertight.
(A) Web Designer
(B) Software Developer
(C) Database Manager
(D) Information Security Analyst
Answer:
(D) Information Security Analyst

Question 164.
______________ using computerized accounting software can successfully handle accounting work.
(A) Professional Accountant
(B) Financial Advisor
(C) Animator
(D) Games Developer
Answer:
(A) Professional Accountant

Question 165.
______________ after getting IT knowledge one can advise and guide others in investing the money in various investment schemes.
(A) Professional Accountant
(B) Financial Advisor
(C) Animator
(D) Games Developer
Answer:
(B) Financial Advisor

Question 166.
It is possible to become a successful ______________ using one’s own creation and innovation.
(A) Professional Accountant
(B) Financial Advisor
(C) Animator
(D) Games Developer
Answer:
(C) Animator

Question 167.
Perhaps one of the trendiest and most fun jobs in the sector, a ______________
(A) Professional Accountant
(B) Financial Advisor
(C) Animator
(D) Games Developer
Answer:
(D) Games Developer

Question 168.
As a career opportunity, to become an ______________, one should be good in tools such as Kdenlive, Audacity.
(A) Professional Accountant
(B) Financial Advisor
(C) Animator
(D) Audio/Video Editor
Answer:
(D) Audio/Video Editor

Question 169.
______________ is the study and practice of environmentally sustainable computing or IT.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(A) Green Computing

Question 170.
The goals of ______________ are similar to green chemistry
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(A) Green Computing

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 171.
______________ is important for all classes of systems, ranging from handheld systems to largescale data centers.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(A) Green Computing

Question 172.
Full form of IOT is ______________
(A) Internet of Time
(B) Internet of Things
(C) International of Time
(D) Intelligent of Things
Answer:
(B) Internet of Things

Question 173.
The ______________ is the network of physical devices, vehicles, home appliances, and other items embedded with electronics, software, sensors, actuators, and connectivity.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(B) Internet of Things

Question 174.
______________ is the delivery of computing services over the internet.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(C) Cloud Computing

Question 175.
______________ is the process of examining data sets in order to draw conclusions about the information.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(D) Data Analytics

Question 176.
______________ technologies and techniques are widely used in commercial industries to enable
organizations to make more-informed business decisions.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(D) Data Analytics

Question 177.
______________ is intelligence demonstrated by machines, in contrast to the natural intelligence displayed by humans and other animals.
(A) Artificial Intelligence
(B) Machine Learning
(C) Big Data
(D) Blockchain
Answer:
(A) Artificial Intelligence

Question 178.
Computer science defines ______________ research as the study of “intelligent agents”.
(A) Artificial Intelligence
(B) Machine Learning
(C) Big Data
(D) Blockchain
Answer:
(A) Artificial Intelligence

Question 179.
______________ is the scientific study of algorithms and statistical models that computer systems use to effectively perform a specific task.
(A) Artificial Intelligence
(B) Machine Learning
(C) Big Data
(D) Blockchain
Answer:
(B) Machine Learning

Question 180.
______________ refers to data sets that are too large or complex for traditional data-processing application software.
(A) Artificial Intelligence
(B) Machine Learning
(C) Big Data
(D) Blockchain
Answer:
(C) Big Data

Question 181.
______________ is a growing list of records, called blocks, which are linked using cryptography.
(A) Artificial Intelligence
(B) Machine Learning
(C) Big Data
(D) Blockchain
Answer:
(D) Blockchain

4. Multiple Choice Two Correct Answer.

Question 1.
Computer Architecture is a specification detailing of how a set of ______________ and ______________ technology standards interact to form a computer system
(A) Software
(B) Numbers
(C) Data
(D) Commands
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(A) Software (E) Hardware

Question 2.
Input unit helps users to enter ______________ and ______________ into a computer system.
(A) Software
(B) Numbers
(C) Data
(D) Commands
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(C) Data (D) Commands

Question 3.
The main function of input devices is to ______________ and ______________ into computer.
(A) Software
(B) Numbers
(C) Direct Commands
(D) Data
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(C) Direct Commands (D) Data

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 4.
Keyboard is an input device that enters ______________ and ______________
(A) Software
(B) Numbers
(C) Data
(D) Characters
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(B) Numbers (D) Characters

Question 5.
A Mouse can be an input device for entering ______________ and ______________
(A) Directions
(B) Commands
(C) Data
(D) Logical
(E) Comparison
Answer:
(A) Directions (B) Commands

Question 6.
After receiving ______________ and ______________ from users, a computer system has to process it according to the instructions provided. Here, it has to rely on a component called the Central Processing Unit.
(A) Directions
(B) Commands
(C) Data
(D) Logical
(E) Comparison
Answer:
(B) Commands (C) Data

Question 7.
Arithmetic and Logic Unit can even perform ______________ functions like the ______________ of data.
(A) Directions
(B) Commands
(C) Data
(D) Logical
(E) Comparison
Answer:
(D) Logical (E) Comparison

Question 8.
There are two types of memory ______________ & ______________
(A) Primary Memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Secondary Memory
(D) Read Only Memory
(E) Data
Answer:
(A) Primary Memory (C) Secondary Memory

Question 9.
Primary memory is generally of two types ______________ & ______________
(A) Primary Memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Secondary Memory
(D) Read Only Memory
(E) Data
Answer:
(B) Random Access Memory (D) Read Only Memory

Question 10.
Primary Memory holds the ______________ and ______________ on which computer is currently working.
(A) Primary Memory
(B) Instruction
(C) Secondary Memory
(D) Read-Only Memory
(E) Data
Answer:
(B) Instruction (E) Data

Question 11.
______________ and ______________ is often measured in Megabytes (MB) and Gigabytes (GB).
(A) Computer storage
(B) Megabytes (MB)
(C) Memory
(D) Gigabytes (GB)
(E) Data
Answer:
(A) Computer storage (C) Memory

Question 12.
Computer storage and memory is often measured in ______________ and ______________
(A) Computer storage
(B) Megabytes (MB)
(C) Memory
(D) Gigabytes (GB)
(E) Data
Answer:
(B) Megabytes (MB) (D) Gigabytes (GB)

Question 13.
A byte is the smallest unit, which can represent a ______________ item or a ______________
(A) Computer storage
(B) Character
(C) Memory
(D) Gigabytes (GB)
(E) Data
Answer:
(B) Character (E) Data

Question 14.
Computer hardware comprises of the ______________ components that a computer system requires to ______________
(A) Application Software
(B) Physical
(C) System Software
(D) Function
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(B) Physical (D) Function

Question 15.
Computer software can be classified into two types based on its utility ______________ & ______________
(A) Application Software
(B) Physical
(C) System Software
(D) Function
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(A) Application Software (C) System Software

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 16.
Linux Operating system is a program that allows different ______________ and various components of ______________
(A) Application
(B) Physical
(C) System Software
(D) Function
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(A) Application (E) Hardware

Question 17.
An operating system is a software program that empowers the ______________ to communicate and operate with the ______________
(A) Application Software
(B) Physical
(C) Computer Hardware
(D) Function
(E) Computer Software
Answer:
(C) Computer Hardware (E) Computer Software

Question 18.
Windows is a series of ______________ that are designed by ______________
(A) Operating Systems
(B) Open-Source Operating
(C) Microsoft
(D) Google
(E) Portable
Answer:
(A) Operating Systems (C) Microsoft

Question 19.
Chrome OS is an ______________ system created by ______________
(A) Operating Systems
(B) Open-Source Operating
(C) Microsoft
(D) Google
(E) Portable
Answer:
(B) Open-Source Operating (D) Google

Question 20.
Linux is an open-source, ______________, ______________, operating system.
(A) Operating Systems
(B) Open-Source Operating
(C) Portable
(D) Google
(E) Multi-User-Multiprogramming
Answer:
(C) Portable (E) Multi-User-Multiprogramming

Question 21.
Android is a free and ______________ for mobile phones provided by ______________
(A) Operating Systems
(B) Open-Source Operating
(C) Multi- Multiprogramming
(D) Google
(E) Portable
Answer:
(B) Open-Source Operating (D) Google

Question 22.
Asha is used by ______________ phones. This is ______________ OS.
(A) Nokia
(B) Microsoft
(C) Closed Source
(D) Multitasking
(E) Multi-User
Answer:
(A) Nokia (C) Closed Source

Question 23.
Blackberry is a closed source operating system for ______________ and ______________
(A) Smartphone
(B) Tablet Devices
(C) Microsoft
(D) Multitasking
(E) Multi-User
Answer:
(A) Smartphone (B)Tablet Devices

Question 24.
Windows Phone is developed by ______________ as a ______________ for mobile phones.
(A) Nokia
(B) Microsoft
(C) Closed Source Operating System
(D) Multitasking
(E) Multi-User
Answer:
(B) Microsoft (C) Closed Source Operating System

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 25.
UNIX was trademarked in 1969 by a group of AT&T employees at Bell Labs as a ______________ and ______________ computer operating system.
(A) Smartphone
(B) Tablet Devices
(C) Microsoft
(D) Multitasking
(E) Multi-User
Answer:
(D) Multitasking (E) Multi-User

Question 26.
The Search option is used for ______________ search of the ______________
(A) Quick
(B) Personal
(C) Application
(D) Settings
(E) Software
Answer:
(A) Quick (C) Application

Question 27.
The Home folder is where all the ______________ documents and ______________ are stored.
(A) Quick
(B) Personal
(C) Application
(D) Settings
(E) Software
Answer:
(B) Personal (D) Settings

Question 28.
Repositories is a collection of ______________ for a ______________ distribution on the server.
(A) Quick
(B) Software
(C) Application
(D) Settings
(E) Linux
Answer:
(B) Software (E) Linux

Question 29.
The Package manager updates the ______________ as well as other ______________ periodically.
(A) Operating System
(B) Softwares
(C) Application
(D) Settings
(E) Linux
Answer:
(A) Operating System (B) Softwares

Question 30.
Computer Network is a group of ______________ or ______________ to have communication within themselves.
(A) Interconnected Computers
(B) Devices
(C) High Speed
(D) Relatively Expensive
(E) Telephone Network
Answer:
(A) Interconnected Computers (B) Devices

Question 31.
In Wide Area Network type of network the technology is ______________ and ______________
(A) Interconnected Computers
(B) Devices
(C) High Speed
(D) Relatively Expensive
(E) Telephone Network
Answer:
(C) Highspeed (D) Relatively Expensive

Question 32.
A Communication medium used for WAN is ______________ or ______________
(A) Devices
(B) High Speed
(C) Relatively Expensive
(D) Telephone Network
(E) Satellite Link
Answer:
(D) Telephone Network (E) Satellite Link

Question 33.
Two of the most widely used types of network architecture are ______________ and ______________
(A) Peer-to-Peer
(B) Devices
(C) Client/Server
(D) High Speed
(E) Relatively Expensive
Answer:
(A) Peer-to-Peer (C) Client/Server

Question 34.
There are two types of machines in network, ______________ and ______________
(A) Client
(B) Devices
(C) Server
(D) High Speed
(E) Relatively Expensive
Answer:
(A) Client (C) Server

Question 35.
The first workable prototype of the ______________ came in the late 1960’s with the creation of ______________
(A) Internet
(B) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(C) Packet
(D) Single
(E) Network
Answer:
(A) Internet (B) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 36.
Advanced Research Projects Agency Network used ______________ switching to allow multiple computers to communicate on a ______________ network.
(A) Internet
(B) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(C) Packet
(D) Single
(E) Network
Answer:
(C) Packet (D) Single

Question 37.
Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol breaks down the message into ______________ and sends them out into the ______________
(A) Internet
(B) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(C) Packets
(D) Single
(E) Network
Answer:
(C) Packets (E) Network

Question 38.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol can automatically assign internet addresses to ______________ and ______________
(A) Computers
(B) Internet
(C) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(D) Users
(E) Network
Answer:
(A) Computers (D) Users

Question 39.
File Transfer Protocol is used to ______________ and ______________ files on the internet.
(A) Transfer
(B) Sending
(C) Manipulate
(D) Receiving
(E) HTML
Answer:
(A) Transfer (C) Manipulate

Question 40.
HyperText Transfer Protocol is an internet-based protocol for ______________ and ______________ web pages.
(A) Transfer
(B) Sending
(C) Manipulate
(D) Receiving
(E) HTML
Answer:
(B) Sending (D) Receiving

Question 41.
The outcome of an IT Enabled Service is in two forms ______________ & ______________
(A) Direct Improved Service
(B) Indirect Benefits
(C) Manipulate
(D) Receiving
(E) HTML
Answer:
(A) Direct Improved Service (B) Indirect Benefits

Question 42.
Web Designer can develop interactive websites using knowledge of ______________, ______________ and various other programming languages.
(A) Direct Improved Service
(B) Indirect Benefits
(C) HTML
(D) Receiving
(E) PHP
Answer:
(C) HTML (E) PHP

Question 43.
Professional Accountant using ______________ software can successfully handle ______________ work.
(A) Computerized Accounting
(B) Accounting
(C) HTML
(D) Receiving
(E) PHP
Answer:
(A) Computerized Accounting (B) Accounting

Question 44.
It is possible to become a successful Animator using one’s own ______________ and ______________
(A) Creation
(B) Handheld
(C) Innovation
(D) Data
(E) Algorithms
Answer:
(A) Creation (C) Innovation

Question 45.
Green computing is important for all classes of systems, ranging from ______________ systems to largescale ______________ centers.
(A) Creation
(B) Handheld
(C) Innovation
(D) Data
(E) Algorithms
Answer:
(B) Handheld (D) Data

Question 46.
Machine Learning is the scientific study of ______________ and ______________ models that computer systems use to effectively perform a specific task.
(A) Creation
(B) Handheld
(C) Innovation
(D) Algorithms
(E) Statistical
Answer:
(D) Algorithms (E) Statistical

Question 47.
Blockchain is a growing list of records, called ______________, which are linked using ______________
(A) Blocks
(B) Creation
(C) Handheld
(D) Innovation
(E) Cryptography
Answer:
(A) Blocks (E) Cryptography

5. Multiple Choice Three Correct Answers.

Question 1.
Information technology refers to ______________, ______________, and ______________
(A) Hardware
(B) Input Unit
(C) Output Unit
(D) Software (computer programs)
(E) Computer Networks
Answer:
(A) Hardware (D) Software (computer programs) (E) Computer networks

Question 2.
Computer Architecture is a specification detailing of how a set of ______________ and ______________ technology standards interact to form a ______________
(A) Software
(B) Hardware
(C) Computer System
(D) Input Unit
(E) Output Unit
Answer:
(A) Software (B) Hardware (C) Computer System

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 3.
Every computer system has the following three basic components ______________, ______________ & ______________
(A) Data
(B) Commands
(C) Input Unit
(D) Central Processing Unit
(E) Output Unit
Answer:
(C) Input Unit (D) Central Processing Unit (E) Output Unit

Question 4.
Input unit helps users to enter ______________ and ______________ into a ______________
(A) Data
(B) Commands
(C) Input Unit
(D) Central Processing Unit
(E) Computer System
Answer:
(A) Data (B) Commands (E) Computer System

Question 5.
The CPU further uses these three elements ______________, ______________ & ______________
(A) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(B) Image
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
(E) Icons
Answer:
(A) Arithmetic and Logic Unit (C) Control Unit (D) Memory Unit

Question 6.
The graphical user interface is when the user interacts with the computer using ______________ , ______________, and ______________
(A) Images
(B) Icons
(C) Dialog Boxes
(D) Computers
(E) Printers
Answer:
(A) Images (B) Icons (C) Dialog Boxes

Question 7.
A computer network consists of a collection of ______________, ______________ and ______________ that is connected together.
(A) Computers
(B) Printers
(C) Metropolitan Area Network
(D) Wide Area Network
(E) Other equipment
Answer:
(A) Computers (B) Printers (E) Other equipment

Question 8.
______________, ______________ & ______________ are three types of network based on the geographical area they cover.
(A) Local Area Network
(B) Metropolitan Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Web enabled services
(E) Remote services
Answer:
(A) Local Area Network (B) Metropolitan Area Network (C) Wide Area Network

Question 9.
IT Enabled Services (ITES), also called ______________ or ______________ or ______________
(A) Local Area Network
(B) Wide Area Network
(C) Web Enabled Services
(D) Remote Services
(E) Tele-Working
Answer:
(C) Web Enabled Services (D) Remote Services (E) Tele-Working

6. Match the following.

Question 1.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Computer (A) Input device
(2) Keyboard (B) Computare
(3) Arithmetic and Logic Unit (C) Arithmetic Operations
(4) Memory Unit (D) Pre-programmed instructions

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Computer (B) Computare
(2) Keyboard (A) Input device
(3) Arithmetic and Logic Unit (C) Arithmetic Operations
(4) Memory Unit (D) Pre-programmed instructions

Question 2.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Primary Memory (A) Non-Volatile Memory
(2) RAM (B) Volatile Memory
(3) ROM (C) Internal memory
(4) Binary Digit (D) 0 or 1

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Primary Memory (C) Internal memory
(2) RAM (B) Volatile Memory
(3) ROM (A) Non-Volatile Memory
(4) Binary Digit (D) 0 or 1

Question 3.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) 4 bits (A) Software
(2) 8 bits (B) Physical components
(3) Computer hardware (C) Byte
(4) Program or set of programs (D) Nibble

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) 4 bits (D) Nibble
(2) 8 bits (C) Byte
(3) Computer hardware (B) Physical components
(4) Program or set of programs (A) Software

Question 4.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Open source software (A) Public domain
(2) Closed source software (B) Purchase the software
(3) Applications software (C) Operating system
(4) System Software (D) End-user programs

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Open source software (A) Public domain
(2) Closed source software (B) Purchase the software
(3) Applications software (D) End-user programs
(4) System Software (C) Operating system

Question 5.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Apple Corporation’s (A) Mac OS
(2) Google (B) Android
(3) Asha (C) Nokia Phones
(4) Microsoft (D) Windows Phone

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Apple Corporation’s (A) Mac OS
(2) Google (B) Android
(3) Asha (C) Nokia Phones
(4) Microsoft (D) Windows Phone

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 6.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Ubuntu (A) Free from viruses
(2) Linux Operating System (B) GNU/Linux
(3) Repositories (C) Collection of Software

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Ubuntu (B) GNU/Linux
(2) Linux Operating System (A) Free from viruses
(3) Repositories (C) Collection of Software

Question 7.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) LAN (A) Covers the smallest area
(2) MAN (B) The largest of all
(3) WAN (C) Covers an area larger than LAN

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) LAN (A) Covers the smallest area
(2) MAN (C) Covers an area larger than LAN
(3) WAN (B) The largest of all

Question 8.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Peer-to-Peer Architecture (A) Connecting millions of computers
(2) Client-Server Architecture (B) Client and server
(3) Internet (C) World Wide Web
(4) Tim Berners-Lee (D) Same Status

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Peer-to-Peer Architecture (D) Same Status
(2) Client-Server Architecture (B) Client and server
(3) Internet (A) Connecting millions of computers
(4) Tim Berners-Lee (C) World Wide Web

Question 9.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Domain Name System (A) Sending and receiving web pages
(2) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (B) Transfer and manipulate files
(3) File Transfer Protocol (C) Automatically assign internet addresses
(4) HyperText Transfer Protocol (D) Translates Network Address

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Domain Name System (D) Translates Network Address
(2) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (C) Automatically assign internet addresses
(3) File Transfer Protocol (B) Transfer and manipulate files
(4) HyperText Transfer Protocol (A) Sending and receiving web pages

Question 10.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Internet Message Access Protocol (A) Receiving e-mail messages from the server
(2) Internet Relay Chat (B) Used for Internet chat
(3) Post Office Protocol Version 3 (C) Receiving an e-mail from remote mail servers
(4) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (D) Sending e-mail messages to the Server
(5) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol (E) Breaks down the message into packets

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Internet Message Access Protocol (A) Receiving e-mail messages from the server
(2) Internet Relay Chat (B) Used for Internet chat
(3) Post Office Protocol Version 3 (C) Receiving an e-mail from remote mail servers
(4) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (D) Sending e-mail messages to the Server
(5) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol (E) Breaks down the message into packets

Question 11.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) IT Enabled Services (ITES) (A) HTML & PHP
(2) Web Designer and Developer (B) Web Enabled Services
(3) Software Developer (C) Scripting Skill
(4) Database Manager (D) SQL Skills

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) IT Enabled Services (ITES) (B) Web Enabled Services
(2) Web Designer and Developer (A) HTML & PHP
(3) Software Developer (C) Scripting Skill
(4) Database Manager (D) SQL Skills

Question 12.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Information Security Analyst (A) Networks are watertight
(2) Professional Accountant (B) Handle accounting work
(3) Financial Advisor (C) Investing the money
(4) Animator (D) Creation and innovation

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Information Security Analyst (A) Networks are watertight
(2) Professional Accountant (B) Handle accounting work
(3) Financial Advisor (C) Investing the money
(4) Animator (D) Creation and innovation

Question 13.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Green Computing (A) Computing Services
(2) Internet of Things (IoT) (B) Network of Physical Devices
(3) Cloud Computing (C) Green Chemistry
(4) Data Analytics (D) Examining Data

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Green Computing (C) Green Chemistry
(2) Internet of Things (IoT) (B) Network of Physical Devices
(3) Cloud Computing (A) Computing Services
(4) Data Analytics (D) Examining Data

Question 14.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Artificial Intelligence (A) Blocks
(2) Machine Learning (B) Too large or complex
(3) Big Data (C) Algorithms and Statistical Models
(4) Blockchain (D) Intelligent Agents

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Artificial Intelligence (D) Intelligent Agents
(2) Machine Learning (C) Algorithms and Statistical Models
(3) Big Data (B) Too large or complex
(4) Blockchain (A) Blocks

7. Answer Briefly.

Question 1.
Define Information Technology.
Answer:
Information Technology encompasses all of the technologies that we use in order to create, collect, process, protect and store information. Information Technology refers to “hardware, software (computer programs), and computer networks”.

Question 2.
Explain ICT.
Answer:

  • The full form of ICT is Information and Communication Technology.
  • The information and Communication Technology concept involves the transfer and use of all kinds of information.
  • Information and Communication Technology is the foundation of the economy and a driving force of social changes in the 21st century.

Question 3.
What are Data and Information?
Answer:
Data can be any character, text, word, number, or raw facts.
Examples of Data:
Mumbai, 1234, Aditya, MG Road, Maharashtra, 9444444441, 411004

Information is data formatted in a manner that allows it to be utilized by human beings in some significant way.
Examples of Information:
Aditya, 1234, MG Road, Mumbai 400004,
Maharashtra, 944444444114.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 4.
What is Computer and Computer System?
Answer:

  1. The word Computer is derived from the Latin word Computare.
  2. An electronic device that accepts input from the user, processes it according to the instructions given to it, and gives the required result in the form of output, is a Computer.
  3. The computer can process data, images, audio, video, and graphics.
  4. Computer accepts data or instructions by way of input.
  5. Computer stores data.
  6. A computer can process data as required by the user.
  7. The computer gives results in the form of output.
  8. The computer controls all operations inside a computer.

Question 5.
What is Computer Architecture?
Answer:

  1. Computer Architecture is a specification detailing how a set of software and hardware technology standards interact to form a computer system.
  2. Computer Architecture refers to how a computer system is designed and how it works.

Question 6.
Explain Input Unit
Answer:

  1. Input unit helps users to enter data and commands into a computer system.
  2. The main function of input devices is to direct commands and data into the computer.
  3. The keyboard is an input device that enters numbers and characters.
  4. A mouse can be an input device for entering directions and commands.

Question 7.
Briefly explain the CPU and its element.
Answer:

  1. After receiving data and commands from users, a computer system has to process it according to the instructions provided. Here, it has to rely on a component called the Central Processing Unit.
  2. The Central Processing Unit further uses these three elements Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Control Unit, and Memory Unit.
  3. The full form of ALU is the Arithmetic and Logic Unit.
  4. The arithmetic and Logic Unit part of the CPU performs arithmetic operations.
  5. Arithmetic and Logic Unit can even perform logical functions like the comparison of data.
  6. The Control Unit is the backbone of computers.
  7. The Control Unit is responsible for coordinating tasks between all components of a computer system.
  8. The Control Unit collects data from input units and sends it to processing units depending on its nature.
  9. Control Unit transmits processed data to output units to facilitate users.
  10. Once a user enters data using input devices, the computer system stores this data in its Memory unit.
  11. The Memory unit uses a set of pre-programmed instructions to further transmit this data to other parts of the CPU.

Question 8.
Explain the types of memory.
Answer:
There are two types of memory (1) Primary Memory (2) Secondary Memory

  1. Primary Memory is the internal memory of the computer.
  2. Primary Memory is also known as main memory.
  3. Primary Memory holds the data and instructions on which computer is currently working.
  4. RAM stands for Random Access Memory.
  5. Random Access Memory is known as reading/write memory.
  6. Random Access Memory is generally referred to as the main memory of the computer system.
  7. Random Access Memory is a temporary memory.
  8. Random Access Memory is also called Volatile Memory.
  9. Read-Only Memory is a Permanent Type memory.
  10. Read-Only Memory cannot be overwritten by the computer.
  11. Read-Only Memory is also called Non-Volatile Memory.
  12. Secondary Memory is an external memory of the computer.
  13. Secondary Memory is used to store a huge amount of different programs and information.

Question 9.
What is the Output unit and units of memory?
Answer:

  1. Output units basically reproduce the data formatted by the computer for the user’s benefit.
  2. The bit is a binary digit that holds only one of two values.
  3. A group of 4 bits is called a Nibble.
  4. A group of 8 bits is called a Byte.
  5. A Byte is the smallest unit, which can represent a data item or a character.
  6. 1 Byte is 8 Bits.
  7. 1 KiloByte (KB) is 1,024 Bytes.
  8. 1 MegaByte (MB) is 1,024 KiloBytes.
  9. 1 GigaByte (GB) is 1,024 MegaBytes.
  10. 1 TeraByte (TB) is 1,024 GigaBytes.
  11. 1 PetaByte (PB) is 1,024 TeraBytes.
  12. 1 ExaByte (EB) is 1,024 PetaBytes.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 10.
Explain concepts of hardware and software.
Answer:

  1. Computer hardware comprises the physical components that a computer system requires to function.
  2. A set of instructions given to the computer is known as Program.
  3. Program or set of programs are called Software.
  4. Software is a generic term used to describe computer programs.
  5. Open-source software refers to the software which releases code in the public domain for anyone to use.
  6. The full form of FOSS is FOSS Free Open Source Software Policy.
  7. Free Open Source Software Policy and enabled them to save some millions of rupees each year in licensing costs.
  8. In the case of Closed Source Software user has to purchase the software before using it.

Question 11.
Write down the classification of software based on its utility.
Answer:

  1. Application software is a program or group of programs designed for end-users.
  2. Applications software is also called end-user programs.
  3. System Software is a set of instructions required for a computer to work.
  4. Linux Operating system is a program that allows different applications and various components of the hardware.
  5. A computer would not be able to function correctly without an operating system.
  6. An operating system is a software program that empowers the computer hardware to communicate and operate with the computer software.
  7. The operating system boots up the computer and makes sure that everything is operational.
  8. The operating system is also what runs the cell phone and most electronic devices.
  9. The operating systems usually come preloaded on any computer, tablet, laptop, or cell phone that the user buys.

Question 12.
Explain Operating Systems for Personal Computers and Mobile Phones.
Answer:

  1. The full form of DOS is Disk Operating System.
  2. Windows is a series of operating systems that are designed by Microsoft.
  3. Windows is the most commonly used operating system.
  4. Apple Corporation’s registered operating system is called Mac OS.
  5. Chrome OS is an open-source operating system created by Google.
  6. Linux is an open-source, portable, multi- multiprogramming, operating system.
  7. Android is a free and open-source operating system for mobile phones provided by Google.
  8. Asha is used by Nokia phones. This is a closed source OS.
  9. Blackberry is a closed source operating system for smartphone and tablet devices.
  10. IOS is Apple’s closed source operating system for Apple’s iPhone, iPod Touch, iPad, and second-generation Apple TVs.
  11. Windows Phone is developed by Microsoft as a closed source operating system for mobile phones.
  12. Linux is used as the predominant backbone of the Internet.
  13. Ubuntu is one of the most popular GNU/Linux distributions.

Question 13.
Explain GUI and CLI.
Answer:

  1. The full form of GUI is Graphical User Interface.
  2. Full form of CLI Command Line Interface.
  3. The graphical user interface is when the user interacts with the computer using images, icons, and dialog boxes.
  4. The Search option is used for a quick search of the application.
  5. The Home folder is where all the personal documents and settings are stored.
  6. The Command-line interface is when the user interacts with the computer using text.
  7. The Commands are programs that are run when a user types the command name.

Question 14.
Explain the advantages of GNU/Linux.
Answer:

  1. Linux is Free and Open Source.
  2. Linux Operating System is free from viruses.
  3. Proprietary Operating Systems can update themselves.
  4. The repository is a collection of software for a Linux distribution on the server.
  5. The Package manager updates the operating system as well as other software periodically.

Question 15.
Define Computer networks and different types of networks.
Answer:

  1. Computer Network is a group of interconnected computers or devices to have communication within themselves.
  2. A Computer Network consists of a collection of computers, printers, and other equipment that is connected together.
  3. The full form of LAN is the Local Area Network.
  4. The full form of MAN is Metropolitan Area Network.
  5. The full form of WAN is a Wide Area Network.
  6. Local Area Network type of network covers the smallest area.
  7. Metropolitan Area Network covers an area larger than LAN.
  8. Wide Area Network type of network comprises the largest of all.
  9. In Local Area Network, usage area is limited to areas such as an office building, home, hospital, schools, etc.
  10. Local Area Network covers a short distance, and so the error and noise are minimized.
  11. Local Area Network type of network is easy to set up.
  12. In Local Area Network data transmits at a very fast rate as the number of computers linked is limited.
  13. Local Area Network is less expensive hardware and maintenance cost is also low.
  14. Metropolitan Area Network connects two or more separate computers that reside in the same or different cities.
  15. Full for of ISP is Internet Service Provider.
  16. Metropolitan Area Network covers a large geographical area and may serve as an ISP.
  17. Metropolitan Area Network type of network is hard to design and maintain.
  18. A Wide Area Network is a computer network that extends over a large geographical area.
  19. In the Wide Area Network type of network, the technology is high speed and relatively expensive.
  20. A Communication medium used for Wide Area networks is Telephone networks or Satellite Link.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 16.
Explain Network Architecture.
Answer:

  1. Network architecture is the design of a computer network.
  2. A Peer-to-Peer network has no dedicated servers.
  3. Client-Server type of architecture is most suitable for larger networks.
  4. A computer that is seeking any resource from another computer is a Client computer.
  5. If a computer has a resource that is served to another computer, it is a Server computer.

Question 17.
What is Internet?
Answer:

  1. Internet means connecting a computer to any other computer anywhere in the world.
  2. The Internet is generally defined as a global network connecting millions of computers.
  3. The Internet is a massive network of networks, a networking infrastructure.
  4. With the help of the Internet, one can easily be in touch with anyone in the whole world by sending electronic mail, by chatting.
  5. It can be said that the Internet provides a very strong connection or network between computers globally.

Question 18.
Write down the history of the Internet.
Answer:

  1. The full form of ARPANET is Advanced Research Projects Agency Network.
  2. The first workable prototype of the internet came in the late 1960s with the creation of the Advanced Research Projects Agency Network.
  3. Advanced Research Projects Agency Network used packet switching to allow multiple computers to communicate on a single network.
  4. The full form of TCP/ IP is Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol.
  5. Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol communications model that set standards for how data could be transmitted between multiple networks.
  6. The full form of WWW is World Wide Web.
  7. Tim Berners-Lee invented the World Wide Web.

Question 19.
Define Protocol with examples.
Answer:

  1. A Protocol is a set of rules that governs the communications between computers on a network.
  2. Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol breaks down the message into packets and sends them out into the network.
  3. The full form of DNS is Domain Name System.
  4. Domain Name System translates network address into terms understood by humans and vice-versa.
  5. DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
  6. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol can automatically assign internet addresses to computers and users.
  7. FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol.
  8. File Transfer Protocol is used to transfer and manipulate files on the internet.
  9. The full form of HTTP is HyperText Transfer Protocol.
  10. HyperText Transfer Protocol is an internet-based protocol for sending and receiving web pages.
  11. The full form of IMAP is Internet Message Access Protocol.
  12. Internet Message Access Protocol is used for receiving e-mail messages from servers on the Internet.
  13. Internet Message Access Protocol maintains a copy of all the emails on the server.
  14. The full form of IRC is Internet Relay Chat.
  15. Internet Relay Chat facilitates communication in the form of text.
  16. POP3 stands for Post Office Protocol Version 3.
  17. Post Office Protocol Version 3 is used for receiving e-mail from remote mail servers.
  18. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used for sending e-mail messages to the Server on the Internet.

Question 20.
Explain the meaning of ITES.
Answer:

  1. The full form of ITES is IT Enabled Services.
  2. IT Enabled Services (ITES), also called as Web-Enabled Services.
  3. IT Enabled Services covers the entire amount of operations that exploit Information Technology for improving the efficiency of an organization.

Question 21.
Discuss various careers opportunities in IT.
Answer:

  1. Web Designer can develop interactive websites using knowledge of HTML, PHP, and various other programming languages.
  2. It is possible to have a career as a software developer with scripting skills.
  3. After getting knowledge about Database management one can work as a Database Manager.
  4. Information Security Analysts are responsible for ensuring that networks are watertight.
  5. Professional Accountant using computerized accounting software can successfully handle accounting work.
  6. Financial Advisor after getting IT knowledge one can advise and guide others in investing the money in various investment schemes.
  7. It is possible to become a successful Animator using one’s own creation and innovation.
  8. Perhaps one of the trendiest and most fun jobs in the sector, a games developer.
  9. As a career opportunity, to become an Audio / Video Editor one should be good in tools such as Kdenlive, Audacity.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 22.
Write down the recent trends in IT.
Answer:

  1. Green Computing is the study and practice of environmentally sustainable computing or IT.
  2. The goals of green computing are similar to green chemistry.
  3. Green computing is important for all classes of systems, ranging from handheld systems to large-scale data centers.
  4. The full form of IoT is the Internet of Things.
  5. The Internet of Things is the network of physical devices, vehicles, home appliances, and other items embedded with electronics, software, sensors, actuators, and connectivity.
  6. Cloud Computing is the delivery of computing services over the internet.
  7. Data Analytics is the process of examining data sets in order to draw conclusions about the information.
  8. Data Analytics technologies and techniques are widely used in commercial industries to enable organizations to make more informed business decisions.
  9. Artificial Intelligence is intelligence demonstrated by machines, in contrast to the natural intelligence displayed by humans and other animals.
  10. Computer science defines Artificial Intelligence research as the study of “intelligent agents”.
  11. Machine Learning is the scientific study of algorithms and statistical models that computer systems use to effectively perform a specific task.
  12. Big Data refers to data sets that are too large or complex for traditional data-processing application software.
  13. Blockchain is a growing list of records, called blocks, which are linked using cryptography.